S60 Owner's manual L:7:9>I>DC

Welcome to the world-wide family of Volvo owners. We trust that you vehicle if you may be affected by alcohol, medication or any impair-
will enjoy many years of safe driving in your Volvo, an automobile ment that could hinder your ability to drive.
designed with your safety and comfort in mind. We encourage you
Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable federal safety and
to familiarize yourself with the equipment descriptions and operating
emission standards. If you have any questions regarding your vehicle,
instructions in this manual.
please contact your Volvo retailer or see the section "Contacting
We also urge you and your passengers to wear seat belts at all times Volvo" in this manual's "Introduction" chapter for information on get-
in this (or any other) vehicle. And, of course, please do not operate a ting in touch with Volvo in the United States and Canada.
 Contents

00 01 02
00 Introduction 01 Safety 02 Locks and alarm
Important information................................. 6 Occupant safety........................................ 16 Remote key and key blade....................... 52
Environment.............................................. 12 Reporting safety defects........................... 17 Valet locking ............................................. 60
Important warnings................................... 13 Seat belts ................................................. 18 Keyless drive............................................. 61
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) .... 22 Locks........................................................ 65
Occupant Weight Sensor ......................... 27 Alarm......................................................... 70
Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags ..... 31
Inflatable Curtain (IC) ............................... 33
Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS..... 34
Crash mode.............................................. 36
Child safety............................................... 37
Child restraint systems............................. 40
Infant seats............................................... 42
Convertible seats...................................... 44
Booster cushions...................................... 46
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors.................. 47
Top tether anchors.................................... 48
Child safety locks...................................... 49

2
 Contents

03 04 05
03 Your driving environment 04 Driver support 05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Instruments and controls.......................... 76 Stability system....................................... 130 Volvo Sensus.......................................... 186
Ignition modes.......................................... 84 Road sign information (RSI) ................... 133 Menus and messages............................. 187
Seats......................................................... 86 Cruise control.......................................... 135 The MY CAR menus............................... 189
Steering wheel.......................................... 92 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*.............. 137 Climate system....................................... 195
Lighting..................................................... 93 Distance Alert* ....................................... 148 Trip computer......................................... 203
Wipers and washers............................... 101 City Safety™ .......................................... 151 Active chassis system–Four C*............... 205
Power windows....................................... 103 Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Passenger compartment convenience... 206
Mirrors..................................................... 105 Pedestrian Detection*............................. 157
Compass*............................................... 107 Driver Alert System* ............................... 165
Power moonroof..................................... 108 Park assist*............................................. 171
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)* ............ 175
HomeLink® Wireless Control System*.... 110
Blind Spot Information System*.............. 179
Starting the engine.................................. 113
Transmission........................................... 118
Brakes..................................................... 121
Parking brake.......................................... 124

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3

 Contents

06 07 08
06 Infotainment 07 During your trip 08 Wheels and tires
Introduction............................................. 212 Driving recommendations....................... 254 General information ............................... 274
Radio....................................................... 222 Refueling................................................. 257 Tire inflation............................................. 277
Media player........................................... 231 Loading................................................... 262 Inflation pressure ................................... 279
AUX/USB sockets................................... 235 Towing a trailer....................................... 265 Tire designations .................................... 280
BluetoothŸ media ................................... 238 Emergency towing.................................. 268 Glossary of tire terminology ................... 282
Bluetooth® hands-free connection ........ 240 Vehicle loading ....................................... 283
Cell phone voice control......................... 248 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ................. 285
Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires . 286
Temporary Spare ................................... 287
Tire Sealing System................................ 288
Changing a wheel .................................. 294
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 298

4
 Contents

09 10 11
09 Maintenance and 10 Specifications 11 Index
specifications Label information.................................... 340 Index....................................................... 354
Volvo maintenance.................................. 304 Specifications......................................... 342
Maintaining your car............................... 305 Overview of information and warning sym-
Hood and engine compartment.............. 307 bols......................................................... 349
Engine oil................................................ 308 Volvo programs....................................... 352
Fluids...................................................... 310
Replacing bulbs...................................... 312
Wiper blades and washer fluid................ 318
Battery..................................................... 320
Fuses...................................................... 324
Vehicle care............................................. 332

5
 Introduction

Important information

Contacting Volvo About this manual Decals

In the USA: There are various types of decals in the vehicle
• Before you operate your vehicle for the first whose purpose is to provide important infor-
Volvo Cars of North America, LLC time, please familiarize yourself with the
mation in a clear and concise way. The impor-
information found in the chapters "Your
Customer Care Center tance of these decals is explained as follows,
Driving Environment" and "During Your
in descending order of importance.
1 Volvo Drive, Trip."
P.O. Box 914 • Information contained in the balance of the Risk of injury
manual is extremely useful and should be
Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 read after operating the vehicle for the first
1-800-458-1552 time.

www.volvocars.us • The manual is structured so that it can be

used for reference. For this reason, it
In Canada: should be kept in the vehicle for ready
access.
Volvo Cars of Canada Corp
Footnotes
National Customer Service Certain pages of this manual contain informa-
175 Gordon Baker Road tion in the form of footnotes at the bottom of
the page. This information supplements the
North York, Ontario M2H 2N7 text that the footnote number refers to (a letter
1-800-663-8255 is used if the footnote refers to text in a table).
G031590

www.volvocars.ca Display texts

There are several displays in the driver’s field Black ISO symbols on a yellow warning back-
of vision that show messages generated by ground, white text/image on a black back-
various systems and functions in the vehicle. ground. Decals of this type are used to indicate
These texts are indicated in the Owner’s Man- potential danger. Ignoring a warning of this
ual by being in slightly larger type than the sur- type could result in serious injury or death.
rounding text and are printed in gray, (for
example: Change doors unlock setting).

6
 Introduction

Important information

Risk of damage to the vehicle Information Types of lists used in the manual
Procedures
Procedures (step-by-step instructions), or
actions that must be carried out in a certain
order, are arranged in numbered lists in this
manual.
If there is a series of illustrations associated
with step-by-step instructions, each step
in the procedure is numbered in the same
way as the corresponding illustration.
Lists in which letters are used can be found
with series of illustrations in cases where
G031592

G031593
the order in which the instructions are car-
ried out is not important.
Arrows with or without numbers are used
White ISO symbols and white text/image on a White ISO symbols and white text/image on a
to indicate the direction of a movement.
black or blue warning background and space black background. These decals provide gen-
for a message. If the information on decals of eral information. Arrows containing letters are used to indi-
this type is ignored, damage to the vehicle cate movement.
could result. NOTE If there are no illustrations associated with a
step-by-step list, the steps in the procedure
The decals shown in the Owner’s Manual
are examples only and are not intended to are indicated by ordinary numbers.
be reproductions of the decals actually used Position lists
in the vehicle. The purpose is to give an indi- Red circles containing a number are used
cation of how they look and their approxi- in general overview illustrations in which
mate location in the vehicle. The applicable
certain components are pointed out. The
information for your particular vehicle can
be found on the respective decals in the corresponding number is also used in the
vehicle. position list's description of the various
components.

7
 Introduction

Important information

Bullet lists NOTE WARNING

Bullets are used to differentiate a number of
components/functions/points of information • All information, illustrations and specifi- CALIFORNIA proposition 65
that can be listed in random order. cations contained in this manual are Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
based on the latest product information and certain vehicle components contain or
For example: available at the time of publication. emit chemicals known to the state of Cali-
• Coolant • Volvo reserves the right to make model fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects or
changes at any time, or to change spec- other reproductive harm. In addition, certain
• Engine oil ifications or design without notice and fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or
Continued without incurring obligation.
emit chemicals known to the State of Cali-
` `This symbol can be found at the lower right • Do not export your Volvo to another fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects or
corner of an odd-numbered (right-hand) page country before investigating that coun- other reproductive harm.
to indicate that the current topic is continued try's applicable safety and emission
on the following page. control requirements. In some cases it
may be difficult or impossible to comply WARNING
Options and accessories with these requirements. Modifications Certain components of this vehicle such as
Optional or accessory equipment described in to the emission control system(s) may air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners,
this manual is indicated by an asterisk. render your Volvo not certifiable for adaptive steering columns, and button cell
legal operation in the U.S., Canada and batteries may contain Perchlorate material.
Optional or accessory equipment may not be Special handling may apply for service or
other countries.
available in all countries or markets. Please vehicle end of life disposal.
note that some vehicles may be equipped dif-
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
ferently, depending on special legal require- WARNING perchlorate.
ments.
If your vehicle is involved in an accident,
Contact your Volvo retailer for additional infor- unseen damage may affect its drivability
mation. and safety.

8
 Introduction

Important information

Shiftlock ficult or impossible to comply with these • How various systems in your vehicle were
When your vehicle is parked, the gear selector requirements. Modifications to the emis- operating;
is locked in the P (Park) position. To release the sion control system(s) may render your • Whether or not the driver and passenger
selector from this position, the ignition must be Volvo not certifiable for legal operation in safety belts were buckled/fastened;
in mode II (see page 84) or the engine must the U.S., Canada and other countries.
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
be running. Depress the brake pedal, press the • All information, illustrations and specifica- the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
button on the front side of the gear selector and tions contained in this manual are based on
move the selector from P (Park). the latest product information available at • How fast the vehicle was traveling.
the time of publication. Please note that These data can help provide a better under-
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) some vehicles may be equipped differ- standing of the circumstances in which
The ABS system performs a brief self-diagnos- ently, depending on special legal require- crashes and injuries occur.
tic test when the engine has been started and ments. Optional equipment described in
driver releases the brake pedal. Another auto- this manual may not be available in all mar- NOTE
matic test may be performed when the vehicle kets.
first reaches a speed of approximately 6 mph EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only
• Volvo reserves the right to make model if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no
(10 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate several changes at any time, or to change specifi- data are recorded by the EDR under normal
times and a sound may be audible from the cations or design without notice and with- driving conditions and no personal data
ABS control module. This is normal. out incurring obligation. (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash loca-
tion) are recorded. However, other parties,
Fuel filler door such as law enforcement, could combine
Press the button on the light switch panel (see Crash event data the EDR data with the type of personally
the illustration on page 259) when the vehicle This vehicle is equipped with an event data identifying data routinely acquired during a
is at a standstill to unlock the fuel filler door. recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is crash investigation.
Please note that the fuel filler door will remain to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
unlocked until the vehicle begins to move for- situations, such as an air bag deployment or To read data recorded by an EDR, special
ward. An audible click will be heard when the hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in equipment is required, and access to the vehi-
fuel filler door relocks. understanding how a vehicle's systems per- cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
formed. The EDR is designed to record data vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
Points to keep in mind related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems law enforcement, that have the special equip-
• Do not export your Volvo to another coun- for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds ment, can read the information if they have
try before investigating that country's or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to access to the vehicle or the EDR.
applicable safety and exhaust emission record such data as:
requirements. In some cases it may be dif-

9
 Introduction

Important information

Furthermore, your vehicle is equipped with a that this handling is done in accordance with Volvo Structural Parts Statement
number of computers whose task is to contin- applicable legal requirements. For additional Volvo has always been and continues to be a
uously control and monitor the vehicle’s oper- information, contact: leader in automotive safety. Volvo engineers
ation. They can also register information during and manufactures vehicles designed to help
For additional information, contact:
normal driving conditions if they detect a fault protect vehicle occupants in the event of a col-
relating to the vehicle’s operation and func- In the United States lision.
tionality. Some of the stored information is Volvo Cars of North America, LLC
required by technicians when carrying out Volvos are designed to absorb the impact of a
service and maintenance to enable them to Customer Care Center collision. This energy absorption system
diagnose and rectify any faults that have including, but not limited to, structural compo-
1 Volvo Drive, P.O. box 914
occurred in the vehicle and to enable Volvo to nents such as bumper reinforcement bars,
fulfill legal and other regulatory requirements. Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 bumper energy absorbers, frames, rails, fender
This information may be stored in the vehicle’s 1-800-458-1552 aprons, A-pillars, B-pillars and body panels
computers for a certain period of time. must work together to maintain cabin integrity
www.volvocars.us and protect the vehicle occupants.
Volvo will not contribute to spreading the
above-mentioned information to third parties In Canada The supplemental restraint system including
without the consent of the vehicle’s owner. but not limited to air bags, side curtain air bags,
Volvo Cars of Canada Corp and deployment sensors work together with
However, due to national legal requirements
and regulations, Volvo may be compelled to National Customer Service the above components to provide proper tim-
provide information of this type to authorities ing for air bag deployment.
175 Gordon Baker Road
such as law enforcement agencies or others Due to the above, Volvo Cars of North America
who may assert a legal right to obtain such North York, Ontario M2H 2N7 does not support the use of aftermarket, alter-
information. 1-800-663-8255 native or anything other than original Volvo
Volvo and service and repair facilities with parts for collision repair.
www.volvocars.ca
agreements with Volvo have access to the spe- In addition Volvo does not support the use or
cial technical equipment required in order to re-use of structural components from an exist-
read and interpret the information stored by the ing vehicle that has been previously damaged.
vehicle’s computers. Volvo is responsible for Although these parts may appear equivalent, it
ensuring that the information transmitted to is difficult to tell if the parts have been previ-
Volvo during service and maintenance is ously replaced with non-OE parts or if the part
stored and handled in a secure manner and has been damaged as a result of a prior colli-

10
 Introduction

Important information

sion. The quality of these used parts may also

have been affected due to environmental
exposure.

Information on the Internet

Additional information about your vehicle is
available at www.volvocars.com.
In order to read a QR code, a QR reader is nec-
essary, which is available as an app for a num-
ber of different cell phone and can be down-
loaded from the App Store or Android Market.

QR code

11
 Introduction

Environment

Volvo and the environment continuous environmental refinement of con- Recycling

Volvo is committed to the well being of its cus- ventional gasoline-powered internal combus- As part of Volvo’s commitment to the environ-
tomers. As a natural part of this commitment, tion engines, Volvo is actively looking at ment, it is essential for the vehicle to be recy-
we care about the environment in which we all advanced technology alternative-fuel vehicles. cled in an environmentally sound way. Almost
live. Caring for the environment means an the entire vehicle can be recycled and for that
everyday involvement in reducing our environ- When you drive a Volvo, you become our part- reason, the vehicle’s final owner is requested
mental impact. Volvo's environmental activities ner in the work to lessen the car's impact on to contact a Volvo retailer for information about
are based on a holistic view, which means we the environment. To reduce your vehicle's approved and certified recycling facilities.
consider the overall environmental impact of a environmental impact, you can:
FSCŸ
product throughout its complete life cycle. In • Maintain proper air pressure in your tires.
this context, design, production, product use, Tests have shown decreased fuel econ-
and recycling are all important considerations. omy with improperly inflated tires.
In production, Volvo has partly or completely • Follow the recommended maintenance
phased out several chemicals including CFCs, schedule in your Warranty and Service
lead chromates, asbestos, and cadmium; and Records Information booklet.
reduced the number of chemicals used in our
plants 50% since 1991.
• Drive at a constant speed whenever pos-
sible.
Volvo was the first in the world to introduce into • See a trained and qualified Volvo service
production a three-way catalytic converter with technician as soon as possible for inspec-
a Lambda sond, now called the heated oxygen tion if the check engine (malfunction indi- The FSCŸ (Forest Stewardship CouncilŸ) sym-
sensor, in 1976. The current version of this cator) light illuminates, or stays on after the bol indicates that the wood pulp used in this
highly efficient system reduces emissions of vehicle has started. publication comes from FSCŸ certified forests
harmful substances (CO, HC, NOx) from the • Properly dispose of any vehicle-related and other responsible sources.
exhaust pipe by approximately 95 – 99% and waste such as used motor oil, used batter-
the search to eliminate the remaining emis- ies, brake pads, etc.
sions continues. Volvo is the only automobile
manufacturer to offer CFC-free retrofit kits for
• When cleaning your vehicle, please use
genuine Volvo car care products. All Volvo
the air conditioning system of all models as far
car care products are formulated to be
back as the 1975 model 240. Advanced elec- environmentally friendly.
tronic engine controls and cleaner fuels are
bringing us closer to our goal. In addition to

12
 Introduction

Important warnings

Driver distraction cellular telephone use by a driver while the • Accessories that have not been approved
A driver has a responsibility to do everything vehicle is moving. by Volvo may or may not be specifically
possible to ensure his or her own safety and • If your vehicle is equipped with a naviga- tested for compatibility with your vehicle.
the safety of passengers in the vehicle and oth- tion system, set and make changes to your Additionally, an inexperienced installer
travel itinerary only with the vehicle parked. may not be familiar with some of your car's
ers sharing the roadway. Avoiding distractions
systems.
is part of that responsibility. • Never program your audio system while
the vehicle is moving. Program radio pre- • Any of your car's performance and safety
Driver distraction results from driver activities systems could be adversely affected if you
that are not directly related to controlling the sets with the vehicle parked, and use your
programmed presets to make radio use install accessories that Volvo has not tes-
vehicle in the driving environment. Your new ted, or if you allow accessories to be instal-
quicker and simpler.
Volvo is, or can be, equipped with many fea- led by someone unfamiliar with your vehi-
ture-rich entertainment and communication • Never use portable computers or personal cle.
systems. These include hands-free cellular tel- digital assistants while the vehicle is mov-
ephones, navigation systems, and multipur- ing. • Damage caused by unapproved or
improperly installed accessories may not
pose audio systems. You may also own other be covered by your new vehicle warranty.
portable electronic devices for your own con- Accessory installation See your Warranty and Service Records
venience. When used properly and safely, they • We strongly recommend that Volvo owners Information booklet for more warranty
enrich the driving experience. Improperly used, install only genuine, Volvo-approved information. Volvo assumes no responsi-
any of these could cause a distraction. accessories, and that accessory installa- bility for death, injury, or expenses that
For all of these systems, we want to provide the tions be performed only by a trained and may result from the installation of non-gen-
following warning that reflects the strong Volvo qualified Volvo service technician. uine accessories.
concern for your safety. Never use these devi- • Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to
ces or any feature of your vehicle in a way that ensure compatibility with the performance,
distracts you from the task of driving safely. safety, and emission systems in your vehi-
Distraction can lead to a serious accident. In cle. Additionally, a trained and qualified
addition to this general warning, we offer the Volvo service technician knows where
following guidance regarding specific newer accessories may and may not be safely
features that may be found in your vehicle: installed in your Volvo. In all cases, please
consult a trained and qualified Volvo serv-
• Never use a hand-held cellular telephone ice technician before installing any acces-
while driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit sory in or on your vehicle.

13
 Occupant safety...................................................................................... 16
Reporting safety defects......................................................................... 17
Seat belts ............................................................................................... 18
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ................................................... 22
Occupant Weight Sensor ....................................................................... 27
Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags ................................................... 31
Inflatable Curtain (IC) ............................................................................. 33
Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS................................................... 34
Crash mode............................................................................................ 36
Child safety............................................................................................. 37
Child restraint systems........................................................................... 40
Infant seats.............................................................................................. 42
Convertible seats.................................................................................... 44
Booster cushions.................................................................................... 46
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors................................................................. 47
Top tether anchors.................................................................................. 48
Child safety locks.................................................................................... 49

14
SAFETY
 01 Safety

01 Occupant safety

Volvo's concern for safety • Never drink and drive.

Safety is Volvo's cornerstone. Our concern • If you are taking any medication, consult
dates back to 1927 when the first Volvo rolled your physician about its potential effects
off the production line. Three-point seat belts on your driving abilities.
(a Volvo invention), safety cages, and energy- • Take a driver-retraining course.
absorbing impact zones were designed into
Volvo vehicles long before it was fashionable
• Have your eyes checked regularly.
or required by government regulation. • Keep your windshield and headlights
clean.
We will not compromise our commitment to
safety. We continue to seek out new safety
• Replace wiper blades when they start to
leave streaks.
features and to refine those already in our vehi-
cles. You can help. We would appreciate hear- • Take into account the traffic, road, and
ing your suggestions about improving automo- weather conditions, particularly with
bile safety. We also want to know if you ever regard to stopping distance.
have a safety concern with your vehicle. Call us • Never send text messages while driving.
in the U.S. at: 1-800-458-1552 or in Canada at: • Refrain from using or minimize the use of a
1-800-663-8255. cell phone while driving.
Occupant safety reminders
How safely you drive doesn't depend on how Recall information
old you are but rather on: Information regarding recalls or other service
campaigns is available on our website at
• How well you see. www.volvocars.com/us/. Select the tab YOUR
• Your ability to concentrate. VOLVO and the heading RECALL INFORMA-
• How quickly you make decisions under TION will be displayed at the lower left side of
stress to avoid an accident. the screen.
The following suggestions are intended to help
you cope with the ever changing traffic envi-
ronment.

16
 01 Safety

Reporting safety defects 01

Reporting safety defects in the U.S. http://www.safercar.gov Reporting safety defects in Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a If you believe your vehicle has a defect that
Volvo strongly recommends that if could cause a crash or could cause injury or
defect which could cause a crash or your vehicle is covered under a serv- death, you should immediately inform Trans-
could cause injury or death, you ice campaign, safety or emission port Canada in addition to notifying Volvo Cars
should immediately inform the recall or similar action, it should be of Canada Corp.
National Highway Traffic Safety completed as soon as possible. Transport Canada can be contacted at:
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to Please check with your local retailer 1-800-333-0510
notifying Volvo Cars of North Amer- or Volvo Cars of North America, LLC
ica, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar Teletypewriter (TTY): 613 990-4500
if your vehicle is covered under these
complaints, it may open an investiga- conditions. Fax: 1-819-994-3372
tion, and if it finds that a safety defect Mailing Address: Transport Canada - Road
exists in a group of vehicles, it may NHTSA can be reached at: Safety, 80 rue Noël, Gatineau, (Quebec) J8Z
order a recall and remedy campaign. Internet: 0A1
However, NHTSA cannot become
http://www.nhtsa.gov
involved in individual problems
between you, your retailer, or Volvo Telephone:
Cars of North America, LLC. To con- 1-888-DASH-2-DOT
tact NHTSA, you may either call the (1-888-327-4236).
Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Trans-
portation, Washington D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from:

17
 01 Safety

01 Seat belts

General information in the event of a collision, limits the peak forces der section of the belt is across the seat occu-
exerted by the seat belt on the occupant. pant's collarbone and not across the throat.

Fastening a seat belt

Buckling
Pull the belt out far enough to insert the latch
plate into the receptacle until a distinct click is
heard. The seat belt retractor is normally
"unlocked" and you can move freely, provided
that the shoulder belt is not pulled out too far.
Adjusting seat belt height (front seat
belts only)
Adjusting the seat belt
Correct height adjustment
Seat belts should always be worn by all occu-
pants of your vehicle. Children should be prop-
erly restrained, using an infant, car, or booster
seat determined by age, weight and height.
Volvo also believes no child should sit in the
front seat of a vehicle.
Most states and provinces make it mandatory
for occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts.

Seat belt pretensioners Adjusting seat belt height

All seat belts are equipped with pretensioners
The height of the shoulder section of the seat
that reduce slack in the belts. These preten-
belt must be correctly adjusted. Press the but-
sioners are triggered in situations where the Incorrect height adjustment
ton and move the upper seat belt anchor to
front or side impact airbags deploy, and in cer-
position it as high as possible so that the shoul-
tain impacts from the rear. The front seat belts
also include a tension reducing device which,

18
 01 Safety

Seat belts 01

Seat belt retractor When wearing the seat belt remember: WARNING
The seat belt retractor will lock up in the fol- • The belt should not be twisted or turned.
lowing situations: Never use a seat belt for more than one
• The lap section of the belt must be posi- occupant. Never wear the shoulder portion
• if the belt is pulled out rapidly tioned low on the hips (not pressing against of the belt under the arm, behind the back
the abdomen). or otherwise out of position. Such use could
• during braking and acceleration
cause injury in the event of an accident. As
• Make sure that the shoulder belt is rolled
• if the vehicle is leaning excessively
up into its retractor and that the shoulder seat belts lose much of their strength when
• when driving in turns exposed to violent stretching, they should
and lap belts are taut.
be replaced after any collision, even if they
• if the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer-
Unbuckling the seat belt appear to be undamaged.
gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) is acti-
vated To remove the seat belt, press the red section
on the seat belt receptacle. Before exiting the WARNING
vehicle, check that the seat belt retracts fully
NOTE • Never repair the belt yourself; have this
after being unbuckled. If necessary, guide the
Each seat belt (except for the driver's belt) belt back into the retractor slot. work done by a trained and qualified
is equipped with the ALR/ELR function, Volvo service technician only.
which is designed to help keep the seat belt Seat belt maintenance • Any device used to induce slack into the
taut. ALR/ELR activates if the seat belt is Check periodically that the seat belts are in shoulder belt portion of the three-point
pulled out as far as possible. If this is done, good condition. Use water and a mild deter- belt system will have a detrimental
a sound from the seat belt retractor will be
gent for cleaning. Check seat belt mechanism effect on the amount of protection avail-
audible, which is normal, and the seat belt
will be pulled taut and locked in place. This function as follows: attach the seat belt and pull able to you in the event of a collision.
function is automatically disabled when the rapidly on the strap. • The seat back should not be tilted too
seat belt is unbuckled and fully retracted. far back. The shoulder belt must be taut
in order to function properly.
See also page 38 for information about using • Do not use child safety seats or child
a seat belt's ALR/ELR function to anchor a booster cushions/backrests in the front
child seat. passenger's seat. We also recommend
that children who have outgrown these
devices sit in the rear seat with the seat
belt properly fastened.

19
 01 Safety

01 Seat belts

Seat belt reminder • It provides information about which seat Seat belt use during pregnancy
belts are fastened in the rear seat. A mes-
sage will appear in the information display
when a belt is being used. This message
will disappear after approximately 6 sec-
onds or can be erased by pressing the
OK button on the left steering wheel lever.
• It also provides a reminder if one of the
occupants of the rear seat has unbuckled
his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in
motion. A visual and audible signal will be
given. These signals will stop when the
G017726

G020998
seat belt has been re-buckled or can be
stopped by pressing the OK button.
Seat belt reminder light in ceiling console
• The message Unbelted in rear seat will The seat belt should always be worn during
The seat belt reminder consists of an audible appear in the information display if one of pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the
signal, an indicator light near the rearview mir- the rear doors has been opened. correct way. The diagonal section should wrap
ror and a symbol in the instrument panel that over the shoulder then be routed between the
The message in the information display can
alert all occupants of the vehicle to fasten their breasts and to the side of the belly. The lap
always be accessed, even if it has been erased,
seat belts. The indicator light will be on for a section should lay flat over the thighs and as
by pressing the OK button to display stored
total of 6 seconds from the time the ignition is low as possible under the belly. It must never
messages.
switched on. There will also be an audible sig- be allowed to ride upward. Remove all slack
nal if the driver's seat belt is not fastened. from the belt and ensure that it fits close to the
body without any twists.
If the front seat belts are unbuckled while the
vehicle is in motion, the audible signal and As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
warning light will be active for a total of 6 sec- should adjust their seats and steering wheel
onds. such that they can easily maintain control of the
vehicle as they drive (which means they must
Rear seats be able to easily operate the foot pedals and
The seat belt reminder in the rear seat has two steering wheel). Within this context, they
additional functions: should strive to position the seat with as large

20
 01 Safety

Seat belts 01

a distance as possible between their belly and

the steering wheel.

Child seats
Please refer to page 40 for information on
securing child seats with the seat belts.

21
 01 Safety

01 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

General information properly, the general warning symbol illumi- WARNING

nates and a text message will be displayed.
See also page 78 and page 80 for more If your vehicle has become flood-damaged
information about indicator and warning sym- in any way (e.g., soaked carpeting/standing
water on the floor of the vehicle), do not
bols. attempt to start the vehicle or insert the
remote key into the ignition slot before dis-
WARNING connecting the battery (see below). This
may cause airbag deployment which could
• If the SRS warning light stays on after result in serious injury. Have the vehicle
the engine has started or if it illuminates towed to a trained and qualified Volvo serv-
while you are driving, have the vehicle ice technician for repairs.
inspected by a trained and qualified
Before attempting to tow the vehicle:
Volvo service technician as soon as
possible. 1. Switch off the ignition for at least
Warning symbols in the instrument panel 10 minutes and disconnect the battery.
• Never try to repair any component or
As an enhancement to the three-point seat part of the SRS yourself. Any interfer- 2. Follow the instructions for manually
belts, your Volvo is equipped with a Supple- ence in the system could cause mal- overriding the shiftlock system on page
function and serious injury. All work on 120.
mental Restraint System (SRS). Volvo's SRS
these systems should be performed by
consists of seat belt pretensioners, front air-
a trained and qualified Volvo service
bags, side impact airbags, a front passenger
technician.
occupant weight sensor, and inflatable cur-
tains. All of these systems are monitored by the
SRS control module. An SRS warning light in
the instrument panel (see the illustration) illu-
minates when the ignition is in modes I or II,
and will normally go out after approximately
6 seconds if no faults are detected in the sys-
tem.
Where applicable, a text message will also be
displayed when the SRS warning light illumi-
nates. If this warning symbol is not functioning

22
 01 Safety

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) 01

Front airbags The passenger's side front airbag is folded

behind a panel located above the glove com-
partment.

WARNING
• The airbags in the vehicle are designed
to be a SUPPLEMENT to–not a replace-
ment for–the three-point seat belts. For
maximum protection, wear seat belts at
all times. Be aware that no system can
prevent all possible injuries that may
G018665
occur in an accident.
Location of the passenger's side front airbag
• Never drive with your hands on the
As the movement of the seats' occupants com- steering wheel pad/airbag housing.
The front airbag system presses the airbags, some of the gas is expel-
The front airbags supplement the three-point led at a controlled rate to provide better cush-
• The front airbags are designed to help
seat belts. For these airbags to provide the prevent serious injury. Deployment
ioning. Both seat belt pretensioners also occurs very quickly and with consider-
protection intended, seat belts must be worn deploy, minimizing seat belt slack. The entire able force. During normal deployment
at all times. process, including inflation and deflation of the and depending on variables such as
The front airbag system includes gas genera- airbags, takes approximately one fifth of a sec- seating position, one may experience
tors surrounded by the airbags, and decelera- ond. abrasions, bruises, swellings, or other
tion sensors that activate the gas generators, The location of the front airbags is indicated by injuries as a result from deployment of
causing the airbags to be inflated with nitrogen SRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering wheel one or both of the airbags.
gas. pad and above the glove compartment, and by • When installing any accessory equip-
decals on both sun visors and on the front and ment, make sure that the front airbag
far right side of the dash. system is not damaged. Any interfer-
ence in the system could cause mal-
The driver's side front airbag is folded and function.
located in the steering wheel hub.

23
 01 Safety

01 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

Front airbag deployment WARNING Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

• The front airbags are designed to deploy 1-800-458-1552
during certain frontal or front-angular col- • Do not use child safety seats or child
lisions, impacts, or decelerations, depend- booster cushions/backrests in the front www.volvocars.us
ing on the crash severity, angle, speed and passenger's seat. We also recommend
that occupants under 4 feet 7 inches In Canada
object impacted. The airbags may also
deploy in certain non-frontal collisions (140 cm) in height who have outgrown Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.
where rapid deceleration occurs. these devices sit in the rear seat with the
seat belt fastened1. National Customer Service
• The SRS sensors, which trigger the front 175 Gordon Baker Road
airbags, are designed to react to both the • Never drive with the airbags deployed.
impact of the collision and the inertial The fact that they hang out can impair North York, Ontario M2H 2N7
forces generated by it, and to determine if the steering of your vehicle. Other
the intensity of the collision is sufficient for safety systems can also be damaged. 1-800-663-8255
the seat belt pretensioners and/or airbags • The smoke and dust formed when the www.volvocars.ca
to be deployed. airbags are deployed can cause skin
However, not all frontal collisions activate the and eye irritation in the event of pro-
front airbags. longed exposure.

• If the collision involves a nonrigid object

(e.g., a snow drift or bush), or a rigid, fixed Should you have questions about any compo-
object at a low speed, the front airbags will nent in the SRS system, please contact a
not necessarily deploy. trained and qualified Volvo service technician
or Volvo customer support:
• Front airbags do not normally deploy in a
side impact collision, in a collision from the In the USA
rear or in a rollover situation.
Volvo Cars of North America, LLC
• The amount of damage to the bodywork
does not reliably indicate if the airbags Customer Care Center
should have deployed or not. 1 Volvo Drive
P.O. Box 914

1 See also the Occupant Weight Sensor information on page 27.

24
 01 Safety

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) 01

NOTE Airbag decals WARNING

• Deployment of front airbags occurs only • Children must never be allowed in the
one time during an accident. In a colli- front passenger's seat.
sion where deployment occurs, the air- • Occupants in the front passenger's seat
bags and seat belt pretensioners acti- must never sit on the edge of the seat,
vate. Some noise occurs and a small sit leaning toward the instrument panel
amount of powder is released. The or otherwise sit out of position.
release of the powder may appear as
smoke-like matter. This is a normal • The occupant's back must be as upright
characteristic and does not indicate fire. as comfort allows and be against the

G008335
seat back with the seat belt properly
• Volvo's front airbags use special sen- fastened.
sors that are integrated with the front Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors
seat buckles. The point at which the air- • Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not on
bag deploys is determined by whether the dash, seat or out of the window.
or not the seat belt is being used, as well
as the severity of the collision.
• Collisions can occur where only one of
the airbags deploys. If the impact is less
severe, but severe enough to present a
clear injury risk, the airbags are trig-
gered at partial capacity. If the impact is
more severe, the airbags are triggered
at full capacity.

Passenger's side airbag decal

25
 01 Safety

01 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

WARNING
• No objects or accessory equipment,
e.g. dashboard covers, may be placed
on, attached to, or installed near the air
bag hatch (the area above the glove
compartment) or the area affected by
airbag deployment (see the illustration
on page 23).
• There should be no loose articles, such
as coffee cups on the floor, seat, or
dashboard area.
• Never try to open the airbag cover on
the steering wheel or the passenger's
side dashboard. This should only be
done by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.
• Failure to follow these instructions can
result in injury to the vehicle occupants.

26
 01 Safety

Occupant Weight Sensor 01

General information The OWS works with sensors that are part of airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG
the front passenger's seat and seat belt. The OFF indicator lamp is located in the overhead
sensors are designed to detect the presence of console, near the base of the rearview mirror.
a properly seated occupant and determine if
2
the passenger's side front airbag should be NOTE
enabled (may inflate) or disabled (will not
inflate). When the ignition is switched on, the OWS
indicator light will go on for up to 10 seconds
The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the pas- while the system performs a self-diagnostic
senger's side front airbag when: test.

• the front passenger's seat is unoccupied,

2 or has small/medium objects in the front However, if a fault is detected in the system:
G017724 seat, • The OWS indicator light will stay on
Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light • the system determines that an infant is • The SRS warning light (see page 22) will
present in a rear-facing infant seat that is come on and stay on
Disabling the passenger's side front installed according to the manufacturer's
instructions, • The message Pass. Airbag OFF Service
airbag urgent will be displayed in the information
Volvo recommends that ALL occupants (adults • the system determines that a small child is display.
and children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches present in a forward-facing child restraint
(140 cm) be seated in the back seat of any that is installed according to the manufac-
turer's instructions,
WARNING
vehicle with a front passenger side airbag, and
be properly restrained for their size and weight. • the system determines that a small child is If a fault in the system is detected and indi-
For child safety recommendations,see present in a booster seat, cated as described, be aware that the pas-
page 38. senger's side front airbag will not deploy in
• a front passenger takes his/her weight off the event of a collision. In this case, the SRS
The Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) is of the seat for a period of time, system and Occupant Weight Sensor
designed to meet the regulatory requirements • a child or a small person occupies the front should be inspected by a trained and quali-
of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard passenger's seat. fied Volvo service technician as soon as
(FMVSS) 208 and is designed to disable (will possible.
The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
not inflate) the passenger's side front airbag
indicator lamp which will illuminate and stay on
under certain conditions.
to remind you that the passenger's side front

27
 01 Safety

01 Occupant Weight Sensor

WARNING Passeng- OWS indi- Passeng- BAG OFF indicator lamp will be off and remain
off.
• Never try to open, remove, or repair any er's seat cator light er's side
components in the OWS system. This occu- status front air- If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
could result in system malfunction. pancy sta- bag status passenger's seat, but the PASSENGER AIR-
Maintenance or repairs should only be tus BAG OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possible that
carried out by an a trained and qualified the person isn't sitting properly in the seat. If
Volvo service technician. Seat unoc- OWS indica- Passenger's this happens:
cupied tor light side front
• The front passenger's seat should not
lights up. airbag disa- • Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to
be modified in any way. This could place the seatback in an upright position.
bled
reduce pressure on the seat cushion,
which might interfere with the OWS sys-
• Have the person sit upright in the seat,
Seat occu- OWS indica- Passenger's centered on the seat cushion, with the per-
tem's function. pied by low tor light side front son's legs comfortably extended.
weight lights up airbag disa- • Restart the vehicle and have the person
occupant/ bled remain in this position for about two
objectA minutes. This will allow the system to
detect that person and enable the pas-
Seat occu- OWS indica- Passenger's senger's frontal airbag.
pied by tor light is side front
heavy occu- not lit airbag ena- • If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
pant/object bled lamp remains on even after this, the person
should be advised to ride in the rear seat.
A Volvo recommends that children always be properly
restrained in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats. Do This condition reflects limitations of the OWS
not assume that the passenger's side front airbag is disabled classification capability. It does not indicate
unless the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit.
Make sure the child restraint is properly installed. If there is OWS malfunction.
any doubt as to the status of the passenger's side front air-
bag, move the child restraint to the rear seat.
Modifications
The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate) If you are considering modifying your vehicle in
the passenger's side front airbag in the event any way to accommodate a disability, for
of a collision anytime the system senses that a example by altering or adapting the driver's or
person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger's seat(s) and/or airbag sys-
front passenger's seat. The PASSENGER AIR- tems, please contact Volvo at:

28
 01 Safety

Occupant Weight Sensor 01

In the USA WARNING WARNING

Volvo Cars of North America, LLC • No objects that add to the total weight • Keep the following points in mind with
Customer Care Center on the seat should be placed on the respect to the OWS system. Failure to
front passenger's seat. If a child is follow these instructions could
1 Volvo Drive seated in the front passenger's seat adversely affect the system's function
P.O. Box 914 with any additional weight, this extra and result in serious injury to the occu-
weight could cause the OWS system to pant of the front passenger's seat:
Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 enable the airbag, which might cause it • The full weight of the front seat passen-
1-800-458-1552 to deploy in the event of a collision, ger should always be on the seat cush-
thereby injuring the child. ion. The passenger should never lift
In Canada
• The seat belt should never be wrapped him/herself off the seat cushion using
Volvo Cars of Canada Corp. around an object on the front passeng- the armrest in the door or the center
National Customer Service er's seat. This could interfere with the console, by pressing the feet on the
OWS system's function. floor, by sitting on the edge of the seat
175 Gordon Baker Road North York, Ontario cushion, or by pressing against the
• The front passenger's seat belt should
M2H 2N7 never be used in a way that exerts more backrest in a way that reduces pressure
pressure on the passenger than normal. on the seat cushion. This could cause
1-800-663-8255
This could increase the pressure exer- OWS to disable the front, passenger's
ted on the weight sensor by a child, and side airbag.
could result in the airbag being enabled,
which might cause it to deploy in the
event of a collision, thereby injuring the
child.

29
 01 Safety

01 Occupant Weight Sensor

WARNING
• Do not place any type of object on the
front passenger's seat in such a way
that jamming, pressing, or squeezing
occurs between the object and the front
seat, other than as a direct result of the
correct use of the Automatic Locking
Retractor/Emergency Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR/ELR) seat belt (see page 38).
• No objects should be placed under the
front passenger's seat. This could inter-
fere with the OWS system's function.

30
 01 Safety

Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags 01

General information NOTE

SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occurs
only on the side of the vehicle affected by
the impact. The airbags are not designed to
deploy in all side impact situations.

Components in the SIPS airbag system

This SIPS airbag system consists of a gas gen-
erator, the side airbag modules built into the

G024377
outboard sides of both front seat backrests,
and electronic sensors/wiring.
G032949
Driver's side SIPS airbag
Location of the side impact (SIPS) airbags (front
seats only)

As an enhancement to the structural side

impact protection built into your vehicle, it is
also equipped with Side Impact Protection
System (SIPS) airbags.
The SIPS airbag system is designed to help
increase occupant protection in the event of
certain side impact collisions. The SIPS air-

G024378
bags are designed to deploy only during cer-
tain side-impact collisions, depending on the
crash severity, angle, speed and point of Passenger's side SIPS airbag
impact.
SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occurs
only on the side of the vehicle affected by the
impact. The airbags are not designed to deploy
in all side impact situations.

31
 01 Safety

01 Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags

WARNING
• The SIPS airbag system is a supple-
ment to the structural Side Impact Pro-
tection System and the three-point seat
belt system. It is not designed to deploy
during collisions from the front or rear of
the vehicle or in rollover situations.
• The use of seat covers on the front seats
may impede SIPS airbag deployment.
• No objects, accessory equipment or
stickers may be placed on, attached to
or installed near the SIPS airbag system
or in the area affected by SIPS airbag
deployment.
• Never try to open or repair any compo-
nents of the SIPS airbag system. This
should be done only by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.
• In order for the SIPS airbag to provide
its best protection, both front seat
occupants should sit in an upright posi-
tion with the seat belt properly fastened.
• Failure to follow these instructions can
result in injury to the occupants of the
vehicle in the event of an accident.

32
 01 Safety

Inflatable Curtain (IC) 01

General information WARNING WARNING

• The IC system is a supplement to the In order for the IC to provide its best pro-
Side Impact Protection System. It is not tection, both front seat occupants and both
designed to deploy during collisions outboard rear seat occupants should sit in
from the rear of the vehicle. an upright position with the seat belt prop-
erly fastened; adults using the seat belt and
• Never try to open or repair any compo- children using the proper child restraint sys-
nents of the IC system. This should be tem. Only adults should sit in the front seats.
done only by a trained and qualified Children must never be allowed in the front
Volvo service technician. passenger seat, see page 38 for guide-
lines. Failure to follow these instructions can
• Never hang heavy items from the ceiling
result in injury to the vehicle occupants in an
handles. This could impede deployment
accident.
of the Inflatable Curtain.
• The rear seat should not be loaded to a
This system consists of inflatable curtains level higher than 2 in. (5 cm) below the
located along the sides of the roof liners, upper edge of the rear side windows.
stretching from the center of both front side Objects placed higher than this level
windows to the rear edge of the rear side door could impede the function of the Inflat-
windows. It is designed to help protect the able Curtain.
heads of the occupants of the front seats and
the occupant of the outboard rear seating posi-
tions in certain side impact collisions.
In certain side impacts, both the Inflatable Cur-
tain (IC) and the Side Impact Airbag System
(SIPS airbag) will deploy. The IC and the SIPS
airbag deploy simultaneously.

NOTE
If the inflatable curtain deploys, it remains
inflated for approximately 3 seconds.

33
 01 Safety

01 Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS

General information Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) – WARNING

front seats only
The WHIPS system consists of specially • Occupants in the front seats must never
sit out of position. The occupant's back
designed hinges and brackets on the front seat
must be as upright as comfort allows
backrests designed to help absorb some of the
and be against the seat back with the
energy generated in a collision from the rear seat belt properly fastened.
(when the vehicle is rear-ended).
• If your vehicle has been involved in a
In the event of a collision of this type, the hinges rear-end collision, the front seat back-
and brackets of the front seat backrests are rests must be inspected by a trained
designed to change position slightly to allow and qualified Volvo service technician,
the backrest/head restraint to help support the even if the seats appear to be undam-
occupant's head before moving slightly rear- aged. Certain components in the
ward. This movement helps absorb some of WHIPS system may need to be
the forces that could result in whiplash. replaced.
• Do not attempt to service any compo-
WARNING nent in the WHIPS system yourself.
• The WHIPS system is designed to sup-
plement the other safety systems in
your vehicle. For this system to function
properly, the three-point seat belt must
be worn. Please be aware that no sys-
tem can prevent all possible injuries that
may occur in an accident.
• The WHIPS system is designed to func-
tion in certain collisions from the rear,
depending on the crash severity, angle
and speed.

34
 01 Safety

Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS 01

WARNING WARNING
• Boxes, suitcases, etc. wedged behind Any contact between the front seat back-
the front seats could impede the func- rests and the folded rear seat or a rear-fac-
tion of the WHIPS system. ing child seat could impede the function of
the WHIPS system. If the rear seat is folded
• If the rear seat backrests are folded down, the occupied front seats must be
down, cargo must be secured to pre- adjusted forward so that they do not touch
vent it from sliding forward against the the folded rear seat.
front seat backrests in the event of a
collision from the rear. This could inter-
fere with the action of the WHIPS sys-
tem.

35
 01 Safety

01 Crash mode

function in the vehicle, such as the fuel lines, 2. Close the driver's door and reinsert the
sensors for one of the safety systems, the remote key in the ignition slot.
brake system, etc.
3. Try to start the vehicle.

WARNING If the message Safety mode See manual is

still displayed, the vehicle should not be driven
• Never attempt to repair the vehicle and must be towed. Concealed faults may
yourself or to reset the electrical system make the vehicle difficult to control.
after the vehicle has displayed Safety
mode See manual. This could result in Moving the vehicle
injury or improper system function. If the message Normal mode is displayed
• Restoring the vehicle to normal operat- when Safety mode See manual is no longer
ing status should only be done by a displayed, the vehicle may be moved carefully
Driving after a collision trained and qualified Volvo service tech- from its present position, if for example, it is
If the vehicle has been involved in a collision, nician. blocking traffic. It should, however, not be
the text Safety mode See manual may • After Safety mode See manual has moved farther than is absolutely necessary.
appear in the information display. This indi- been displayed, if you detect the odor
cates that the vehicle's functionality has been of fuel vapor, or see any signs of fuel WARNING
reduced. leakage, do not attempt to start the
Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable
vehicle. Leave the vehicle immediately. after Safety mode has been set, it should
NOTE not be driven or towed (pulled by another
Attempting to start the vehicle vehicle). There may be concealed damage
This text can only be shown if the display is that could make it difficult or impossible to
undamaged and the vehicle's electrical sys- If damage to the vehicle is minor and there is
control. The vehicle should be transported
tem is intact. no fuel leakage, you may attempt to start the on a flatbed tow truck to a trained and quali-
vehicle. To do so: fied Volvo service technician for inspection/
Safety mode is a feature that is triggered if one 1. Remove the remote key from the ignition repairs.
or more of the safety systems (e.g. front or side slot and open the driver's door. If a mes-
airbags, an inflatable curtain, or one or more of sage is displayed that the ignition is on,
the seat belt pretensioners) has deployed. The press the start button.
collision may have damaged an important

36
 01 Safety

Child safety 01

Children should be seated safely restrained to help reduce the chance of injuring When a child has outgrown the child safety
Volvo recommends the proper use of restraint or increasing the injury of a child. seat, you should use the rear seat with the
systems for all occupants including children. standard seat belt fastened. The best way to
All states and provinces have legislation gov-
Remember that, regardless of age and size, a help protect the child here is to place the child
erning how and where children should be car-
child should always be properly restrained in a on a cushion so that the seat belt is properly
ried in a vehicle. Find out the regulations exist-
vehicle. located on the hips (see the illustration on page
ing in your state or province. Recent accident
46). Legislation in your state or province may
Your vehicle is also equipped with ISOFIX/ statistics have shown that children are safer in
mandate the use of a child seat or cushion in
LATCH attachments, which make it more con- rear seating positions than front seating posi-
combination with the seat belt, depending on
venient to install child seats. tions when properly restrained. A child restraint
the child's age and/or size. Please check local
system can help protect a child in a vehicle.
Some restraint systems for children are regulations.
Here's what to look for when selecting a child
designed to be secured in the vehicle by lap restraint system: A specially designed and tested booster cush-
belts or the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt. ion and backrest can be obtained from your
Such child restraint systems can help protect It should have a label certifying that it meets
Volvo retailer.
children in vehicles in the event of an accident applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
only if they are used properly. However, chil- Standards (FMVSS 213) – or in Canada, USA: for children weighing 33 – 80 lbs.
dren could be endangered in a crash if the child CMVSS 213. (15 – 36 kg) and 38 – 54 inches (97 – 137 cm)
restraints are not properly secured in the vehi- in height
Make sure the child restraint system is
cle. Failure to follow the installation instructions approved for the child's height, weight and Canada: for children weighing 40 – 80 lbs.
for your child restraint can result in your child development – the label required by the stand- (18 – 36 kg) and 40 – 54 inches (102 – 137 cm)
striking the vehicle's interior in a sudden stop. ard or regulation, or instructions for infant in height
Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitable restraints, typically provide this information.
substitute for a child restraint system. In an In using any child restraint system, we urge you
accident, a child held in a person's arms can to carefully look over the instructions that are
be crushed between the vehicle's interior and provided with the restraint. Be sure you under-
an unrestrained person. The child could also be stand them and can use the device properly
injured by striking the interior, or by being ejec- and safely in this vehicle. A misused child
ted from the vehicle during a sudden maneuver restraint system can result in increased injuries
or impact. The same can also happen if the for both the infant or child and other occupants
infant or child rides unrestrained on the seat. in the vehicle.
Other occupants should also be properly

``

37
 01 Safety

01 Child safety

WARNING Automatic Locking Retractor/ WARNING

Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/
• Do not use child safety seats or child ELR) Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front booster cushions/backrests in the front
passenger's seat. We also recommend To make child seat installation easier, each passenger's seat. We also recommend that
that children under 4 feet 7 inches seat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equip- children who have outgrown these devices
(140 cm) in height who have outgrown ped with a locking mechanism to help keep the sit in the rear seat with the seat belt properly
these devices sit in the rear seat with the seat belt taut. fastened.
seat belt fastened.
When attaching the seat belt to a child
• Keep vehicle doors and trunk locked
seat: Volvo's recommendations
and keep remote controls out of a
1. Attach the seat belt to the child seat Why does Volvo believe that no child should sit
child’s reach. Unsupervised children
according to the child seat manufacturer's in the front seat of a car? It's quite simple really.
could lock themselves in an open trunk
and risk injury. Children should be instructions. A front airbag is a very powerful device
taught not to play in vehicles. designed, by law, to help protect an adult.
2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible.
• On hot days, the temperature in the Because of the size of the airbag and its speed
3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into the
vehicle interior can rise very quickly. of inflation, a child should never be placed in
buckle (lock) in the usual way.
Exposure to these high temperatures the front seat, even if he or she is properly bel-
for even a short period of time can 4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut around ted or strapped into a child safety seat. Volvo
cause heat-related injury or death. the child seat. has been an innovator in safety for over sev-
Small children are particularly at risk. A sound from the seat belt retractor will be enty-five years, and we'll continue to do our
audible at this time and is normal. The belt will part. But we need your help. Please remember
Child seat should always be registered. See now be locked in place. This function is auto- to put your children in the back seat, and
page 39 for more information. matically disabled when the seat belt is buckle them up.
unlocked and the belt is fully retracted. Volvo has some very specific
recommendations:
• Always wear your seat belt.
• Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safety
device which, when used with a three-
point seat belt can help reduce serious
injuries during certain types of accidents.

38
 01 Safety

Child safety 01

Volvo recommends that you do not dis-

connect the airbag system in your vehicle.
• Volvo strongly recommends that everyone
in the vehicle be properly restrained.
• Volvo recommends that ALL occupants
(adults and children) shorter than 4 feet
7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back
seat of any vehicle with a front passenger
side airbag.
• Drive safely!

Child restraint registration and recalls

Registering a child restraint
Child restraints could be recalled for safety
reasons. You must register your child restraint
to be reached in a recall. To stay informed
about child safety seat recalls, be sure to fill out
and return the registration card that comes
with new child restraints.
Child restraint recall information is readily avail-
able in both the U.S. and Canada. For recall
information in the U.S., call the U.S. Govern-
ment's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-800-424-9393.
In Canada, visit Transport Canada's Child
Safety website at http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/childsafety/menu.htm.

39
 01 Safety

01 Child restraint systems

Child restraints

G022847

G023269
G022840
Convertible seat Booster cushion
Infant seat
WARNING WARNING
There are three main types of child restraint
systems: infant seats, convertible seats, and A child seat should never be used in the Always refer to the child restraint manufac-
booster cushions. They are classified accord- front passenger seat of any vehicle with a turer's instructions for detailed information
ing to the child's age and size. front passenger airbag – not even if the on securing the restraint.
"Passenger airbag off" symbol near the
The following section provides general infor- rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles
mation on securing a child restraint using a equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If
three-point seat belt. Refer to page 47–48 the severity of an accident were to cause the
for information on securing a child restraint airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious
injury or death to a child seated in this posi-
using ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and/or top tion.
tether anchorages.

40
 01 Safety

Child restraint systems 01

WARNING
• When not in use, keep the child restraint
system secured or remove it from the
passenger compartment to help pre-
vent it from injuring passengers in the
event of a sudden stop or collision.
• A small child's head represents a con-
siderable part of its total weight and its
neck is still very weak. Volvo recom-
mends that children up to age 4 travel,
properly restrained, facing rearward. In
addition, Volvo recommends that chil-
dren should ride rearward facing, prop-
erly restrained, as long as possible.

41
 01 Safety

01 Infant seats

Securing an infant seat with a seat belt WARNING

A child seat should never be used in the
front passenger seat of any vehicle with a
front passenger airbag – not even if the
"Passenger airbag off" symbol near the
rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles
equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If
the severity of an accident were to cause the
airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious
injury or death to a child seated in this posi-
tion.

G023270
G022844
Positioning the seat belt through the infant seat 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
Do not place the infant seat in the front passeng- plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
er's seat WARNING click is audible.

• An infant seat must be in the rear-facing

NOTE position only.
Refer to page 47–48 for information on • The infant seat should not be positioned
securing a child restraint using ISOFIX/ behind the driver's seat unless there is
LATCH lower anchors and/or top tether adequate space for safe installation.
anchorages.

1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of the

vehicle.
2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seat

G023271
according to the manufacturer's instruc-
tions. Fasten the seat belt

42
 01 Safety

Infant seats 01

G022846

G022850
Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt Ensure that the seat is securely in place
4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt 6. Push and pull the infant seat along the seat
out as far as possible to activate the belt's belt path to ensure that it is held securely
automatic locking function. in place by the seat belt.

NOTE WARNING
The locking retractor will automatically It should not be possible to move the child
release when the seat belt is unbuckled and restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. (2.5 cm)
allowed to retract fully. in any direction along the seat belt path.

5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let the The infant seat can be removed by unbuckling
seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound the seat belt and letting it retract completely.
from the seat belt retractor's automatic
locking function will be audible at this time
and is normal. The seat belt should now be
locked in place.

43
 01 Safety

01 Convertible seats

Securing a convertible seat with a seat WARNING

belt
• A small child's head represents a con-
siderable part of its total weight and its
neck is still very weak. Volvo recom-
mends that children up to age 4 travel,
properly restrained, facing rearward. In
addition, Volvo recommends that chil-
dren should ride rearward facing, prop-
erly restrained, as long as possible.
• Convertible child seats should be instal-

G022847
led in the rear seat only.
G018630
Route the seat belt through the convertible seat • A rear-facing convertible seat should not
be positioned behind the driver's seat
WARNING unless there is adequate space for safe
Do not place the convertible seat in the front pas-
senger's seat installation.
Always use a convertible seat that is suita-
ble for the child's age and size. See the con-
NOTE vertible seat manufacturer's recommenda- 2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible seat
tions. according to the manufacturer's instruc-
Refer to pages 47 and 48 for information
tions.
on securing a child restraint using ISOFIX/
LATCH lower anchors and/or top tether 1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seat
anchorages. of the vehicle.

Convertible seats can be used in either a for-

ward or rearward-facing position, depending
on the age and size of the child.

44
 01 Safety

Convertible seats 01

time and is normal. The seat belt should

now be locked in place.

G022848

G022850
Fasten the seat belt Ensure that the seat is securely in place

G022849
3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt WARNING
click is audible. A child seat should never be used in the
6. Push and pull the convertible seat along
4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt the seat belt path to ensure that it is held front passenger seat of any vehicle with a
front passenger airbag – not even if the
out as far as possible to activate the belt's securely in place by the seat belt. "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the
automatic locking function. rear-view mirror is illuminated. If the severity
WARNING of an accident were to cause the airbag to
NOTE inflate, this could lead to serious injury or
It should not be possible to move the child death to a child seated in this position.
The locking retractor will automatically restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. (2.5 cm)
release when the seat belt is unbuckled and in any direction along the seat belt path.
allowed to retract fully.
The convertible seat can be removed by
5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place, unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract
let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A completely.
sound from the seat belt retractor's auto-
matic locking function will be audible at this

45
 01 Safety

01 Booster cushions

Securing a booster cushion

G022852
G022851
Positioning the seat belt
Position the child correctly on the booster cushion 4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut and
Booster cushions are recommended for chil- fits snugly around the child.
dren who have outgrown convertible seats.
WARNING
1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seat
of the vehicle. • The hip section of the three-point seat
belt must fit snugly across the child's
2. With the child properly seated on the hips, not across the stomach.
booster cushion, attach the seat belt to or
around the cushion according to the man- • The shoulder section of the three-point
ufacturer's instructions. seat belt should be positioned across
the chest and shoulder.
3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
• The shoulder belt must never be placed
behind the child's back or under the
click is audible. arm.

46
 01 Safety

ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors 01

Using the ISOFIX/LATCH lower child 3. Fasten the attachment on the child
seat anchors restraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX/
LATCH/LATCH lower anchors.
4. Firmly tension the lower child seat straps
according to the manufacturer's instruc-
tions.

WARNING
Volvo's ISOFIX/LATCH anchors conform to

G018631
FMVSS/CMVSS standards. Always refer to
the child restraint system's manual for
weight and size ratings. Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX/
LATCH lower anchors

Lower anchors for ISOFIX/LATCH-equipped NOTE WARNING

child seats are located in the rear, outboard • The rear seat's center position is not
seats, hidden below the backrest cushions. • Be sure to fasten the attachment cor-
equipped with ISOFIX/LATCH lower rectly to the anchor (see the illustration).
Symbols on the seat back upholstery mark the anchors. When installing a child If the attachment is not correctly fas-
anchor positions as shown. To access the restraint in this position, attach the tened, the child restraint may not be
anchors, kneel on the seat cushion and locate restraint's top tether strap (if it is so properly secured in the event of a colli-
the anchors by feel. Always follow your child equipped) to the top tether anchorage sion.
seat manufacturer's installation instructions, point and secure the restraint with the
and use both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors vehicle's center seat belt. • The ISOFIX/LATCH lower child restraint
anchors are only intended for use with
and top tethers whenever possible. • Always follow your child seat manufac- child seats positioned in the outboard
turer's installation instructions, and use seating positions. These anchors are
To access the anchors both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and
1. Put the child restraint in position. not certified for use with any child
top tethers whenever possible. restraint that is positioned in the center
2. Kneel on the child restraint to press down seating position. When securing a child
the seat cushion and locate the anchors by restraint in the center seating position,
feel. use only the vehicle's center seat belt.

47
 01 Safety

01 Top tether anchors

Child restraint anchorages not equipped with lower tether straps, or WARNING
the restraint is used in the center seating
position, follow instructions for securing a • Never route a top tether strap over the
child restraint using the Automatic Locking top of the head restraint. The strap
Retractor seat belt (see page 38). should be routed beneath the head
restraint.
6. Firmly tension all straps.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed
Refer also to the child seat manufacturer's to withstand only those loads imposed
instructions for information on securing the by correctly fitted child restraints. Under
child seat. no circumstances are they to be used
for adult seat belts or harnesses. The
anchorages are not able to withstand
excessive forces on them in the event of
collision if full harness seat belts or adult
Your Volvo is equipped with child restraint top seat belts are installed to them. An adult
tether anchorages in the rear seat. They are who uses a belt anchored in a child
located on the rear parcel shelf. restraint anchorage runs a great risk of
suffering severe injuries should a colli-
Securing a child seat sion occur.

1. Place the child restraint on the rear seat. • Do not install rear speakers that require
the removal of the top tether anchors or
2. Fold up the plastic cover over the anchor- interfere with the proper use of the top
age to be used. tether strap.
3. Route the top tether strap under the head
restraint and attach it to the anchor.
4. Fold down the outboard head restraints or
lower the center head restraint for easier
access to the ISOFIX/LATCH anchor.
5. Attach lower tether straps to the lower ISO-
FIX/LATCH anchors. If the child restraint is

48
 01 Safety

Child safety locks 01

Child safety locks

Child safety locks – rear doors

The controls are located on the rear door
jambs. Use the remote control's key blade or a
screwdriver to adjust these controls.
The rear doors can only be opened from
the outside when the slot is in the horizon-
tal position.
The rear doors can be opened from the
inside when the slot is in the vertical posi-
tion.

49
 Remote key and key blade..................................................................... 52
Valet locking ........................................................................................... 60
Keyless drive........................................................................................... 61
Locks....................................................................................................... 65
Alarm....................................................................................................... 70

50
LOCKS AND ALARM
 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

Introduction Detachable key blade NOTE

Two remote keys or optional Personal Car Each remote key or PCC contains a detachable
02 metal key blade for mechanically locking or Additional or duplicate remote control keys
Communicators (PCC) are provided with your can be obtained from any Authorized Volvo
vehicle. They enable you to unlock the doors unlocking the driver's door and the glove com- Retailer.
and trunk, and also function as ignition keys to partment, and to enable the valet locking func-
tion. See page 57 for more information on the You can also obtain additional or duplicate
start the vehicle or operate electrical compo-
key blade and see page 60 for information on remote control keys from certain independ-
nents. The remote keys contain detachable ent repair facilities and locksmiths that are
metal key blades for manually locking or the valet locking function. The key blades have qualified to make remote control keys. Each
unlocking the driver's door and the glove com- a unique code, which is used if new ones need key must be programmed to work with your
partment. The visible ends of these key blades to be produced. This code is available at an vehicle.
are unique to make it easier to identify "your" authorized Volvo retailer.
California Only:
remote key. Up to six remotes can be pro- The visible ends of these key blades are unique
grammed for use on the same vehicle. A list of independent repair facilities and/or
to make it easier to identify "your" remote key. locksmiths known to Volvo that can cut and
The PCCs have enhanced functionality com- code replacement keys can be found:
pared with the standard remote key. Loss of a remote key
If either of the remote keys is lost, the other • on the Volvo website at
should be taken with the car to a Volvo retailer. http://www.volvocars.com/us/keys
NOTE As an anti-theft measure, the code of the lost • by calling Volvo Customer Care at
In the remainder of this chapter, all referen- remote key must be erased from the system. 1-800-458-1552
ces to the remote key also pertain to the
PCC unless otherwise stated.
The number of registered keys for the vehicle
can be found by pressing MY CAR and going
WARNING into Information Number of keys. See
Never leave the remote key in the ignition page 189 for a description of the menu sys-
slot if children are to remain in the vehicle. tem.
USA-5WK49264
See page 84 for more information on the var- FCC ID:KR55WK49264 + Siemens VDO
ious ignition modes. 5WK49236
FCC ID:KR55WK49236, 5WK49266

52
 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

FCC ID:KR55WK49266 + Siemens VDO driver's door is unlocked with the same remote Confirmation will only be given when all doors
5WK49233 key and the door is opened within 2 minutes, and the trunk are properly closed and locked.
the power driver's seat and side door mirrors 02
FCC ID:KR55WK49233
will automatically move to the position that they NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC were in when the doors were most recently
rules and RSS-210. Operation is subject to the locked with the same remote key. If the seat/ If you do not receive confirmation when
following conditions: (1) This device may not locking the vehicle, check whether a door or
mirrors have not been readjusted since the the trunk is ajar, or if this feature has been
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device vehicle was locked, they will already be in the turned off in the menu.
must accept any interference received, includ- position stored in that particular remote key
ing interference that may cause undesired and will not move. See page 87 for more
operation. information. See also page 88 for more infor- Unlocking confirmation
mation on this feature. • The turn signals will flash twice and the
Canada-5WK49264 door mirrors will fold* out.
IC:267T-5WK49264 + Siemens VDO This feature can be activated or deactivated in
Making a setting
5WK49236 the vehicle's menu by pressing MY CAR and
Different alternatives for locking/unlocking
going into Settings Car settings Car
IC:267T-5WK49236, 5WK49266 confirmation can be selected in the menus by
key memory. See page 189 for a description pressing MY CAR on the center console con-
IC:267T-5WK49266 + Siemens VDO of the menu system. trol panel.
5WK49233
See also page 61 for information regarding • To activate visual confirmation: go to
IC:267T-5WK49233 vehicles with the optional keyless drive. Settings Car settings Light
Operation is subject to the following condi- Confirmation when locking/unlocking settings and select Door lock
tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer- the vehicle confirmation light and/or Unlock
ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter- confirmation light by pressing OK/
Settings can be made in the menu system for
ference, including interference that may cause MENU.
audible and visual confirmation when the vehi-
undesired operation of the device. • To activate audible confirmation: go to
cle has been locked or unlocked. With these
functions activated, the following will occur Settings Car settings Lock
Key memory: door mirrors and driver's
when the vehicle is locked/unlocked: settings and select Audible
seat
confirmation by pressing OK/MENU.
The position of the side door mirrors and power Locking confirmation
driver's seat* are stored in the remote keys • The turn signals flash once, an audible sig- See page 189 for a description of the menu
when the vehicle is locked. The next time the nal sounds and the door mirrors will fold* system.
in.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 53

 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

Lock indicator Message Meaning This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules. Operation is subject to the following con-
02 Insert car key Remote key not rec- dition: (1) This device may not cause harmful
ognized during start. interference, and (2) this device must accept
Try to start the vehi- any interference received, including interfer-
cle again. ence that may cause undesired operation.

Car key not found PCC with keyless Canada–IC: 3659A-WFS125VO

drive only. Remote Operation is subject to the following condi-
key not recognized tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-
during start. Try to ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter-
start the vehicle ference, including interference that may cause
again. undesired operation of the device.
Lock/alarm indicator light If the problem con- See page 113 for information on starting the
A flashing indicator light at the base of the tinues, insert the vehicle.
windshield verifies that the vehicle is locked. remote key into the
ignition slot and try Replacing the battery in the remote key
Immobilizer (start inhibitor) to start the vehicle The batteries should be replaced if:
Each of the keys supplied with your vehicle again. • The information symbol illuminates and
contains a coded transponder. The code in the Low battery in remote control. Please
Immobilizer Try Remote key fault
key is transmitted to an antenna in the ignition change batteries. is shown in the display
start again during start. Contact
slot where it is compared to the code stored in and/or
an authorized Volvo
the start inhibitor module. The vehicle will start
workshop. • if the locks do not react after several
only with a properly coded key. If you misplace attempts to unlock or lock the vehicle.
a key, take the other keys to a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician for reprog- CAUTION NOTE
ramming as an anti-theft measure. The follow-
Never use force when inserting the remote The remote key's range is normally approx-
ing messages (which may appear in the instru- key in the ignition slot. The vehicle cannot
ment panel display) are related to the immobil- imately 60 ft (20 m) from the vehicle.
be started if the transponder is damaged.
izer:
See page 58 for information about replacing
USA–FCC ID: LTQWFS 125VO
the battery.

54
 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

Remote key/Personal Car After a short pause, press the Unlock button a
Communicator (PCC) - common second time within 10 seconds to unlock the
other doors and the trunk. 02
functions*
This function can be changed so that all doors
unlock at the same time by pressing My Car
and going to Settings Car settings
Lock settings Change doors unlock
setting. See page 189 for a description of the
menu system.
Approach lighting – As you approach the
vehicle, press the button on the remote key to
Personal Car Communicator (PCC)*
light the interior lighting, parking lights, license
Lock plate lighting and the lights in the door mir-
rors*.
Standard remote key Unlock
These lights will switch off automatically after
Lock Approach lighting 30, 60 or 90 seconds. See page 189 for a
description of the menu system.
Unlock Trunk unlock/open
Unlock/open trunk
Approach lighting Panic alarm
Press once: This unlocks the trunk (but does
Trunk unlock/open Buttons on the remote not open it) and disarms the alarm and optional
Lock – Press the Lock button on the movement sensor (the alarm indicator light on
Panic alarm
remote once to lock all doors and the trunk. the dashboard will go out). If the trunk is not
The turn signals will flash once to confirm lock- opened within two minutes it will automatically
ing. relock and the alarm will be rearmed.
Unlock – Press the Unlock button on the Press twice: This both unlocks the trunk and
remote once to unlock the driver's door. pops it open slightly.

``

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 55

 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

NOTE NOTE Unique functions—PCC*

02 Any excess weight (snow, etc.) on the trunk Buildings or other obstacles may interfere
lid may prevent it from opening. with the function of the remote key. The
vehicle can also be locked or unlocked with
the key blade, see page 57.
See also page 67 for information on opening
the trunk from the passenger compartment.
If the remote key is removed from the vehicle
After closing, the trunk will not automatically while the engine is running or if the ignition is
relock. Press Lock to relock it and rearm the in mode I or II and all of the doors are closed,
alarm. a message will appear in the instrument panel
Panic alarm – This button can be used to display and there will be an audible signal.
attract attention during emergency situations. When the remote key is returned to the vehicle,
To activate the panic alarm, press and hold this the message will be erased and the audible
Information button
button for at least 3 seconds or press it twice signal will stop after one of the following has
within 3 seconds. The turn signals and horn will been done: Indicator lights
be activated. The panic alarm will stop auto- • The remote key is inserted in the ignition Pressing the information button provides cer-
matically after 2 minutes and 45 seconds. slot tain information about the vehicle with the help
To deactivate, wait approximately 5 seconds • The vehicle's speed exceeds 20 mph of the indicator lights.
and press the button again. (30 km/h)
Using the information button
The Panic alarm button will not unlock the vehi- • The OK button on the left steering wheel 1. Press the information button
lever is pressed .
cle.
2. All of the indicator lights will flash sequen-
Range tially for approximately 7 seconds to indi-
The remote key has a range of approximately cate that the PCC is receiving information
60 ft. (20 m) from the vehicle. from the vehicle. If any of the buttons are
pressed during this 7-second period,
transmission of information to the PCC will
be interrupted.

56 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

NOTE Range NOTE

The PCC's lock and unlock functions have a
If none of the indicator lights flash when the range of approximately 60 ft. (20 m) from the If none of the indicator lights illuminate when 02
information button has been pressed sev- the information button is pressed, this may
eral times from different places in relation to vehicle. be because the most recent transmission
the vehicle, contact an authorized Volvo between the vehicle and the PCC was inter-
service technician. NOTE rupted or impeded by buildings or other
objects.
• The approach lighting, panic alarm, and
The indicator lights provide information the functions controlled by the informa-
according to the illustration: tion button have a range of approxi- Keyless drive
mately 300 ft (100 m) from the vehicle. Vehicles equipped with the optional Personal
• Radio waves, buildings or other obsta- Car Communicator have the keyless drive
cles may interfere with the function of function, see page 61 for detailed informa-
the PCC. tion.

If the vehicle does not provide confirmation Detachable key blade

when a button has been pressed, try moving The key blade can be removed from the remote
closer and pressing the button again. key. When removed, the key blade can be used
to:
Outside of the PCC´s range
If the PCC is more than approximately 300 ft • Lock/unlock the driver's door if the remote
(100 m) from the vehicle when the information key is not functioning properly
button is pressed, no new information will be • Lock/unlock the glove compartment (see
Steady green light: the vehicle is correctly received. The PCC most recently used to lock page 67)
locked. or unlock the vehicle will show the vehicle's
• Override the transmission's shiftlock sys-
Steady yellow light: the vehicle is not most recently received status. The indicator tem (see page 120)
locked. lights will not flash when the information button
is pressed while the PCC is out of range. • Enable/disable the valet locking function
Steady red light: the alarm has been trig- (see page 60)
gered since the vehicle was most recently If more than one PCC is used to lock/unlock
locked. the vehicle, only the one used most recently will
Both red lights flash alternatively: the alarm show the correct locking status.
was triggered less than 5 minutes ago.

57
 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

• The front passenger's door and the rear Unlocking the doors with the detached
side doors can be locked manually if nec- key blade
02 essary Insert the key blade as far as possible in the
• The trunk can be opened manually if nec- driver's door lock. Turn the key blade clock-
essary (see page 67) wise approximately one-quarter turn to unlock
the driver's door only.
Removing the key blade
NOTE
After unlocking the driver's door with the
key blade, opening the door will trigger the
alarm.

To disable the alarm:

Insert the remote key in the ignition slot. This
also applies to vehicles equipped with the
optional keyless drive.

Replacing batteries in the remote key/

Slide the spring loaded catch to the side. PCC
Pull the key blade straight out of the remote The battery/batteries in the remote key/PCC
key. should be replaced if:
• The information symbol lights up and a text
Reinserting the key blade in the remote appears in the information display.
key
and/or
1. Hold the remote key with the slot for the
key blade up. • the vehicle's locks repeatedly do not react
when a button on the remote key/PCC is
2. Carefully slide the key blade into its groove. Battery type CR 2430, 3 V (one battery in the
pressed within approximately 60 ft (20 m)
3. Gently press the key blade in the groove from the vehicle. remote key, two batteries in the PCC)
until it clicks into place.

58
 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

Opening the remote key/PCC PCC (two batteries)

Slide the spring loaded catch to the 1. Use a screwdriver to pry out the old bat-
teries. 02
side.
Pull the key blade straight out of the 2. Insert the first new battery with the (+) side
remote key. upward.
3. Insert the plastic spacer over the battery.
Insert a small screwdriver in the hole
Insert the second new battery on top of the
behind the spring loaded catch and care- plastic spacer, with the + side downward.
fully pry up the cover.
Re-assembling the remote key
NOTE 1. Press the remote key's cover into place.
Turn the remote key with the buttons 2. Hold the remote key with the slot for the
upward so that the batteries do not fall out key blade up.
when the cover is removed.
3. Carefully slide the key blade into its groove.

Replacing the batteries 4. Gently press the key blade in the groove
until it clicks into place.
CAUTION Old batteries should be properly recycled.
When handling batteries, avoid touching
their contact surfaces as this could result in
poor battery function in the remote key.

Note the position of the battery's (+) or (–)

sides.
Remote key (one battery)
1. Use a screwdriver to pry out the old bat-
tery.
2. Insert a new one with the (+) side down-
ward.

59
 02 Locks and alarm

Valet locking

Blocking access to the trunk to block access to the trunk and glove com- Turn the key blade180 degrees clockwise.
partment for e.g., valet parking or when the
02 vehicle is brought to the retailer for service. Remove the key blade from the lock. A
message will appear in the instrument
With the valet locking function activated: panel display.
• The vehicle's doors can be locked or
unlocked with the remote Deactivating the valet locking function
Turn the key blade 180 degrees counterclock-
• The engine can be started wise in the glove compartment lock to deacti-
• The glove compartment cannot be vate valet locking.
unlocked
See page 67 for information on locking the
• Access to the trunk is blocked (the trunk lid
glove compartment normally, without activat-
G021083
cannot be unlocked or opened with the
ing the valet locking function.
remote, and the rear seat backrests cannot
Normal locking/unlocking function be lowered

Activating the valet locking function

G021084

Locking/unlocking points with valet locking acti-

vated
By utilizing the remote key with the key blade Insert the key blade in the glove compart-
removed, the valet locking feature enables you ment lock.

60
 02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive

Keyless drive* (models with Personal NOTE Lock settings Keyless entry. See page
Car Communicator only) 189 for a description of the menu system.
• The gear selector must in the P position 02
Keyless locking and unlocking before the vehicle can be locked and
the alarm can be armed. NOTE
• The buttons on the keyless drive remote In some cases, wearing thick gloves or pull-
key can also be used to lock and unlock ing the door handle too quickly may affect
the vehicle, see page 55 for more infor- the unlocking function. If this occurs, try
mation. pulling the door handle again or pull it after
taking off the glove.

Both of the PCCs provided with the vehicle

have the keyless function, and additional ones
Unlocking the vehicle with the key blade
can be ordered. The system can accommo-
date up to six PCCs.
G020577

The red rings in the illustration indicate the area

Range of the keyless drive remote key–5 ft around the vehicle that is within range of the
(1.5 meters) keyless drive antennas.
This system makes it possible to unlock and Unlocking the vehicle
lock the vehicle without having to press any • A keyless drive remote key must be on the
buttons on the Personal Car Communicators same side of the vehicle as the door to be
(PCC). It is only necessary to have a keyless opened, and be within 5 feet (1.5 meters)
drive remote key in your possession to operate of the door's lock or the trunk (see the sha-
the central locking system. ded areas in the illustration).
Keyless drive keyhole cover
• Pull a door handle to unlock and open the
door or press the trunk opening control on If the PCC does not function normally (weak
the trunk lid. battery, etc.), the vehicle can be unlocked with
the detachable key blade. See page 58 for
The number of doors that are unlocked at the
instructions on detaching the key blade from
same time can be set in the vehicle's menu
the PCC. To access the keyhole in the driver's
system. Press MY CAR and go to Car settings
door:

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 61

 02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive

1. Press the key blade approx. 0.5 in. (1 cm) The doors and the trunk can be locked by NOTE
straight up in the hole on the underside of pressing the pressure-sensitive area on each
02 the keyhole cover. of the outside door handles or the rubber-cov- If several people carrying PCCs approach
ered button next to the trunk opening control. the vehicle at the same time, the driver's
> The cover will come off due to the pres- seat and door mirrors will assume the posi-
sure exerted when the key blade is The lock indicator on the dash will begin to tions they were in for the person who opens
pushed upward. flash. the driver's door.
2. Insert the key blade as far as possible in the
NOTE See also page 87 for information on adjusting
driver's door lock. Turn the key blade to
unlock the driver's door only. This will trig- On keyless drive vehicles, the gear selector and storing the seat's position in the seat mem-
ger the alarm. Press the remote key into the must be in the Park (P) position, all doors ory.
ignition slot to turn off the alarm. and the trunk must be closed and the igni-
tion must be switched off before the vehicle Keyless drive information messages
3. Press the cover back into place after the can be locked. If all of the PCCs are removed from the vehicle
door has been unlocked. while the engine is running or if the ignition is
Keyless drive remote key and driver's in mode II (see page 84) and all of the doors
Locking the vehicle
seat/door mirror memory are closed, a message will appear in the instru-
• When you leave the vehicle with a PCC in ment panel display and an audible signal will
your possession and lock any door, the sound.
position of the driver's seat and door mir- When at least one PCC has been returned to
rors will be stored in the seat's memory. the car, the message will be erased in the dis-
• The next time a door is opened by a person play and the audible signal will stop when:
with the same PCC in his/her possession,
the driver's seat and door mirrors will auto- • A door has been opened and closed
matically move to the position that they • The PCC has been inserted in the ignition
were in when the door was most recently slot
locked. • The OK button (see page 187 for the loca-
tion of this button) has been pressed.
Models with keyless drive have a pressure-sensi-
tive area on the outside door handles and a rub-
ber-covered button next to the trunk opening con-
trol

62
 02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive

CAUTION Tested To Comply With FCC Standards Location of the keyless drive antennas
• Keyless drive remote keys should never For Automobile Use 02
be left in the vehicle. In the event of a Canada – IC:267T-5WK48952,
break-in, a remote found in the vehicle 267T-5WK48964, 267T-5WK48891
could make it possible to start the
engine. NOTE
• Electromagnetic fields or metal This device complies with RSS -210 of Industry
obstructions can interfere with the key- Canada. Operation is subject to the following
less drive system. The remote key two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
should never be placed closer than harmful interference, and (2) this device must
approximately 4-6 in. (10-15 cm) to cell accept interference received, including inter-
phones, metallic objects or e.g., stored ference that may cause undesired operation.
in a metal briefcase.
CAUTION
The keyless drive system has a number of
USA – FCC ID:KR55WK48952, KR55WK48964 Changes or modifications not expressly antennas located at various points in the vehi-
approved by the manufacturer could void the cle.
NOTE user's authority to operate the equipment.
On the inside center of the rear bumper
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two Left rear door handle
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must Center of the parcel shelf, on the underside
accept interference received, including inter- Right rear door handle
ference that may cause undesired operation.
Under the rear section of the center con-
CAUTION
sole
Changes or modifications not expressly Under the front section of the center con-
approved by the manufacturer could void the sole
user's authority to operate the equipment.
Siemens VDO
5WK48891

63
 02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive

WARNING
02 People with implanted pacemakers should
not allow the pacemaker to come closer
than 9 inches (22 cm) to any of the keyless
drive system's antennas. This is to help pre-
vent interference between the pacemaker
and the keyless drive system.

64
 02 Locks and alarm

Locks

Locking and unlocking the vehicle Manual locking In the horizontal position, the door cannot
In certain situations (e.g., if there is no electrical be opened from the outside.
From outside the vehicle current in the vehicle), the doors can be locked 02
In the vertical position, the door can be
The remote key locks and unlocks all of the manually. opened from the inside and the outside.
doors and the trunk.
The detachable key blade (see page 58) can be
Before the vehicle can be locked from the out- used in the lock cylinder in the driver's door to NOTE
side with the remote key, the driver's door must lock that door.
be closed. Any other door/trunk that is open If the manual child safety lock (see
The other doors do not have lock cylinders and page 49) is activated for a rear side door and
will be locked and the alarm will be armed.
the slot on the rear edge of each door has to that door is also locked manually, the door
cannot be opened from the outside or
be used to lock it. This will lock the door from
NOTE inside. The door can only be unlocked with
the outside but it can still be opened from the remote key or the central locking button.
Be sure the remote key is outside of the inside the vehicle. To do so:
vehicle before the other doors/trunk are
closed to help avoid locking the remote From inside the vehicle (central locking
inside the vehicle. button)

If the vehicle is equipped with the optional key-

less drive system, all doors/trunk must be
closed before the vehicle can be locked.
The first press on the unlock button unlocks the
driver's door and a second press unlocks the
other doors and the trunk (see also page 55).
This setting can be changed in the menu sys-
tem. See page 189 for a description.
If the locks repeatedly do not react when the Manually locking a door
unlock button is pressed, it may be necessary – Insert the key blade into the slot and turn it
to replace the batteries in the remote, see 90 degrees to lock that door (the slot in a Central locking button
page 54. In this case the vehicle can be particular door locks that door only).
unlocked with the detachable key blade. See The lock buttons on the door panel can be used
page 58. to lock or unlock all doors and the trunk at the

65
 02 Locks and alarm

Locks

same time. Press to lock and to NOTE Lock buttons in the rear side doors
unlock.
02 Please be aware that locking the vehicle in
Unlocking this way makes it possible to lock the
The vehicle can be unlocked from inside the remote key in the passenger compartment.
vehicle in two ways: To help avoid this, lock the vehicle from the
outside by pressing the lock button on the
• By pressing the unlock button . remote key.
• The front doors can be unlocked and If the vehicle is locked using the central
opened by pulling the door handle once. locking button, be sure that the remote key
The rear doors can be unlocked by pulling is in your possession before closing the
the door handle once and opened by pull- door.
ing the handle again.
Locking Indicator light in the lock buttons
There are two versions of the central locking The indicator light in the button is on when the
• Press the lock button : all of the doors door is locked
system that affect the indicator light in the driv-
that are closed will lock. The button in each of the rear side doors locks
er's door central locking button.
Alternative locking when parking that door only.
The central locking button on the driver's door If only the driver's door has a central locking
button: To unlock the door:
can also be used to lock the vehicle when you
leave it. To do so: • If the light is on, this indicates that all of the • The door can be unlocked by pulling the
doors are locked. door handle once and opened by pulling
1. Open the door. the handle again.
If there are central locking buttons in both front
2. Press the lock section of the button.
doors and electric lock buttons in the rear side Automatic relocking
3. Close the door. This will lock the vehicle doors: If the doors are unlocked, the locks will auto-
completely and arm the alarm. matically reengage (re-lock) and the alarm will
• If a light is on in one of the buttons, this
means that only that door is locked. When rearm after 2 minutes unless a door or the trunk
the lights are on in all of the buttons, all of has been opened.
the doors are locked.
Automatic locking
When the vehicle starts to move, the doors and
trunk can be locked automatically. This feature

66
 02 Locks and alarm

Locks

can be turned on or off by pressing MY CAR Opening the trunk manually Locking/unlocking the trunk
and going to Car settings Lock settings
02
Automatic door locking. See page 189 for
a description of the menu system.

Glove compartment

Trunk unlock button on the remote key

The trunk is held closed by an electronic lock-
ing mechanism. To open: Unlocking the trunk with the remote key
– Press the trunk unlock button on the
1. Press lightly on the rubberized plate under
remote.
the handle to release the lock.
Press once: This unlocks but does not open
2. Lift the handle to open the trunk lid.
The glove compartment can only be locked the trunk. The trunk can then be opened by
and unlocked using the detachable key blade pressing the rubber plate near the trunk lock. If
CAUTION the trunk is not opened within two minutes it
in the remote key. See page 57 for information
on removing the key blade from the remote • When pressing the rubberized plate, will automatically relock and the alarm will be
key. only light pressure is necessary to rearmed.
release the trunk's electronic locking Press twice: This both unlocks the trunk and
Insert the key blade in the glove compart- mechanism.
pops it open slightly.
ment lock. • When opening the trunk lid, pull it up
Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise. using the handle. Too much pressure on NOTE
the rubberized plate can damage its
Remove the key blade from the lock. electrical connections. Any excess weight (snow, etc.) on the trunk
lid may prevent it from opening.

67
 02 Locks and alarm

Locks

The alarm indicator light on the dashboard will Unlocking the trunk with the key blade Locking the trunk with the remote key
stop flashing to indicate that the alarm is not – Press the lock button on the remote, see
02 monitoring the entire vehicle. The accessory page 55
movement and inclination sensors will be auto-
The alarm indicator on the dashboard will begin
matically disconnected.
flashing to show that the vehicle is locked and
When the trunk is closed again (which has to that the alarm has been armed.
be done manually), it will have to be relocked
and the alarm rearmed by pressing the lock NOTE
button on the remote key.
• If the doors are locked while the trunk is
Unlocking/opening the trunk from the open, the trunk will remain unlocked
passenger compartment until the vehicle is relocked by pressing
the Lock button on the remote key.
• On keyless drive vehicles, the gear
selector must be in the Park (P) position,
all doors and the trunk must be closed
and the ignition must be switched off
before the vehicle can be locked.

If the remote key is not functioning properly,

the trunk can be unlocked with the detachable
key blade. See page 57 for information on
removing the key blade from the remote key.
– Press the button on the lighting panel (1) to Pull out the cover over the trunk’s keyhole.
unlock and pop open the trunk
Unlock the trunk by inserting the key blade
NOTE in the keyhole and turning a half turn coun-
terclockwise as shown in the illustration.
The taillights will illuminate automatically for
a short period when the trunk has been
opened.

68
 02 Locks and alarm

Locks

Opening the trunk from the inside (U.S. WARNING

models only)
• Keep vehicle doors and trunk locked 02
and keep keys out of a child’s reach.
Unsupervised children could lock them-
selves in an open trunk and risk injury.
Children should be taught not to play in
vehicles.
• On hot days, the temperature in the
trunk or vehicle interior can rise very
quickly. Exposure of people to these
high temperatures for even a short
period of time can cause heat-related
injury or death. Small children are par-
ticularly at risk.
The vehicle is equipped with a florescent han-
dle on the inside of the trunk lid, which can be
used in an emergency situation to open the
trunk from the inside. Pull the handle down to
release the trunk lid. After use, the handle must
be pushed back into its original position before
the trunk can be closed.
This handle is not intended to be used to
anchor the trunk lid when long loads are being
transported.

69
 02 Locks and alarm

Alarm

The alarm system NOTE Arming the alarm

The alarm is automatically armed whenever the – Press the Lock button on the remote key.
02 Do not attempt to repair any of the compo-
vehicle is locked with the remote key or nents in the alarm system yourself. This One long flash of the turn signals will con-
optional Personal Car Communicator. could affect the insurance policy on the firm that the alarm is armed.
When armed, the alarm continuously monitors vehicle. Alarm confirmation settings can be changed in
a number of points on the vehicle. The follow- MY CAR, under Car settings Lock
ing conditions will trigger the alarm: The alarm indicator light settings Keyless entry. See page 189 for
• The hood is forced open. a description of the menu system.
• The trunk is forced open USA FCC ID: MAYDA 5823(3)
• A door is forced open.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
• The ignition slot is tampered with. rules. Operation is subject to the following con-
• An attempt is made to start the vehicle with ditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
a non-approved key (a key not coded to interference, and (2) this device must accept
the car's ignition). any interference received, including interfer-
• If there is movement in the passenger com- ence that may cause undesired operation.
partment (if the vehicle is equipped with
the accessory movement sensor).
Canada IC: 4405A-DA 5823(3)
• The vehicle is lifted or towed (if the vehicle Movement sensor DA5823 by Dynex Operation
is equipped with the accessory inclination The status of the alarm system is indicated by is subject to the following conditions: (1) this
sensor). the red indicator light on the dashboard (see device may not cause interference, and (2) this
illustration): device must accept any interference, including
• The battery is disconnected (while the interference that may cause undesired opera-
alarm is armed). • Indicator light off – the alarm is not armed tion of the device.
• The siren is disconnected when the alarm • The indicator light flashes at one-second
is disarmed. intervals – the alarm is armed
A message will appear in the information dis- • The indicator light flashes rapidly before
play if a fault should occur in the alarm system. the remote key is inserted in the ignition
Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service slot and the ignition is put in mode I—the
technician. alarm has been triggered.

70
 02 Locks and alarm

Alarm

Disarming the alarm Remote key not functioning Reduced alarm function
– Press the Unlock button on the remote key. If the remote key is not functioning properly,
the alarm can be turned off and the vehicle can Turning off the accessory alarm sensors 02
> Two short flashes from the car's direc- In certain situations it may be desirable to turn
tion indicators confirm that the alarm be started as follows:
off the accessory inclination and movement
has been deactivated and that all doors 1. Open the driver's door with the key blade alarm sensors if, for example, you drive your
are unlocked. (see page 58 for information on detaching vehicle onto a ferry where the rocking of the
the key blade). boat could trigger the alarm or if a pet is left in
Turning off (stopping) the alarm > This will trigger the alarm. the vehicle with the doors locked.
If the alarm is sounding, it can be stopped by The vehicle's menu system is used for turning
pressing the Unlock button on the remote key off these sensors (see page 189 for a descrip-
or by inserting the remote key in the ignition tion of the menu system).
slot. Two short flashes from the car's direction
indicators confirm that the alarm has been 1. Go into the menu under Car settings.
turned off. 2. Select Reduced Guard (Press OK/
MENU to choose).
Other alarm-related functions 3. Two alternatives are now available:
Automatic re-arming • Activate once. If this alternative is
If the doors are unlocked, the locks will auto- selected, Reduced guard See
matically reengage (re-lock) and the alarm will manual will appear in the instrument
re-arm after 2 minutes unless a door or the panel display and the accessory incli-
trunk has been opened. 2. Insert the remote key into the ignition slot nation and movement alarm sensors will
(also on vehicles with the optional keyless be deactivated when the vehicle is
Audible/visual alarm signal drive). This will turn off the alarm. locked.
• An audible alarm signal is given by a bat- 3. Start the engine (see page 113 for instruc- • Ask when exiting. If this alternative is
tery powered siren. The alarm cycle lasts tions). selected, a message will appear in the
for 30 seconds. center console display each time the
• The visual alarm signal is given by flashing engine is turned off. Press OK/MENU to
all turn signals for approximately 5 minutes accept and the accessory inclination
or until the alarm is turned off. and movement alarm sensors will be

``

71
 02 Locks and alarm

Alarm

deactivated when the vehicle is locked.

Press EXIT to cancel.
02
4. Press OK/MENU and lock the vehicle.
The next time the engine is started, the alarm
system will be reset and Full guard will appear
in the instrument panel display. The accessory
inclination and movement alarm sensors will be
reactivated.
In either of the alternatives, if you prefer not to
deactivate the accessory inclination and move-
ment alarm sensors, do not make a choice in
the menu or press EXIT and lock the vehicle.

72
02 Locks and alarm

02

73
 Instruments and controls........................................................................ 76
Ignition modes........................................................................................ 84
Seats....................................................................................................... 86
Steering wheel........................................................................................ 92
Lighting................................................................................................... 93
Wipers and washers.............................................................................. 101
Power windows..................................................................................... 103
Mirrors................................................................................................... 105
Compass*.............................................................................................. 107
Power moonroof................................................................................... 108
HomeLink® Wireless Control System*.................................................. 110
Starting the engine................................................................................ 113
Transmission......................................................................................... 118
Brakes................................................................................................... 121
Parking brake........................................................................................ 124

74 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

YOUR DRIVING ENVIRONMENT
 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Instrument overview

03

76
 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Function Page Function Page Information displays

Menus and mes- see Infotainment sys- 212

sages, turn signals, page 189, tem controls
high/low beams, 98, 93,
trip computer 203 Climate system 198
controls 03
Cruise control 135
Gear selector 118
Horn, airbag 92, 23
Controls for active 205
Main instrument 77 chassis (Four-C)*
panel
Wipers and washers 101, 102
Infotainment sys- 212, 240 Information displays in the instrument panel
tem/Bluetooth Steering wheel 92
adjustment The information displays show information on
hands-free controls
some of the vehicle's functions, such as cruise
START/STOP 84 Hood opening con- 307 control, the trip computer and messages. The
ENGINE button trol information is shown with text and symbols.
Parking brake 124 More detailed information can be found in the
Ignition slot 84
descriptions of the functions that use the infor-
Information display 77 Power seat* adjust- 86 mation displays.
ment controls
Door handle –
Lighting panel, con- 93, 259,
In-door control pan- 103, 105, trols for opening 67
els (power win- 65 fuel filler door/trunk
dows, mirrors, cen-
tral locking button)

Hazard warning 98
flashers

``

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 77

 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Gauges This will be noticeable as a pronounced If the engine does not start or if the function
unevenness in engine speed. check is carried out in ignition mode II, all sym-
bols go out after 5 seconds except the symbol
for faults in the vehicle's emissions system and
Indicator and warning symbols
the symbol for low oil pressure.
Certain symbols may not have their functions
03 illustrated, depending on the vehicle's equip-
ment.

Indicator symbols
Symbol Description
Fault in the Active Bending
Gauges in the instrument panel Light (ABL)*system
Speedometer
Malfunction indicator light
Fuel gauge. Please note that the fuel level
Indicator and warning symbols
indicator in the gauge moves from right to Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
left as the amount of fuel in the tank High beam and turn signal indicators
decreases. The arrow indicates the side of Indicator and warning symbols Rear fog light on
the vehicle that the fuel filler door is on. See
also the section on refueling beginning on Information and warning symbols
page 257. See page 203 for more infor- Stability system
mation on fuel level and consumption. Indicator and warning symbols

The tachometer shows engine speed in Tire pressure monitoring sen-

Function check
thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm). sor (TPMS)A
All indicator and warning symbols light up in
Do not drive continuously with the needle ignition mode II or when the engine is started.
in the red area of the gauge. The engine Low fuel level
When the engine has started, all the symbols
management system will automatically should go out except the parking brake sym-
prevent excessively high engines speeds. Information symbol, see text
bol, which only goes out when the brake is dis-
in information display
engaged.

78 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Symbol Description A malfunction indicator (CHECK ENGINE) light Canadian models are equipped with this
may have many causes. Sometimes, you may symbol.
High beam indicator not notice a change in your car's behavior.
Even so, an uncorrected condition could hurt Rear fog light
fuel economy, emission controls, and drivabil- This symbol indicates that the rear fog light
Left turn signal indicator
ity. Extended driving without correcting the (located in the driver's side tail light cluster) is
cause could even damage other components on. 03
Right turn signal indicator in your vehicle.
Stability system
This light may illuminate if the fuel filler cap is This indicator symbol flashes when the DSTC
The stability system's Sport not closed tightly or if the engine was running
mode is activated. (Dynamic Stability and Traction Control sys-
while the vehicle was refueled. tem) is actively working to stabilize the vehicle,
A Option in Canada see page 130 for more detailed information.
Canadian models are equipped with this
symbol for the Malfunction Indicator Light. Tire pressure monitoring system
Fault in the Active Bending Light (TPMS)*
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
(ABL) system This symbol illuminates to indicate that tire
This symbol will illuminate if the there is a fault
warning light
pressure in one or more tires is low, see
in the ABL system. See page 96 for more If the warning light comes on, there may be a
page 298 for detailed information.
information about this system. malfunction in the ABS system (the standard
braking system will still function). Check the Low fuel level
Malfunction Indicator Light system by: When this light comes on, the vehicle should
As you drive, a computer called On-Board be refueled as soon as possible. See page
1. Stopping in a safe place and switching off
Diagnostics II (OBDII) monitors your vehicle's 257 for information about fuel and refueling.
the ignition.
engine, transmission, electrical and emission
systems. 2. Restart the engine. Information symbol
The information symbol lights up and a text
The malfunction indicator (CHECK ENGINE) 3. If the warning light goes off, no further
message is displayed to provide the driver with
light will illuminate if the computer senses a action is required.
necessary information about one of the vehi-
condition that potentially may need correcting. If the warning light remains on, the vehicle cle's systems. The message can be erased and
When this happens, please have your vehicle should be driven to a trained and qualified the symbol can be turned off by pressing the
checked by a trained and qualified Volvo serv- Volvo service technician for inspection, see OK button (see page 187 for information) or
ice technician as soon as possible. page 121 for additional information. this will take place automatically after a short

``

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 79

 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

time (the length of time varies, depending on Warning symbols brake is being applied and then glows steadily
the function affected). when the parking brake has been set.
Symbol Description
The information symbol may also illuminate If the symbol continues to flash after the brake
together with other symbols. Low oil pressure has been set, this indicates that a fault has
been detected. See the message in the infor-
High beam indicator mation display.
Parking brake applied
03 This symbol illuminates when the high beam
headlights are on, or if the high beam flash Canadian models are equipped with this
function is used. SRS airbags symbol.
Left turn signal indicator See page 124 for more information about
Seat belt reminder
using the parking brake.
Right turn signal indicator
Generator not charging Airbags – SRS
NOTE If this light comes on while the vehicle is being
driven, or remains on for longer than approxi-
• Both turn signal indicators will flash Fault in the brake system
mately 10 seconds after the vehicle has been
when the hazard warning flashers are started, the SRS system's diagnostic functions
used. Warning symbol have detected a fault in a seat belt lock or pre-
• If either of these indicators flash faster tensioner, a front airbag, side impact airbag,
than normal, the direction indicators are and/or an inflatable curtain. Have the system(s)
not functioning properly. Low oil pressure inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo
If the light comes on while driving, stop the service technician as soon as possible.
vehicle, stop the engine immediately, and See page 22 for more information about the
Sport mode check the engine oil level. Add oil if necessary. airbag system.
This symbol illuminates to indicate that the sta- If the oil level is normal and the light stays on
bility system's Sport mode has been activated after restart, have the vehicle towed to the Seat belt reminder
to help provide maximum tractive force, for nearest trained and qualified Volvo service This symbol comes on for approximately 6 sec-
example when driving with snow chains, or technician. onds if the driver has not fastened his or her
driving in deep snow or loose sand. seat belt.
Parking brake applied
This symbol illuminates when the parking
brake is applied. This symbol flashes while the

80
 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Generator not charging Canadian models are equipped with this WARNING
This symbol comes on during driving if a fault symbol.
• If the fluid level is below the MIN mark
has occurred in the electrical system. Contact in the reservoir or if a warning message
If the and symbols come on at the
an authorized Volvo workshop. is displayed in the text window: DO
same time, there may be a fault in the brake
Engine temperature force distribution system. NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to
Engine overheating can result from low oil or a trained and qualified Volvo service
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off technician and have the brake system 03
coolant levels, towing or hard driving at high
heat and altitude, or mechanical malfunction. the engine. inspected.
Engine overheating will be signaled with text 2. Restart the engine. • If the ABS and Brake system lights are
and a red warning triangle in the middle of the on at the same time, there is a risk of
instrument display. The exact text will depend • If both symbols extinguish, continue driv- reduced vehicle stability.
ing.
on the degree of overheating. It may range from
High engine temp Reduce speed to High • If the symbols remain on, check the level in
the brake fluid reservoir, see page 310. If Warning symbol
engine temp Stop engine. If appropriate,
other messages, such as Coolant level low, the brake fluid level is normal but the sym- The red warning symbol lights up to indicate a
bols are still lit, the vehicle can be driven, problem related to safety and/or drivability. A
Stop safely will also be displayed. If your
with great care, to an authorized Volvo message will also appear in the main instru-
engine does overheat so that you must stop the
workshop to have the brake system ments panel's display. The symbol remains
engine, always allow the engine to cool before checked. visible until the fault has been rectified but the
attempting to check oil and coolant levels.
• If the level in the reservoir is below MIN, the text message can be cleared with the OK but-
See page 310 for more information. vehicle should be transported to an author- ton, see page 187. The warning symbol can
Fault in brake system ized Volvo workshop to have the brake also come on in conjunction with other sym-
system checked. bols.
If this symbol lights, the brake fluid level may
be too low. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and Action:
check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see
1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the vehi-
page 310. If the level in the reservoir is below
cle further.
MIN, the vehicle should be transported to an
authorized Volvo workshop to have the brake 2. Read the information on the information
system checked. display. Implement the action in accord-
ance with the message in the display. Clear
the message using OK.

81
 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Reminder – doors not closed Trip odometers Clock

If one of the doors, the hood or trunk lid is not
closed properly, the information or warning
symbol comes on together with an explanatory
text message in the instrument panel. Stop the
vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible and
03 close the door, hood or trunk.
If the vehicle is driven at a speed
lower than approximately 5 mph
(7 km/h), the information symbol comes on.
If the vehicle is driven at a speed
higher than approximately 5 mph
(7 km/h), the warning symbol comes on. Trip odometers and reset button Clock and setting control
Road Sign Information (RSI) Odometer display Display
Road Sign Information (RSI) is a feature that
Button for toggling between T1 and T2, Control for setting the clock
helps the driver see road signs with information
such as current speed. See page 133 for and for resetting the odometer Turn the control clockwise/counterclockwise
detailed information. The trip odometers are used to measure short to set the time. The set time is shown in the
distances. The distance is shown in the dis- information display.
play. A short press the button toggles between
The clock may be temporarily replaced by a
the two trip odometers T1 and T2. A long press
symbol in conjunction with a message, see
(more than 2 seconds) resets the currently dis-
page 187.
played trip odometer to zero.
Setting the clock in MY CAR
In addition to setting the clock manually as
described above, it can also be set in the MY
CAR menu system. See page 189 for addi-
tional information about these menus.

82
 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

the 24-hour format or the 12-hour format (AM/

PM).

03

1. Go to Settings System options

Time.
2. The hour box will be selected. Press OK to
activate this box.
3. Turn TUNE to set the correct hour and
press OK to confirm the setting and deac-
tivate this box.
4. Turn TUNE to select the minute box (A) and
press OK to activate this box (B).
5. Turn TUNE to set the correct minute and
press OK to confirm the setting and deac-
tivate this box.
6. Turn TUNE to select OK and press OK to
complete the procedure.
Use the menu selection Settings System
options Time format to display the time in

83
 03 Your driving environment

Ignition modes

Inserting and removing the remote key Functions Mode Function

The remote key has 3 modes: 0, I, and II that
can be used without starting the engine. The 0 The odometer, clock and tem-
following table shows examples of which func- perature gauge are illuminated.
tions are available in the respective modes. Power seats* can be adjusted
and the infotainment system can
03 NOTE be used for a limited time (to min-
imize battery drain see
To access ignition modes I or II without star- page 212).
ting the engine, the brake pedal must not be
depressed. I The Moonroof*, power windows,
12-volt sockets in the passenger
compartment, navigation sys-
tem*, climate system blower,
Ignition slot with remote key and START/STOP
ENGINE button.
windshield wipers can be used.

II The headlights/taillights illumi-

Inserting the remote key1
nate. Warning/indicator lights
Holding the end of the remote key with the
illuminate for 5 seconds. Other
base of the key blade, insert the remote key
systems are activated. However,
into the ignition slot as shown in the illustration
the heated seats* and heated
and press it in as far as possible.
rear window function can only be
activated when the engine is run-
CAUTION ning. Mode II should only be
Foreign objects in the ignition slot can used for very short periods to
impair function or cause damage. help avoid draining the battery.

Removing the remote key

The remote key can be removed from the igni-
tion slot by pulling it out.

1 Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

84 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 03 Your driving environment

Ignition modes

Ignition modes Emergency towing

See page 269 for important information about
Ignition mode 0
the remote key when the vehicle is being
– The vehicle is unlocked.
towed.
Ignition mode I
– With the remote key fully pressed into the
03
ignition slot1, press START/STOP
ENGINE briefly.

Ignition mode II
– With the remote key fully pressed into the
ignition slot1, press START/STOP
ENGINE for approximately 2 seconds.

Returning to mode 0
To return to mode 0 from mode II or I, press
START/STOP ENGINE briefly.

Starting and stopping the engine

See page 113 for information on starting the
engine and switching it off.

1 Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

85
 03 Your driving environment

Seats

Front seats WARNING Adjust the backrest to an upright position.

• Do not adjust the seat while driving. The Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest.
seat should be adjusted so that the
brake pedal can be depressed fully. In Without releasing the catches, push the
addition, position the seat as far rear- backrest forward.
ward as comfort and control allow. Move the seat as far forward as possible
03
• Check that the seat is securely locked so that the head restraint slides under the
into position after adjusting. glove compartment.

Folding the front seat backrest WARNING

• When transporting long objects, cover
sharp edges on the load to help prevent
Lumbar support: turn the control for firmer injury to occupants. Secure the load to
or softer lumbar support. help prevent shifting during sudden
stops.
Front-rear adjustment: lift the bar and
move the seat to the position of your • When the seat's backrest is returned to
choice. the upright position, push and pull it to
be sure that it is securely locked in this
Raise/lower front edge of seat cushion, position.
pump up/down.
Backrest tilt: turn the control to adjust the
angle of the backrest.
Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down. The front passenger seat backrest can be
folded to a horizontal position to make room for
Control panel for power seat*. a long load. Fold the backrest as follows:
Move the seat as far back and down as
possible.

86 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 03 Your driving environment

Seats

Power seat1 NOTE Button for storing a position

• Only one of the power seat's controls M (memory) button

can be used at the same time.
Programming the seat's memory
• The power seats have an overload pro- Three different seating and door mirror posi-
tector that activates if a seat is blocked tions can be stored in the driver seat's memory.
by any object. If this occurs, switch off 03
the ignition (key in position 0) and wait The following example explains how button (1)
for a short period before operating the can be programmed. Buttons (2) and (3) are
seat again. programmed in the same way.
To program (store) a seat and door mirror posi-
Power seat memory function tion in button (1):
1. Move the seat (and door mirrors) to the
Power seat adjustment controls
desired positions using the seat and mirror
Front edge of seat cushion up/down adjustment controls.
Seat forward/rearward and up/down 2. Press and hold down the M (memory) but-
ton (4).
Backrest tilt
3. With the memory button depressed, press
Operation button (1) briefly to store the current posi-
The seats can be adjusted for a short period tion for the seat/mirrors.
after unlocking the door with the remote con- To move the seat and mirrors to the position
trol without the key in the ignition slot. Seat that they were in when a button was pro-
adjustment is normally made when the ignition grammed:
Power seat memory buttons
is on and can always be made when the engine
is running. Button for storing a position – Press and hold down button (1) until the
seat and mirrors stop moving.
Button for storing a position

1 Optional on certain models

87
 03 Your driving environment

Seats

NOTE 2. Go into the MY CAR menu and go to NOTE

Settings Car settings Car key
As a safety precaution, the seat will stop The remote key's memory feature and the
automatically if the button is released before memory power driver's seat memory function (the
the seat has reached the preset position. 3. To activate the remote key memory fea- settings made using the buttons on the side
ture, press ENTER (check the box). of the seat, see the section "Power seat
memory function" on page 87) work inde-
03 Remote key memory and the power > The remote key is now ready to store the pendently of each other.
driver's seat* and door mirrors2 position of the power driver's seat and
door mirrors.
Returning the seat/mirrors to the stored
Repeat this procedure for each of the vehicle's positions
remote keys. To move the seat and door mirrors to the posi-
See page 189 for a description of the menu tion stored in the remote key:
system. 1. Unlock the driver's door with the same
Storing the positions of the power remote key (the one used to lock the
driver's seat/mirrors in the remote key doors). For models equipped with the
1. Move the seat and door mirrors to the optional keyless drive, you must have the
desired position using the seat and mirror same remote key in your possession.
adjustment controls. 2. Open the driver's door within 2 minutes.
2. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors with the The driver's seat and door mirrors will auto-
Each remote key has a feature that enables it remote key (or close the driver's door and matically move to the position in which you left
to store (remember) the position of the power press the lock button on the door handle them (if the vehicle has been unlocked with one
driver's seat and door mirrors when the vehicle with the remote key in your possession on of the other keys and new seat/mirror adjust-
is locked with that remote key. vehicles with the optional keyless drive). ments have been made).
This feature has to be activated for each of the > The positions of the power driver's seat
remote keys used in the vehicle as follows: and door mirrors are now stored in the
remote key's memory.
1. Insert a remote key in the ignition slot.

2 This information also applies to vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

88 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 03 Your driving environment

Seats

NOTE Heated seats*

See page 199.
• The seat will move to this position even
if someone else has moved it to a dif-
ferent position and locked the vehicle Rear seats
with a different remote key.
Rear center head restraint
• This feature will work in the same way 03
with all of the remote keys that you use
with your vehicle.

Emergency stop

WARNING
• Because the driver's seat can be
adjusted with the ignition off, children The center head restraint should be adjusted
should never be left unattended in the according to the passenger's height. The
vehicle. restraint should be carefully adjusted to sup-
• Movement of the seat can be STOPPED port the occupant's head.
at any time by pressing any button on
the power seat control panel.
• Pull the head restraint up as required.
• To lower, press the button at the base of
• Do not adjust the seat while driving. The the head restraint’s left support while
seat should be adjusted so that the pressing the head restrain down carefully.
brake pedal can be depressed fully. In
addition, position the seat as far rear-
ward as comfort and control allow.
• The seat rails on the floor must not be
obstructed in any way when the seat is
in motion.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 89

 03 Your driving environment

Seats

WARNING NOTE Folding down the rear seat backrests

The center rear seat head restraint should • The head restraint must be returned to
only be in its lowest position when this seat the upright position manually.
is NOT occupied. When the center position
is occupied, the head restraint should be • The outboard head restraints cannot be
correctly adjusted to the passenger’s folded down on models that are not
03 height. The upper edge of the head restraint equipped with this button.
should be at least on a level with the upper-
most point of the seat occupant's ear.
CAUTION
Automatically folding down the rear The rear head restraints should not be kept
folded down for prolonged periods. This
seat’s outboard head restraints could result in pressure marks in leather
upholstery.
The rear seat backrests are split and can be folded
down together or separately
WARNING 1. Pull the release control handle(s).
For safety reasons, no one should be 2. Fold the backrest forward. Adjust the cen-
allowed to sit in the outboard rear seat posi- ter seat head restraint if necessary.
tions if the head restraints are folded down.
If these positions are occupied, the head
restraints should be in the upright (fixed) NOTE
position. When the backrests are folded down, move
the outboard head restraints forward
slightly so that they do not catch on the seat
cushion.
1. The ignition must be in mode II.
2. Press the button to lower the rear head
restraints for improved visibility.

90
 03 Your driving environment

Seats

CAUTION WARNING
To help avoid damage to the upholstery, • When one or more sections of the back-
there should be no objects on the rear seat rest is returned to the upright position,
and the seat belt should not be buckled check that it is properly locked in place
when the backrest is folded down. by pushing and pulling it. The red indi-
cators should also not be visible.
03
WARNING • Return the outboard head restraints to
the upright position.
• Keep vehicle doors and trunk locked
and keep keys out of a child’s reach. • Long loads should always be securely
Unsupervised children could lock them- anchored to help avoid injury in the
selves in an open trunk and risk injury. event of a sudden stop.
Children should be taught not to play in • Always turn the engine off and apply the
vehicles. parking brake when loading/unloading
• On hot days, the temperature in the the vehicle.
trunk or vehicle interior can rise very • Place the transmission in the Park (P)
quickly. Exposure of people to these position to help prevent inadvertent
high temperatures for even a short movement of the gear selector.
period of time can cause heat-related • On hot days, the temperature in the
injury or death. Small children are par- vehicle interior can rise very quickly.
ticularly at risk. Exposure of people to these high tem-
peratures for even a short period of time
can cause heat-related injury or death.
Small children are particularly at risk.

91
 03 Your driving environment

Steering wheel

Adjusting WARNING Horn

Never adjust the steering wheel while driv-
ing.

With the optional speed-dependent power

03 steering the level of steering force can be
adjusted, see page 205.

Keypads

G021138

Adjusting the steering wheel Horn

Lever for releasing/locking the steering – Press the steering wheel hub to sound the
wheel horn.
Possible positions
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both
height and reach:
1. Pull the lever toward you to release the
steering wheel.
Keypads in the steering wheel
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position
Cruise control, see page 135. Adaptive
that suits you.
cruise control*, see page 137.
3. Push back the lever to lock the steering
Infotainment controls, see page 214.
wheel in place. If the lever is difficult to
push into place, press the steering wheel
lightly at the same time as you push the
lever.

92 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Lighting panel High/low beam headlights

03

Overview, light switches with AUTO function

Overview, light switches Thumb wheel for adjusting display and Headlight switch and lever
Thumb wheel for adjusting display and instrument lighting High beam flash
instrument lighting Rear fog light
Toggle between high and low beams
Rear fog light Headlights/parking lights
Headlights/parking lights Position Description
Instrument lighting
Illumination of the display and instrument lights Daytime running lights/high
will vary, depending on ignition mode. beams/high beam flash
The display lighting is automatically subdued Parking lights
in darkness and the sensitivity is set with the
thumb wheel.
Low beams/high beams/high
The intensity of the instrument lighting is beam flash
adjusted with the thumb wheel.

``

93
 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Position Description between high and low beams (this also

applies on models equipped with the
Low beams/high beams/high optional Active Bending Lights).
beam flash > The symbol illuminates in the
"Tunnel detection"* will acti- instrument panel to indicate that the
vate the low beams in poor high beams are on.
03 lighting conditions
Low beams
The "Active high beam"* func- When the engine is started, the low beams are
tion can be used activated automatically (daytime running lights)
High beam flash if the headlight control is in position 0 or
.
Headlight switch with AUTO and lever Low beams/high beams/high
High beam flash beam flash Daytime running lights can be deactivated in
the MY CAR menu system under Settings
Toggle between high and low beams
Volvo recommends using the position Car settings Light settings Daytime
whenever weather conditions allow the use of running lights.
Position Description the "Active high beam"* function (see
However, please be aware that these lights
page 95).
Daytime running lights/high may not be deactivated in Canada.
beams/high beam flash High beam flash
Move the lever toward the steering wheel to NOTE
Parking lights position 1. The high beams come on until the • The use of daytime running lights is
lever is released. mandatory in Canada.
High/low beam headlights • Continuous high beams cannot be acti-
vated when the headlight switch is in
Continuous high beams position . High beam flash will
1. Set the ignition to mode II.
function in this position.
2. With the light switch in position 0 or
, pull the turn signal lever toward the
steering wheel to position 2 to toggle

94 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Active high beams – AHB* Activate/deactivate AHB by pulling the left

If the symbol illuminates in the instru-
AHB is a feature that uses a camera at the steering wheel lever rearward (toward the
steering wheel) as far as possible and releasing ment panel and AHB unavailable is displayed,
upper edge of the windshield to detect the
it. If AHB is deactivated while the high beams switching between high and low beams will
headlights of oncoming vehicles or the tail-
are on, the headlights will switch to low beams. have to be done manually. The light switch can
lights of a vehicle directly ahead. When this
happens, the headlights will automatically remain in the AUTO position. The same applies
switch from high beams to low beams. When if Windscreen Sensors blocked is displayed
03
the camera no longer detects the headlights/ and the symbol is displayed. The
taillights of other vehicles, your headlights will
switch back to high beams after several sec- symbol will go out when these mes-
onds. sages are displayed.
To activate this feature, turn the light switch to AHB may be temporarily unavailable (e.g., in
the position. Activation will occur if the heavy fog or rain). When AHB becomes active
engine has been running for at least again or if the sensors in the windshield are no
20 seconds and the vehicle's speed is at least longer obscured, the messages will disappear
12 mph (20 km/h). and the symbol will illuminate.

When AHB is activated, the symbol

will illuminate in the instrument panel. The high
beam indicator ( ) in the instrument panel
will also illuminate when the high beams are on.

NOTE
• Keep the windshield in front of the cam-
era free of ice, snow, dirt, etc.
• Do not mount or in any way attach any-
Light switch in the AUTO position thing on the windshield that could
obstruct the camera.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 95

 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

CAUTION Tunnel detection (standard on models When this function is activated, the headlight
with a rain sensor) beams adjust laterally to help light up a curve
In the following situations, it may be neces- according to movements of the steering wheel
sary to switch between high and low beams The optional rain sensor reacts to the change
in lighting conditions when, for example, the (see the right-pointing beam in the illustration).
manually:
vehicle is driven into a tunnel. If the daytime ABL is activated automatically1 when the
• In heavy fog or rain running lights have been deactivated, tunnel engine is started.
03 • In blowing snow or slush detection will activate the low beam headlights
while the vehicle is in the tunnel. The low The function can be deactivated/reactivated in
• In bright moonlight
beams will be switched off approx. the MY CAR menu system under My S60
• In freezing rain
20 seconds after the vehicle leaves the tunnel. Active Bending Lights or under Settings
• In areas with dim street lighting
Car settings Light settings Active
The rain sensor does not have to be activated
• When oncoming vehicles have dim front
for tunnel detection to function. Bending Lights.
lighting
See page 189 for a description of the menu
• If there are pedestrians on or near the Active Bending Lights (ABL)*
system.
road
• If there are reflective objects, such as
NOTE
signs, near the road
• When oncoming vehicles' lights are This function is only active in twilight or dark
obscured by e.g., fences, bushes, etc. conditions, and only when the vehicle is in
motion.
• When there are vehicles on connecting
roads
If a fault should occur in the system, the symbol
• At the top of hills or in dips in the road will illuminate and a message will be displayed
• In sharp curves as shown in the table.

See page161 for more information about the

Headlight pattern with the Active Bending Light
camera's limitations. function deactivated (left) and activated (right)

1 The factory default setting is on.

96 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Symbol Display Explana- Parking lights Rear fog light

tion
Headlamp The system
failure is not func-
Service tioning
required properly and 03
should be
inspected/
repaired by
a trained
and qualified
Volvo serv-
ice techni- Headlight control in position for parking lights
cian. The single rear fog light is located in the driver's
The parking lights (the license plate lights also side taillight cluster. The rear fog light will only
come on) can be turned on even when the igni- function in combination with the high/low
Auxiliary lights*
tion is switched off. beam headlights.
If the vehicle is fitted with auxiliary lights, the
driver can use the MY CAR menu system to Turn the headlight control to the center posi- – Press the button to switch the rear fog light
choose to deactivate and turn these lights on tion (the license plate lighting comes on at the on/off.
and off along with the high beam headlights2. same time). > The rear fog light indicator symbol
In dark ambient lighting conditions, the rear on the instrument panel and the
parking lights also illuminate when the trunk is light in the button come on when the
opened to alert anyone traveling behind your rear fog light is switched on.
vehicle. This happens regardless of the posi-
tion that the headlight control is in or which
mode the ignition is in.

2 The auxiliary lights must be connected to the vehicle's electrical system, which should only be done by a trained and authorized Volvo service technician. See page 189 for more information about
the menu system.
``

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 97

 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

NOTE NOTE When turning

Move the lever as far up or down as possi-
The rear fog light is considerably brighter • Regulations regarding the use of the
ble to start the turn signals. The turn signals will
than the normal taillights and should be hazard warning flasher may vary,
used only when conditions such as fog, rain, depending on where you live. be cancelled automatically by the movement of
snow, smoke or dust reduce visibility for the steering wheel, or the lever can be returned
other vehicles to less than 500 ft. • The hazard warning flashers will be acti- to its initial position by hand.
03 (150 meters). vated automatically if an airbag
deploys.
NOTE
Hazard warning flashers • This automatic flashing sequence can
Turn signals be interrupted by immediately moving
the lever in the opposite direction.
• If the turn signal indicator flashes faster
than normal, check for a burned-out
turn signal bulb.

Location of the hazard warning flasher button

Turn signals
The hazard warning flasher should be used to
indicate that the vehicle has become a traffic When changing lanes
hazard. The driver can automatically flash the turn
– To activate the flashers, press the button signals 3 times by moving the turn signal lever
in the center dash. Press the button again up or down to the first position and releasing it.
to turn off the flashers.

98
 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Interior lighting, front "Theater lighting" Glove compartment lighting

When the overhead courtesy lighting has gone The glove compartment lighting switches on/
out and the engine is running, several LEDs off automatically when the lid is opened/
located near the roof console illuminate to pro- closed.
vide faint lighting for the occupants of the front
seats. This lighting goes out just after the over- Overhead courtesy lighting
head courtesy lighting when the vehicle is The passenger compartment lighting is 03
locked. switched on and off automatically when button
(3) is in the neutral position.
Interior lighting, rear The lighting comes on and remains on for
30 seconds if:
G021149 • the vehicle is unlocked from the outside
with the key or remote control
Light switches, front roof lighting
• the engine is switched off and the ignition
Drivers side front reading light, on/off is in mode 0.
Passenger's side front reading light, on/off The lighting switches off when:
Overhead courtesy lighting. • the engine is started
The lighting in the front part of the passenger • the vehicle is locked from the outside.
compartment is controlled with the buttons (1) The lighting comes on and remains on for two

G021150
and (2) in the roof console. minutes if one of the doors is open.
Switch (3) has three positions for all passenger Rear reading lights The passenger compartment lighting can be
compartment lighting: switched on and off manually within 30 minutes
The lights are switched on or off by pressing
after the vehicle has been unlocked.
• Off: right side depressed, automatic light- each respective button.
ing off. If the lighting is switched on manually and the
Courtesy lights/door step lighting* vehicle is locked, the courtesy lighting will
• Neutral position: automatic lighting is on. The courtesy lights/door step lighting switch switch off automatically after one minute.
• On – left side depressed, passenger com- on/off automatically when one of the front
partment lighting on. doors is opened/closed.

``

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 99

 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Trunk lighting Approach lighting

The trunk lighting comes on automatically Approach lighting is activated by pressing the
when the trunk lid is opened. approach light button on the remote key (see
the illustration on page 55).
Home safe lighting When the function has been activated, the
When you leave your vehicle at night, you can parking lights, indicator lights, door mirror
03
make use of the home safe lighting function to lights, license plate lighting, dome lighting and
illuminate the area in front of the vehicle. door step lighting come on.
1. Remove the key from the ignition slot to put The time interval for this lighting can be set by
the ignition in mode 0 (see page 85 for pressing MY CAR and going to Car settings
information about the ignition modes). Light settings Approach light
2. Pull the turn signal lever as far as possible duration. See page 189 for a description of
towards the steering wheel and release it. the menu system.

3. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors.

The headlights, parking lights, turn signals,
lights in the door mirrors, license plate lights,
and footwell lighting will illuminate and remain
on for 30 3, 60 or 90 seconds. The time interval
can be set in MY CAR under Settings Car
settings Light settings Home safe light
duration. See page 189 for a description of
the menu system.

3 Factory setting

100
 03 Your driving environment

Wipers and washers

Windshield wipers/washers Windshield wipers off (the wipers will sweep the windshield more fre-
Move the lever to position 0 to switch quently) or down (the wipers will sweep the
off the windshield wipers. windshield less frequently).

Single sweep NOTE

Move the lever upward from position
0 to sweep the windshield one stroke The wipers will make an extra sweep each
time the thumb wheel is adjusted upward. 03
at a time for as long as the lever is held up.

Intermittent wiping When the rain sensor is activated, the symbol

With the lever in this position, you can will illuminate in the instrument panel.
set the wiper interval by twisting the
thumb wheel upward to increase wiper speed Activating and setting the sensitivity
or downward to decrease the speed. When activating the rain sensor, the vehicle
Windshield wipers and washers must be running or in ignition mode II and the
Rain sensor* on/off Continuous wiping windshield wiper lever must be in position 0 or
The wipers operate at normal speed. in the single sweep position.
Thumb wheel sensitivity/frequency
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the button
The wipers operate at high speed.
CAUTION . The windshield wipers will make one
sweep.
• Use ample washer fluid when washing
Windshield wiper service position
the windshield. The windshield should Press the lever up for the wipers to make an
be thoroughly wet when the wipers are
The windshield wipers must be in the service extra sweep. The rain sensor returns to active
in operation. position before the wiper blades can be mode when the stalk is released back to posi-
cleaned or replaced. See page 318 for addi- tion 0.
• Before using the wipers, ice and snow tional information.
should be removed from the wind- Deactivating
shield/rear window. Be sure the wiper Rain sensor* Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the but-
blades are not frozen in place. The rain sensor automatically regulates wiper ton or press the lever down to another
speed according to the amount of water on the wiper position.
windshield. The sensitivity of the rain sensor
can be adjusted moving the thumb wheel up

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 101

 03 Your driving environment

Wipers and washers

The rain sensor is automatically deactivated Heated washer nozzles*

when the key is removed from the ignition slot The washer nozzles are heated automatically
or five minutes after the ignition has been in cold weather to help prevent the washer fluid
switched off. from freezing.

CAUTION High-pressure headlight washing*

03 High-pressure headlight washing consumes a
The rain sensor should be deactivated when large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the
washing the car in an automatic car wash, headlights are washed using two alternatives:
etc. If the rain sensor function is left on, the
wipers will start inadvertently in the car • Low/high beam headlights on. The head-
wash and could be damaged. lights will be washed the first time the wind-
shield is washed. Thereafter, the head-
Windshield washing lights will only be washed once for every
five times the windshield is washed within
a 10-minute period.
• Parking lights on. Optional Active Bend-
ing Lights will be washed once for every
five times the windshield is washed. Nor-
mal halogen headlights will not be washed.

CAUTION
• Use ample washer fluid when washing
the windshield. The windshield should
be thoroughly wet when the wipers are
in operation.
Washing function
• When approx. 1 US quart (1 liter) of
Move the lever toward the steering wheel to washer fluid remains in the reservoir,
start the windshield and headlight washers. the headlights will no longer be washed.
After the lever is released the wipers make sev- A text message will also be displayed to
eral extra sweeps. remind the driver to fill the washer fluid
reservoir.

102 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 03 Your driving environment

Power windows

Power windows WARNING panels in the other doors only operate the win-
dow in the respective doors.
• Always remove the ignition key when
the vehicle is unattended to put the igni- For the power windows to function, the ignition
tion in mode 0 (see page 85 for infor- must be in at least mode I. When the vehicle
mation about the ignition modes). has been running, the power windows can be
operated for several minutes after the remote
• Never leave children unattended in the
key has been removed from the ignition slot, or 03
vehicle.
until a door has been opened.
• Make sure that the windows are com-
pletely unobstructed before they are
operated.
NOTE
• Movement of the windows will stop if
they are obstructed in any way.
Operating
Driver's door control panel • To reduce buffeting wind noise if the
Switch for disengaging rear door power rear windows are opened, also open the
window buttons front windows slightly.

Rear door window controls

Manual up/down
Front door window controls. – Move one of the controls up/down slightly.
> The power windows move up/down as
long as the control is held in position.
Auto up/down
– Move one of the controls up/down as far
as possible and release it.
Operating the power windows > The window will open or close com-
Manual up/down pletely.

Auto up/down.
All power windows can be operated using the
control panel in the driver's door. The control

103
 03 Your driving environment

Power windows

Resetting When not in use, release the hooks and hold

If the battery has been disconnected, the auto the sun shade while it retracts.
open function must be reset so that it will work
properly.
1. Gently raise the front section of the button
to close the window and hold it for one
03 second.
2. Release the button briefly.
3. Raise the front section of the button again
for one second.

Integrated rear sun shade*

Integrated sun shade

– Pull up the sun shade and attach its hooks
to the ceiling clips.
> The sun shade's spring-loading will pull
it taut.

104 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 03 Your driving environment

Mirrors

Power door mirrors Retractable power door mirrors* To activate this function, select reverse gear
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving and press the L or R mirror control button to tilt
in narrow spaces: the mirror down.
1. Press down the L and R buttons at the The function can be activated/deactivated in
same time. MY CAR under Settings Car settings
2. Release them after approximately one sec- Side mirror settings Tilt left mirror or Tilt
03
ond. The mirrors automatically stop in the right mirror. See page 189 for a description
fully retracted position. of the menu system.
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L The door mirror will reset to its normal position:
and R buttons at the same time. The mirrors • after 10 seconds when reverse is disen-
automatically stop in the fully extended posi- gaged and the car remains stopped.
tion.
Door mirror controls • immediately when reverse is disengaged
Storing the position* and the vehicle's forward speed exceeds
Adjusting The mirror positions are stored in the key mem- approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
1. Press the L button for the left door mirror ory when the vehicle has been locked with the • immediately if you press the correspond-
or the R button for the right door mirror. remote key. When the vehicle is unlocked with ing L or R button again.
The light in the button comes on. the same remote control the mirrors and the • when the engine is turned off.
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the driver's seat adopt the stored positions when
the driver's door is opened.
• when the side mirrors are folded in.
center.
3. Press the L or R button again. The light The function can be activated/deactivated in NOTE
should no longer be on. MY CAR under Settings Car settings
Only one mirror can be tilted down at a time.
Car key memory Personal settings in key
WARNING memory. See page 189 for a description of the
menu system.
Automatically tilting the door mirrors
Objects seen in the mirrors may appear fur- when parking
ther away than they actually are. Tilting the door mirrors when parking* The door mirrors can tilt down automatically to
The door mirrors can be tilted down to help help give the driver a better view along the
give the driver a better view along the sides of sides of the vehicle, for example when parallel
the vehicle, for example when parallel parking. parking. When the transmission is no longer in

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 105

 03 Your driving environment

Mirrors

reverse, the mirrors will automatically return to Home safe and approach lighting Settings Climate settings Automatic
their original position. The light on the door mirrors comes on when rear defroster. See page 189 for a description
This function can be activated/deactivated in approach lighting or home safe lighting is of the menu system.
selected, see page 100.
MY CAR under Settings Car settings
Side mirror settings In reverse gear tilt Interior rearview mirror
left mirror or In reverse gear tilt right Rear window and door mirror
03 defrosters Auto-dim function
mirror. See page 189 for information about
An integrated sensor reacts to headlights from
the MY CAR menu system.
following traffic and automatically reduces
Automatic retraction when locking glare in the mirror.
When the vehicle is locked/unlocked with the
remote key the door mirrors are automatically
retracted/extended.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
MY CAR under Settings Car settings
Side mirror settings Retract side mirrors
when locking. See page 189 for a description
of the menu system.
Resetting to neutral
Mirrors that have been moved out of position Use the defroster to quickly remove fog and ice
by an external force must be electrically reset from the rear window and the door mirrors.
to the neutral position for electric retracting/ Press the button once to start simultaneous
extending to work. rear window and door mirror defrosting. The
• Retract the mirrors with the L and R but- light in the button indicates that the function is
tons. active. Switch the function off when then win-
dows have cleared to help avoid battery drain.
• Fold them out again with the L and R but-
tons. The rear window is defogged/de-iced auto-
The mirrors are now reset in neutral position. matically if the vehicle is started in an outside
temperature lower than 48 °F (9 °C). Auto-
defrosting can be selected in MY CAR under

106
 03 Your driving environment

Compass*

Operation 1. Stop the vehicle in a large open area, safely Selecting a magnetic zone
out of traffic and away from steel structures 1
and high-tension electrical wires.
2 15
2. Start the vehicle.
14
3
NOTE
13 03
For best results from calibration, switch off 4
all electrical equipment in the vehicle (cli- 12
mate system, windshield wipers, audio sys- 5 8
tem, etc.) and make sure that all doors are 11
9
10
closed.

G018632
6 7

3. Using a pen or similar object, press and Magnetic zones.

Rearview mirror with compass.
hold the button on the underside of mirror
The rearview mirror has an integrated display until C is shown again in the mirror (after The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.
that shows the compass direction in which the approx. 6 seconds). The correct zone must be selected for the com-
vehicle is pointing. Eight different directions are pass to work correctly.
shown with the abbreviations: N (north), NE 4. Drive as usual. C disappears from the dis-
play when calibration is complete. 1. Put the ignition in mode II.
(north east), E (east), SE (southeast), S (south),
SW (southwest), W (west) and NW (northwest). Alternative calibration method: 2. Using a pen or similar object, press and
hold the button on the rear side of mirror
The compass is displayed automatically when Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no for at least 3 seconds. The number for the
the vehicle is started or in ignition mode II. To more than 5 mph (8 km/h) until C disap- current area will be shown.
switch the compass on/off use a pen or similar pears from the display when calibration is
object and press in the button on the underside 3. Press the button repeatedly until the num-
complete.
of the mirror. ber for the required geographic area
(1 – 15) is shown.
Calibration 4. The display will revert to showing the com-
The compass will need to be calibrated if the pass direction after several seconds.
vehicle is driven into a new magnetic zone (see
the magnetic zones on the map at the end of
this section). To do so:

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 107

 03 Your driving environment

Power moonroof

Introduction Sliding moonroof until the moonroof has opened to the posi-
The moonroof1 controls are located in the ceil- tion of your choice.
ing console near the rearview mirror. The Manual closing
moonroof can be opened vertically and hori- – Push the switch forward to the first stop
zontally. The vehicle's ignition must be in mode (the position for manual closing) and hold
I or II for the moonroof to be operated. it until the moonroof has closed to the posi-
03 tion of your choice, or has closed com-
CAUTION pletely.
• Remove ice and snow before opening Automatic closing
the moonroof. – Push the switch as far forward as possible
(the position for automatic closing) and

G021343
• Do not operate the moonroof if it is fro-
zen closed. release it to automatically close the moon-
Sliding moonroof, forward/rearward
roof.
• Never place heavy objects on the
moonroof. Opening, automatic
Opening, manual
Closing, manual
Closing, automatic

Automatic opening
– Pull the switch as far back as possible (to
the position for automatic opening) and
release it to automatically fully slide open
the moonroof.
Manual opening
– Pull the switch back to the first stop (the
position for manual opening) and hold it

1 Option on certain models

108
 03 Your driving environment

Power moonroof

WARNING Tilt position Wind blocker

• During manual closing, if the moonroof
is obstructed, immediately open it
again.
• Never open or close the moonroof if it is
obstructed in any way. 03
• Never allow a child to operate the
moonroof.
• Never leave a child alone in a vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, ensure that

G028899
the ignition is in mode 0 (see page 84 for
information about the various ignition
modes) to disable the moonroof. Never Tilt position, raised at the rear edge
The moonroof is equipped with a wind blocker
leave the remote key/PCC* in the vehi- Open by pressing the rear edge of the con-
that folds up when the moonroof is open.
cle. trol upward.
• Never extend any object or body part Close by pulling the rear edge of the con-
though the open moonroof, even if the trol downward and hold it until the moon-
vehicle's ignition is completely roof has closed completely.
switched off.
Visor
The moonroof features a sliding visor. The visor
slides open automatically when the moonroof
is opened, and must be closed manually.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 109

 03 Your driving environment

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

Introduction WARNING Programming HomeLink

• If you use HomeLink to open a garage
NOTE
door or gate, be sure no one is near the
gate or door while it is in motion. Some vehicles may require the ignition to be
switched on or be in the “accessories” posi-
• When programming a garage door
tion for programming and/or operation of
03 opener, it is advised to park outside of HomeLink. It is also recommended that a
the garage. new battery be placed in the hand-held
• Do not use HomeLink with any garage transmitter of the device being programmed
door opener that lacks safety stop and to HomeLink for quicker training and accu-
reverse features as required by U.S. rate transmission of the radio-frequency
federal safety standards (this includes signal. The HomeLink buttons must be reset
any garage door opener model manu- first. When this has been completed, Home-
link is in learning mode so that you can per-
factured before April 1, 1982). A garage
form programming.
The HomeLink1 Wireless Control System pro- door that cannot detect an object - sig-
vides a convenient way to replace up to three naling the door to stop and reverse -
hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters does not meet current U.S. federal 1. Position the end of your hand-held trans-
used to activate devices such as gate opera- safety standards. For more information, mitter 1–3 inches (5–14 cm) away from the
tors, garage door openers, entry door locks, contact HomeLink at: HomeLink button you wish to program
security systems, even home lighting. Addi- www.homelink.com. while keeping the indicator light in view.
tional HomeLink information can be found on 2. Simultaneously press and hold both the
the Internet at www.homelink.com or by phon- Retain the original transmitter of the RF device chosen HomeLink and hand-held transmit-
ing the hotline at 1–800–355–3515. you are programming for use in other vehicles ter buttons until the HomeLink indicator
as well as for future HomeLink programming. It light changes from a slow to a rapidly blink-
is also suggested that upon the sale of the ing light. Now you may release both the
vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be HomeLink and hand-held transmitter but-
erased for security purposes. Refer to “Reset- tons.
ting HomeLink Buttons” on page 112.

1 HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.

110 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 03 Your driving environment

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

NOTE or “smart” button. This can usually be cedures, replace “Programming HomeLink”
found where the hanging antenna wire is step 2 with the following:
Some devices may require you to replace attached to the motor-head unit.
this Programming Step 2 with procedures • Continue to press and hold the HomeLink
noted in the “Gate Operator / Canadian Pro- 5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or button while you press and release -
gramming” section. If the HomeLink indica- “smart” button. (The name and color of the every two seconds (“cycle”) your hand-
tor light does not change to a rapidly blink- button may vary by manufacturer.) There held transmitter until the HomeLink indica-
ing light after performing these steps, con- are 30 seconds to initiate step 6. tor light changes from a slow to a rapidly 03
tact HomeLink at www.homelink.com or by blinking light. Now you may release both
phoning the hotline at 1–800–355–3515. 6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter
for two seconds and release the pro- buttons.
3. Firmly press, hold for five seconds and grammed HomeLink button. Repeat the
Proceed with “Programming” step 3 to com-
release the programmed HomeLink but- “press/hold/release” sequence a second
plete.
ton up to two separate times to activate the time, and, depending on the brand of the
door. If the door does not activate, press garage door opener (or other rolling code
and hold the just-trained HomeLink button equipped device), repeat this sequence a Using HomeLink
and observe the indicator light. third time to complete the programming To operate, simply press and hold the pro-
process. grammed HomeLink button until the trained
• If the indicator light stays on con- device begins to operate (this may take several
stantly, programming is complete HomeLink should now activate your rolling
code equipped device. seconds). Activation will now occur for the
and your device should activate when
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate
the HomeLink button is pressed and
released.
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming operator, security system, entry door lock,
Canadian radio-frequency laws require trans- home/office lighting, etc.). For convenience,
• If the indicator light blinks rapidly for mitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after sev- the hand-held transmitter of the device may
two seconds and then turns to a con- eral seconds of transmission – which may not also be used at any time. In the event that there
stant light continue with “Program- be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the are still programming difficulties or questions,
ming” steps 4-6 to complete the pro- contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or
signal during programming. Similar to this
gramming of a rolling code equipped
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are by phoning the hotline at 1–800–355–3515.
device (most commonly a garage door
designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
opener).
If you live in Canada or you are having difficul-
4. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-
ties programming a gate operator or garage
head unit) in the garage, locate the “learn”
door opener by using the “Programming” pro-

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 111

 03 Your driving environment

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

NOTE Reprogramming a Single HomeLink NOTE

Button
If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink will The transmitter has been tested and com-
function for 30 minutes after the driver's To program a device to HomeLink using a plies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or
door has been opened. HomeLink button previously trained, follow modifications not expressly approved by
these steps: the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink but-
03 Resetting HomeLink Buttons device.2
ton. DO NOT release the button.
Use the following procedure to reset (erase
programming) from the three HomeLink but- 2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
tons (individual buttons cannot be reset but 20 seconds. Without releasing the Home-
can be “reprogrammed” as outlined in the fol- Link button, proceed with “Programming”
lowing section): - step 1.

1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink For questions or comments, contact HomeLink
buttons until the indicator light begins to at: www.homelink.com or phone 1–800–355–
flash. 3515.

2. Release both buttons. This device complies with FCC rules part 15
and Industry Canada (IC) RSS-210. Operation
> HomeLink is now in the training (or
is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
learning) mode and can be programmed
This device may not cause harmful interfer-
at any time beginning with “Program-
ence, and (2) This device must accept any
ming” - step 1.
interference that may be received including
interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.

2 The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

112 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

Start WARNING The starter motor operates for a maximum

of 10 seconds. If the engine has not
• Never use more than one floor mat at a started, repeat the procedure.
time on the driver's floor. An extra mat
on the driver's floor can cause the
accelerator and/or brake pedal to
CAUTION
catch. Check that the movement of If the engine does not start after the third try,
these pedals is not impeded. wait for approximately 3 minutes before try- 03
ing to start it again to give the battery time
• Volvo's floor mats are specially manu-
to recover its starting capacity.
factured for your car. They must be
firmly secured in the clips on the floor so
that they cannot slide and become trap- NOTE
ped under the pedals on the driver's
side. Keyless drive*
Ignition slot with remote key inserted ( see To start a vehicle equipped with the keyless
page 84 for more information on ignition modes) drive feature, one of the remote keys must
1. Press the remote key into the ignition slot
be in the passenger compartment. Follow
WARNING as far as possible, with the metallic key the instructions in steps 2 and 3 to start the
blade pointing outward (not inserted into vehicle.
Before starting the engine: the slot)1.
• Fasten the seat belt. 2. Depress the brake pedal2.
• Check that the seat, steering wheel and
mirrors are adjusted properly. 3. Press and release the START/STOP
ENGINE button. The autostart function will
• Make sure the brake pedal can be
operate the starter motor until the engine
depressed completely. Adjust the seat
starts or until its overheating function stops
if necessary.
it.

1 On vehicles with the optional keyless drive, it is only necessary to have a remote key in the passenger’s compartment.
2 If the vehicle is moving, it is only necessary to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the vehicle.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 113

 03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

WARNING NOTE CAUTION

• Always remove the remote key from the • After a cold start, idle speed may be • When starting in cold weather, the auto-
ignition slot when leaving the vehicle noticeably higher than normal for a matic transmission may shift up at
and ensure that the ignition in mode 0 short period. This is done to help bring slightly higher engine speeds than nor-
(see page 85 for information about the components in the emission control mal until the automatic transmission
ignition modes), especially if there are system to their normal operating tem- fluid reaches normal operating tem-
03 children in the vehicle. perature as quickly as possible, which perature.
• On vehicles with th optional keyless enables them to control emissions and • Do not race a cold engine immediately
drive, never remove the remote key help reduce the vehicle's impact on the after starting. Oil flow may not reach
from the vehicle while it is being driven environment3. some lubrication points fast enough to
or towed. prevent engine damage.
• Always place the gear selector in Park • The engine should be idling when you
and apply the parking brake before move the gear selector. Never acceler-
leaving the vehicle. Never leave the ate until after you feel the transmission
vehicle unattended with the engine run- engage. Accelerating immediately after
ning. selecting a gear will cause harsh
• Always open garage doors fully before engagement and premature transmis-
starting the engine inside a garage to sion wear.
ensure adequate ventilation. The • Selecting P or N when idling at a stand-
exhaust gases contain carbon monox- still for prolonged periods of time will
ide, which is invisible and odorless but help prevent overheating of the auto-
very poisonous. matic transmission fluid.

3 If the gear selector is in the D or R positions and the car is not moving, engine speed (rpm) will be lower and it will take longer for the engine to reach normal operating temperature.

114
 03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

Engine Remote Start (ERS)* Using ERS If the requirements for ERS have been met, the
following will occur:
Introduction
ERS is a feature that makes it possible to 1. The turn signals will flash several times.
remotely start the engine to cool or heat the 2. The engine will start.
passenger compartment before driving. 3. The turn signals will illuminate for
The climate control system will start using the 3 seconds to indicate that the engine has 03
same settings as when the engine was started.
switched off. After the engine has started, the vehicle
remains locked but the alarm is disarmed.
When the engine is started using ERS, it will run
for a maximum of 15 minutes before automat- Models with a Personal Car
ically switching off again. After 2 ERS starts, Communicator (PCC) remote key* (see
the engine must be started in the normal way page 56)
Remote key buttons used for remote engine start
before ERS can be used again. The indicator light for approach light-
Lock
ing will flash several times and then
NOTE Approach lighting glow continuously if all of the require-
Always adhere to applicable State, Province ments for ERS have been met. How-
Information4. ever, this does not indicate that ERS has
and or Local laws regarding engine idling
when using ERS. started the engine.
Starting the engine
To check if ERS has started the engine, press
The maximum range for ERS is approximately
WARNING the information button (3). If the engine has
100 ft (30 meters) if the view of the vehicle is
started, the indicator light for button 2 will illu-
Keep the following in mind before using ERS unobstructed. The vehicle must also be
minate.
locked.
• The vehicle should be in view. Active functions
To start the engine:
• The vehicle should be unoccupied. When the engine is started with ERS, the fol-
1. Press button 1 briefly. lowing functions are activated:
• The vehicle must not be parked indoors
or in an enclosed area. Exhaust fumes 2. Immediately press button 2 for approxi- • The climate control system
are harmful to the health. mately 2 seconds.
• The infotainment system.
4 PCC keys only, see page 56

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 115

 03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

Deactivated functions Switching off the engine To jump start your vehicle:
When the engine is started with ERS, the fol- With the engine running, press the START/ 1. Switch off the ignition (set the ignition to
lowing functions are deactivated: STOP ENGINE button. mode 0, see page 84).
• Headlights If the gear selector is not in the P position or if 2. First connect the red jumper cable to the
• Parking lights the vehicle is moving, press the START/STOP auxiliary battery's positive (+) terminal (1).
• License plate lights ENGINE button twice or press and hold it in
03 3. Fold back the cover over the positive (+)
until the engine switches off.
• Windshield wipers terminal on your vehicle's battery (2),
marked with a "+" sign, located under a
Switching off an engine started with ERS Jump starting folding cover.
Any of the following will switch off the engine if
it has been started with ERS: 4. Connect the black jumper cable to the aux-
iliary battery's negative (–) terminal (3) and
• Pressing the lock button (1) on the remote to the ground point in your vehicle's engine
key compartment (right engine mount at the
• Unlocking the vehicle top, on the outer screw) (4).
• Opening a door 5. Start the engine in the assisting vehicle,
• Depressing the throttle or brake pedal then start the engine in the vehicle with
• Moving the gear selector from the P posi- dead battery.
tion 6. After the engine has started, first remove

G021347
• If there are less than approx. 2.5 gallons the negative (–) terminal jumper cable
(10 liters) of fuel in the tank (black). Then remove the positive (+) termi-
Connecting the jumper cables nal jumper cable (red).
• More than 15 minutes have elapsed.
Follow these instructions to jump start your
If the engine has been started with ERS and
vehicle's dead battery or to jump start another
switches off, the turn signals will illuminate for
vehicle's dead battery using your vehicle. If the
3 seconds.
12-volt auxiliary battery to be used is in another
Message in the instrument panel display vehicle, check that the vehicles are not touch-
If ERS is interrupted, a text message will be ing to prevent premature completion of a cir-
displayed in the instrument panel. cuit. Be sure to follow jump starting instruc-
tions provided for the other vehicle.

116
 03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

WARNING WARNING
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! • Do not connect the jumper cable to any
Battery posts, terminals, and related acces- part of the fuel system or to any moving
sories contain lead and lead compounds, parts. Avoid touching hot manifolds.
chemicals known to the state of California • Batteries generate hydrogen gas, which
to cause cancer and reproductive harm. is flammable and explosive. 03
Wash hands after handling.
• Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do
not allow battery fluid to contact eyes,
CAUTION skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If con-
tact occurs, flush the affected area
Connect the jumper cables carefully to immediately with water. Obtain medical
avoid short circuits with other components
help immediately if eyes are affected.
in the engine compartment.
• Never expose the battery to open flame
or electric spark.
• Do not smoke near the battery.
• Failure to follow the instructions for
jump starting can lead to injury.

117
 03 Your driving environment

Transmission

Automatic transmission CAUTION

The transmission’s temperature is moni-
tored to help prevent damage to the trans-
mission or other drivetrain components. If
there is a risk of overheating, the warning
symbol on the instrument panel will illumi-
03 nate and a text message will be displayed.
Follow the instructions provided there.

Park position (P)

Select the P position when starting or parking.
G021351
Shiftlock
Shiftgate positions1
When P has been selected, the transmission is CAUTION
mechanically blocked in this position. The
Depress the button on the front of the gear brake pedal must be depressed and the igni- The vehicle must be stationary when posi-
selector knob to move the gear selector tion must be in at least mode II (see page 84) tion P is selected.
between the R, N, D, and P positions. before the gear lever can be moved from the
The gear selector can be moved freely between P position. Reverse (R)
the Geartronic (manual shifting) and Drive (D) The vehicle must be stationary when position
positions while driving. WARNING R is selected.
Always apply the parking brake when the Neutral position (N)
vehicle is parked, particularly when parking No gear is engaged and the engine can be
on a hill. The transmission's P mode may
not be able to keep the vehicle stationary if started with the gear selector in this position.
it is parked on an incline. Apply the parking brake if the vehicle is sta-
tionary with the gear selector in position N.
Press the control to apply the parking brake, Drive (D)
see page 124. D is the normal driving position. The car auto-
matically shifts between the various forward

1 The information display (see page 77) shows the gear selector's position or the selected gear by displaying the following: P, R, N, D, S, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.

118
 03 Your driving environment

Transmission

gears, based on the level of acceleration and not occur until the speed has decreased NOTE
speed. The car must be at a standstill when enough to allow the lower gear to be used.
shifting from position R to position D. • If you slow to a very low speed, the trans- • On vehicles equipped with Sport mode,
the transmission symbol in the main
mission will automatically shift down.
Geartronic–manual shifting instrument panel will change from D to
Geartronic allows you to manually shift among Shiftlock – Neutral (N) S when the gear selector is moved to
your vehicle's six forward speeds. Geartronic If the gear selector is in the N position and the the manual shifting mode. If the gear
vehicle has been stationary for at least 3 sec- selector is moved toward "+" or "-", the 03
can be selected at any time.
onds (irrespective of whether the engine is run- number of the gear currently being used
• To access the manual shifting position ning) then the gear selector is locked. will be displayed, see page 77).
from Drive (D), move the gear selector to
the right (to the area marked M in the illus- To be able to move the gear selector from N to • Please be aware that using Sport mode
tration. another gear position, the brake pedal must be may result in a slight decrease in fuel
depressed and the ignition must be in posi- economy. Driving in D can help improve
• To return to the D position from the manual fuel economy.
shifting position, move the gear selector to tion II, see page 84.
the left. Geartronic–Sport mode (S)2
This transmission mode provides sportier shift- Geartronic–starting on slippery surfaces
While driving Selecting 3rd gear in Geartronic’s manual shift-
• If you select the manual shifting position ing characteristics and enables a more active
driving style by making it possible to drive at ing mode can help provide better traction when
while driving, the gear that was being used
higher rpm in each gear before shifting up. The starting off on slippery surfaces. To do so:
in the Drive position will also initially be
selected in the manual shifting position. engine also responds faster when the throttle 1. Depress the brake pedal and move the
pedal is pressed. gear selector to the right from the D posi-
• Move the gear selector forward (toward
"+") to shift to a higher gear or rearward To access Sport mode from Drive (D), move the tion to the manual shifting position. The
(toward "–") to shift to a lower gear. gear selector to the right. The transmission will text in the instrument panel display will
not switch to manual shifting mode until the change from D to 1.
• If you hold the gear selector toward "–", the
transmission will downshift one gear at a gear selector is moved forward or rearward 2. Press the gear selector forward and
time and will utilize the braking power of toward + or –. release it (this selects 2nd gear). Press the
the engine. If the current speed is too high selector forward again and release it to
Sport mode can be selected any time.
for using a lower gear, the downshift will select 3rd gear.

2 Certain models only

119
 03 Your driving environment

Transmission

3. Release the brake pedal and press gently Move the gear selector from the P position. NOTE
on the accelerator pedal. For information on the key blade, see
page 57. The message AWD disabled Service
Shiftlock override required will be appear in the information
All Wheel Drive – AWD4 display if an electrical fault should occur in
the AWD system. A warning light will also
illuminate in the instrument panel. If this
03 occurs, have the system checked by a
trained and qualified Volvo service techni-
cian.

If the vehicle cannot be driven, for example

because of a dead battery, the gear selector Your Volvo can be equipped with permanent
must be moved from the P position before the All Wheel Drive, which means that power is
distributed automatically between the front
vehicle can be moved3.
and rear wheels. Under normal driving condi-
Lift away the rubber mat on the floor of the tions, most of the engine's power is directed to
storage compartment behind the center the front wheels. However, if there is any ten-
console to expose the small opening for dency for the front wheels to spin, an electron-
overriding the shiftlock system. ically controlled coupling distributes power to
Insert the key blade into the opening. Press the wheels that have the best traction.
the key blade down as far as possible and
keep it held down.

3 If the battery is dead, the electric parking brake cannot be applied or released. Connect an auxiliary battery if the battery voltage is too low, see page 116.
4 Standard on certain models.

120
 03 Your driving environment

Brakes

Brake system Brake pad inspection WARNING

The brake system is a hydraulic system con- On vehicles equipped with a jack*, the condi-
sisting of two separate brake circuits. If a prob- tion of the brake pads can be checked by rais- • Use the jack intended for the vehicle
ing the vehicle (see page 294 for information when changing a tire. For any other job,
lem should occur in one of these circuits, it is use stands to support the vehicle.
still possible to stop the vehicle with the other about using the jack and removing a wheel)
brake circuit. and performing a visual inspection of the brake • The jack should be kept well-greased
pads. and clean, and should not be damaged. 03
If the brake pedal must be depressed farther
than normal and requires greater foot pressure,
• Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non-
WARNING slippery surface.
the stopping distance will be longer.
• If the vehicle has been driven immedi- • No objects should be placed between
A warning light in the instrument panel will light the base of jack and the ground, or
ately prior to a brake pad inspection, the
up to warn the driver that a fault has occurred. between the jack and the attachment
wheel hub, brake components, etc., will
If this light comes on while driving or braking, be very hot. Allow time for these com- bar on the vehicle.
stop immediately and check the brake fluid ponents to cool before carrying out the • The jack must correctly engage the jack
level in the reservoir. inspection. attachment.
• Apply the parking brake and put the • Never allow any part of your body to be
NOTE gear selector in the Park (P) position. extended under a vehicle supported by
a jack.
Press the brake pedal hard and maintain • Block the wheels standing on the
pressure on the pedal – do not pump the ground, use rigid wooden blocks or
brakes. large stones. Brake lights
The brake lights come on automatically when
the brakes are applied.
WARNING
If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the Adaptive brake lights
reservoir or if a brake system message is The adaptive brake lights activate in the event
shown in the information display: DO NOT of sudden braking or if the ABS system is acti-
DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a trained vated. This function causes an additional tail-
and qualified Volvo service technician and light on each side of the vehicle to illuminate to
have the brake system inspected. help alert vehicles traveling behind.
The adaptive brake lights activate if:

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 121

 03 Your driving environment

Brakes

• The ABS system activates for more than brakes are needed, depress the pedal occa- (10 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate several
approximately a half second sionally when driving through rain, slush, etc. times and a sound may be audible from the
• In the event of sudden braking while the This will remove the water from the brakes. ABS control module, which is normal.
vehicle is moving at speeds above approx- Check that brake application feels normal. This
imately 6 mph (10 km/h) should also be done after washing or starting Cleaning the brake discs
in very damp or cold weather. Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs
When the vehicle has come to a stop, the brake may result in delayed brake function. This delay
03 lights and additional taillights remain on for as Severe strain on the brake system is minimized by cleaning the brake linings.
long as the brake pedal is depressed or until The brakes will be subject to severe strain
braking force on the vehicle is reduced. Cleaning the brake pads is advisable in wet
when driving in mountains or hilly areas, or
weather, prior to long-term parking, and after
Power brakes function only when the when towing a trailer. Vehicle speed is usually
the vehicle has been washed. Do this by brak-
slower, which means that the cooling of the
engine is running ing gently for a short period while the vehicle is
brakes is less efficient than when driving on
The power brakes utilize vacuum pressure moving.
level roads. To reduce the strain on the brakes,
which is only created when the engine is run-
shift into a lower gear and let the engine help Emergency Brake Assistance
ning. Never let the vehicle roll to a stop with the
with the braking. Do not forget that if you are EBA is designed to provide full brake effect
engine switched off.
towing a trailer, the brakes will be subjected to immediately in the event of sudden, hard brak-
If the power brakes are not working, consider- a greater than normal load. ing. The system is activated by the speed with
ably higher pressure will be required on the which the brake pedal is depressed.
brake pedal to compensate for the lack of Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
power assistance. This can happen for exam- The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) helps to When the EBA system is activated, the brake
ple when towing your vehicle or if the engine is improve vehicle control (stopping and steering) pedal will go down and pressure in the brake
switched off when the vehicle is rolling. The during severe braking conditions by limiting system immediately increases to the maximum
brake pedal feels harder than usual. brake lockup. When the system "senses" level. Maintain full pressure on the brake pedal
impending lockup, braking pressure is auto- in order to utilize the system completely. EBA
Water on brake discs and brake pads matically modulated in order to help prevent is automatically deactivated when the brake
affects braking lockup that could lead to a skid. pedal is released.
Driving in rain and slush or passing through an The system performs a brief self-diagnostic
automatic car wash can cause water to collect test when the engine has been started and
on the brake discs and pads. This will cause a driver releases the brake pedal. Another auto-
delay in braking effect when the pedal is matic test may be performed when the vehicle
depressed. To avoid such a delay when the first reaches a speed of approximately 6 mph

122
 03 Your driving environment

Brakes

NOTE Symbols in the instrument panel

• When the EBA system is activated, the Symbol Specification
brake pedal will go down and pressure
Steady glow – Check the brake
in the brake system immediately increa-
fluid level. If the level is low, fill
ses to the maximum level. You must
maintain full pressure on the brake with brake fluid and check for
pedal in order to utilize the system com- the cause of the brake fluid 03
pletely. There will be no braking effect if loss.
the pedal is released. EBA is automati-
Steady glow for two seconds
cally deactivated when the brake pedal
when the engine is started –
is released.
There was a fault in the brake
• When the vehicle has been parked for system's ABS function when
some time, the brake pedal may sink the engine was last running.
more than usual when the engine is
started. This is normal and the pedal will
return to its usual position when it is WARNING
released.
If and come on at the same time
and the brake level is below the MIN mark
in the reservoir or if a brake system-related
message is shown in the information dis-
play: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle
towed to a trained and qualified Volvo serv-
ice technician and have the brake system
inspected.

123
 03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

Electric parking brake Applying the electric parking brake NOTE

An electric parking brake has the same func-
tion as a manual parking brake.
• In an emergency the parking brake can
be applied when the vehicle is moving
by holding in the control. Braking will be
NOTE interrupted when the accelerator pedal
• A faint sound from the parking brake's is depressed or the control is released.
03
electric motor can be heard when the • An audible signal will sound during this
parking brake is being applied. This procedure if the vehicle is moving at
sound can also be heard during the speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).
automatic function check of the parking
brake.
Parking on a hill
• The brake pedal will move slightly when • If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the front
the electric parking brake is applied or Parking brake control wheels so that they point away from the
released. curb.
1. Press firmly on the brake pedal.
• If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn the
Low battery voltage 2. Push the control. front wheels so that they point toward the
If the battery voltage is too low, the parking > The symbol in the instrument curb.
brake cannot be applied or released. Connect panel flashes while the parking bake is The parking brake should also be applied.
an auxiliary battery if the battery voltage is too being applied, and glows steadily when
low, see page 116. the parking brake has been fully applied.
3. Release the brake pedal and ensure that
the vehicle is at a standstill.
4. When the vehicle is parked, the gear selec-
tor must be in position P.

124
 03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

Releasing the electric parking brake NOTE Symbols

• For safety reasons, the parking brake is Symbol Specification
only released automatically if the engine
Read the message in the infor-
is running and the driver is wearing a seat
mation display
belt.
• The electric parking brake will be A flashing symbol indicates that 03
released immediately when the acceler- the parking brake is being
ator pedal is pressed and the gear selec- applied. If the symbol flashes in
tor is in position D or R. any other situation then this
means that a fault has arisen.
2. Fasten the seat belt. Read the message on the infor-
mation display.
3. Move the gear selector to position D or R
Parking brake control
and press the accelerator pedal. The park- Messages
Manual release ing brake will release when the vehicle
1. Fasten the seat belt. begins to move.
2. Insert the remote key in the ignition slot and Heavy load uphill
press the START/STOP ENGINE button A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the
(or press the START/STOP ENGINE but- vehicle to roll backward when the parking
ton with a valid remote key in the passen- brake is released automatically on a steep
ger compartment on vehicles with the incline. To help avoid this:
optional keyless drive). 1. Keep the electric parking brake lever
3. Press firmly on the brake pedal. pushed in with the left hand while shifting
into Drive with the right.
4. Pull the parking brake control.
2. While pressing the throttle pedal to pull
Automatic release
away, release the parking brake lever only
1. Start the engine. Park brake not fully released – A fault is pre-
after the vehicle begins to move.
venting the parking brake from being released.
Try to apply the parking brake and release it
several times. If the problem persists, contact

125
 03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

an authorized Volvo workshop. If you drive off

with this error message showing, a warning
signal sounds.
Parking brake not applied – A fault is pre-
venting the parking brake from being applied.
Try to apply the parking brake and release it
03 several times. If the problem persists, contact
an authorized Volvo workshop. If you drive off
with this error message showing, a warning
signal sounds.
Parking brake Service required – A fault has
occurred. Try to apply and release. Contact a
Volvo workshop if the fault remains.

WARNING
If the vehicle must be parked before the fault
has been corrected, always put the gear
selector in P and turn the wheels so that
they point away from the curb if the vehicle
is pointing uphill or toward the curb if it is
pointing downhill.

126
03 Your driving environment

03

127
 Stability system..................................................................................... 130
Road sign information (RSI) ................................................................. 133
Cruise control........................................................................................ 135
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*............................................................ 137
Distance Alert* ..................................................................................... 148
City Safety™ ........................................................................................ 151
Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*...... 157
Driver Alert System* ............................................................................. 165
Park assist*........................................................................................... 171
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)* .......................................................... 175

G000000
Blind Spot Information System*............................................................ 179

128 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

DRIVER SUPPORT
 04 Driver support

Stability system

Introduction Spin control (SC) Operation

The Dynamic Stability and Traction Control The spin control function is designed to help
prevent the drive wheels from spinning while Sport mode
system (DSTC) consists of a number of func-
the vehicle is accelerating. The stability system is always activated and
tions designed to help reduce wheel spin,
cannot be switched off.
counteract skidding, and to generally help
improve directional stability. Corner Traction Control – CTC However, the driver can select Sport mode,
CTC compensates for understeering and helps which offers more active driving characteris-
provide additional stability when accelerating tics. In this mode, the engine management sys-
CAUTION through a curve by preventing the inside wheel tem monitors movement of the accelerator
A pulsating sound will be audible when the from spinning. This is particularly useful when pedal and steering wheel for sportier driving by
system is actively operating and is normal. accelerating on a curving highway on-ramp.
04 allowing more lateral movement of the rear
CTC is most effective if the stability system's wheels before DSTC is activated.
Traction control (TC) Sport mode is selected. See the section about Under certain circumstances, such as when
This function is designed to help reduce wheel Sport mode. driving with snow chains, or driving in deep
spin by transferring power from a drive wheel
Engine Drag Control (EDC) snow or loose sand, it may be advisable to
that begins to lose traction to the wheel on the
EDC helps keep the engine running if the temporarily use Sport mode for maximum
opposite side of the vehicle (on the same axle).
wheels show a tendency to lock, e.g., when tractive force.
TC is most active at low speeds.
shifting down in the Geartronic manual shifting If the driver releases pressure on the acceler-
This is one of DSTC's permanent functions and mode or while using the engine's braking func- ator pedal, DSTC will also activate to help sta-
cannot be switched off. tion on a slippery surface. If the engine were to bilize the vehicle.
stop, power steering would not function, mak-
Active Yaw Control (AYC) To switch to Sport mode:
ing the vehicle more difficult to steer.
This function helps maintain directional stabil- 1. Press the My Car button in the center con-
ity, for example when cornering, by braking Trailer Stability Assist – TSA* sole control panel and select My S60
one or more of the wheels if the vehicle shows Trailer Stability Assist helps stabilize a vehicle DSTC in the menu.
a tendency to skid or slide laterally. that is towing a trailer when the vehicle and
trailer have begun to sway. See page 266 for 2. Unselect the symbol and leave the menu
This is one of DSTC's permanent functions and
more information. by pressing EXIT.
cannot be switched off.
This system is automatically deactivated if the > This puts DSTC in Sport mode.
driver selects Sport mode. Sport mode remains active until the driver
switches it off in the menu or until the engine is

130 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 04 Driver support

Stability system

switched off. DSTC will return to normal mode

when the engine is restarted.

Symbols and messages in the main instrument panel

Symbol Message Description
DSTC Temporarily OFF The DSTC system function has been temporarily reduced due to high brake disc temperature. DSTC
reactivates automatically when the brakes have cooled.

DSTC Service required The DSTC system is not functioning properly.

• Stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine and restart it. 04
• If the message is still displayed when the engine has restarted, drive to an authorized Volvo work-
shop to have the system inspected.

"Message" Read the message in the information display

and

Steady glow for 2 secs. The system is performing a self-diagnostic test.

Flashing symbol DSTC is actively functioning to help counteract wheel spin and/or a skid.

- Sport mode has been activated.

``

131
 04 Driver support

Stability system

WARNING
The stability system is intended to help
improve driving safety. It supplements, but
can never replace, the driver's judgment
and responsibility when operating the vehi-
cle. Speed and driving style should always
be adapted to traffic and road conditions.

04

132
 04 Driver support

Road sign information (RSI)

Introduction Operation Displaying the speed limit indication can be

deactivated. To do so:
• Deselect the alternative in MY CAR
Settings Car settings Road Sign
Information or cancel by pressing EXIT.
Speed alert
The driver can opt to be alerted if the vehicle
exceeds the posted speed limit by more than
3 mph (5 km/h). The alert is given when the
symbol with the posted speed limit in the
instrument panel begins to flash. 04

To activate speed alert:

Examples of readable road signs Registered speed information
• Check the Speed alert box in MY CAR
Road Sign Information (RSI) is a feature that When RSI registers a road sign showing the Settings Car settings Speed alert
helps the driver see road signs with the posted speed limit, this sign is displayed as a symbol or cancel by pressing EXIT.
speed limit. on the instrument panel.
If the vehicle passes a sign showing the speed Settings in MY CAR Limitations
limit, this will be displayed in the center con- RSI's camera has the same limitations as the
sole. human eye. See page 161 for more informa-
tion about the camera's limitations.
WARNING
Signs that indirectly indicate the speed limit
RSI does not function in all situations and is (such as a sign with a town's name and the
only intended to provide supplementary permitted speed limit) will not be registered by
information.
RSI.
The driver is always responsible for operat-
ing the vehicle safely. Other factors that may interfere with RSI
include:
Possible settings in MY CAR
• Faded signs
• Signs located in a curve

133
 04 Driver support

Road sign information (RSI)

• Twisted or damaged signs

• Obstructed signs
• Signs that are partially covered by snow,
ice, etc.

04

134
 04 Driver support

Cruise control

Operation > The symbol illuminates and the text 2. Press or for approximately a half
(---) mph (5) indicates that cruise con- second and release the button to increase
trol is in standby mode. or decrease vehicle speed by approxi-
mately 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
NOTE
NOTE
• Putting cruise control in standby mode
does not set a cruising speed. • A temporary increase in speed by
• When cruise control is in standby mode, pressing the accelerator pedal, for less
the driver's seat belt must be fastened than 1 minute (e.g. when passing
before a cruising speed can be set. another car), does not affect the current
cruise control setting. The vehicle will 04
automatically return to the previously
Setting a speed set speed when the accelerator pedal is
Steering wheel-mounted controls and display Use the or buttons set the vehicle's cur- released.
Standby mode rent speed. The set speed is shown in the dis- • If one of the cruise control buttons is
play. kept depressed for more than approx.
Resume set speed
1 minute cruise control is disengaged.
Deactivating NOTE The engine must then be switched off in
order to reset cruise control.
Activate/set speed Cruise control cannot be engaged at
speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h).
Set speed indicator (parentheses indicate Automatic deactivation
standby mode) Cruise control is automatically deactivated
Adjusting the set speed
temporarily if one of the following occurs:
Engaging the cruise control function After a speed has been set, it can be increased
Before a speed can be set, the cruise control or decreased by using the or buttons. • If the speed drops below approximately
system must be engaged (put in standby 20 mph (30 km/h).
1. Press and hold down or until the
mode). • When the brake pedal is depressed.
vehicle reaches the desired speed.
– Press the symbol (1). • If the gear selector is moved to position N.
> This will become the set speed when the
button is released.

135
 04 Driver support

Cruise control

• During wheel spin or wheel lock-up. WARNING

• If the vehicle's speed is increased by using Cruise control should not be used in heavy
the accelerator pedal for more than traffic or when driving on wet or slippery
1 minute. roads. Cruise control may not maintain set
The currently set speed will be saved in the speed on steep downgrades.
system's memory.

Temporary deactivation
The driver can temporarily deactivate cruise
control by pressing 0. The saved speed is
04 shown in brackets in the information display.

Resume set speed

If cruise control has been deactivated tempo-
rarily, it can be reactivated by pressing . The
vehicle's speed returns to the most recently set
speed.

WARNING
There may be a significant increase in speed
after the button has been pressed.

Deactivation
Cruise control is disengaged by pressing or
by switching off the engine. The set speed is
cleared.

136
 04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

Introduction WARNING Function

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is an optional
system designed to assist the driver by main-
• Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover
all driving situations and traffic, weather
taining a set speed or a set time interval to the and road conditions. The "Function"
vehicle ahead. It is primarily intended for use section provides information about lim-
on long straight roads in steady traffic, such as itations that the driver must be aware of
on highways and other main roads. before using this feature.
When the driver has set the desired speed and • This system is designed to be a supple-
the time interval to the vehicle ahead, ACC mentary driving aid. It is not, however,
functions as follows: intended to replace the driver's atten-
tion and judgement. The driver is 04
• If there are no other vehicles in the lane responsible for maintaining a safe dis-
ahead of you, your vehicle will travel at the
tance and speed and must intervene if
set speed. Function overview1
Adaptive Cruise Control does not main-
• If ACC's radar sensor detects a slower tain a suitable speed or suitable dis- Warning light, braking by driver required
moving vehicle in the lane ahead, the sys- tance to the vehicle ahead.
tem will adapt your vehicle's speed to help Controls in steering wheel
maintain the set time interval to the vehicle • Maintenance of ACC components may
only be performed by a trained and Radar sensor in front grille
ahead. When there are no longer slower
qualified Volvo technician.
moving vehicles ahead, your vehicle will Adaptive Cruise Control consists of:
accelerate to resume the set speed.
If ACC is switched off completely or in standby
• A cruise control system to maintain a set
speed
mode and your vehicle comes too close to
another vehicle ahead, the driver will be • A system to maintain a set distance to the
warned by the Distance Alert system (see vehicle ahead, which is expressed as a
page 148). time interval. For example, you can choose
to remain approximately 2 seconds behind
the vehicle ahead. The actual distance
required to maintain a 2-second interval
will vary according the speed of the vehi-
cles.
1 The illustration is schematic; details will vary, depending on the model

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 137

 04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

WARNING WARNING WARNING

• Adaptive Cruise Control is not a colli- The brake pedal moves when the adaptive When Adaptive Cruise Control is in standby
sion avoidance system. The driver is cruise control system modulates the mode or is switched off completely, the
always responsible for applying the brakes. Do not rest your foot under the brakes will not be modulated automatically.
brakes if the system does not detect brake pedal. The driver must assume full control over the
another vehicle. vehicle.

• Adaptive Cruise Control does not react The ACC system is designed to smoothly reg-
to people or animals, or small vehicles ulate speed. However, the driver must apply Warning light—driver braking required
such as bicycles and motorcycles. It the brakes in situations that require immediate Adaptive Cruise Control can exert brake force
also does not react to slow moving, braking. This applies when there are great dif- that is equivalent to approximately 40% of the
04 parked or approaching vehicles, or sta- ferences in speed between vehicles, or if the vehicle's total braking capacity. In situations
tionary objects. vehicle ahead brakes suddenly. requiring more brake force than ACC can pro-
• Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in vide and if the driver does not apply the brakes,
demanding driving conditions such as WARNING an audible signal from the Collision Warning
city driving or other heavy traffic situa- system will sound and warning light will illumi-
Due to limitations in the radar sensor, brak- nate (see page 158) in the windshield to alert
tions, in slippery conditions, when there ing may occur unexpectedly or not at all,
is a great deal of water or slush on the see page 143. the driver to react.
road, during heavy rain or snow, in poor
visibility, on winding roads or on high- NOTE
way on- or off-ramps. Adaptive Cruise Control can be put in active
mode at any permitted speed. However, if the Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light
vehicle's speed falls below 18 mph (30 km/h) contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the
The distance to the vehicle ahead (in the same or if engine speed (rpm) becomes too low, ACC driver is not looking straight ahead may
lane) is monitored by a radar sensor. Your vehi- make the visual warning signal in the wind-
disengages (goes into standby mode) and will
cle's speed is regulated by accelerating and shield difficult to see.
no longer modulate the brakes2. The driver will
braking. The brakes may emit a sound when
then have to maintain a safe distance to the
they are being modulated by the adaptive
vehicle ahead.
cruise control system. This is normal.

2 Does not apply to vehicles with the optional Queue Assist. See page 141 for more information.

138 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

WARNING Operation Putting ACC in standby mode

Before ACC can be used to regulate speed
Adaptive Cruise Control only warns of vehi- and/or the distance to a vehicle ahead, it must
cles detected by the radar sensor, see
page 143. In some cases there may be no first be put in standby mode.
warning or the warning may be delayed. The To do so:
driver should always apply the brakes when
necessary. Press .
The symbol appears in the display and
Steep inclines and/or heavy loads parentheses (---) indicate that ACC is in
ACC is primarily intended for use on fairly level standby mode.
roads. The system may have difficulty main- 04
taining the correct distance to a vehicle ahead
NOTE
on steep inclines, if the vehicle is carrying a
heavy load or is towing a trailer. In these situa- Controls and display The driver's door must be closed and the
tions, the driver should always be prepared to Resume previous settings, increase speed driver's seat belt must be fastened before
apply the brakes if necessary. (each additional press increases speed by ACC can be put in active mode. If the driv-
er's seat belt is taken off or if the driver's
1 mph (approximately 2 km/h). door is opened, ACC will return to standby
Standby mode on/off mode.

Set time interval

Setting a speed
Put in active mode and set a speed Once ACC has been put in standby mode, use
Set speed (parentheses indicate standby the or buttons to store (set) the vehicle's
mode) current speed. This puts the system in active
mode. The set speed, for example 55 mph, is
Time interval while it is being set shown in the display.
Time interval after it has been set

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 139

 04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

When the symbol on the Setting a time interval

left side of the display The set time interval to vehicles ahead can be
changes to , the radar sen- increased by pressing and decreased by
sor has detected another pressing . The current time interval is shown
vehicle ahead. The distance briefly in the display following adjustment.
to a vehicle ahead is only
Different time intervals can be
regulated when this symbol ( ) is illumi- The number of bars indicating the selected
selected and are shown in the
nated. display as 1–5 horizontal bars. time interval are shown while the setting is
The greater the number of being made and for several seconds afterward.
Changing the set speed A smaller version of the symbol is then shown
bars, the longer the time inter-
04 After a speed has been set, it can be increased to the right in the display. The same symbol is
val. One bar represents a time
or decreased by using the or buttons. also displayed when Distance Alert is in active
interval of approximately
Each time one of these buttons is pressed, the 1 second; 5 bars is approximately 3 seconds. mode, see page 148 .
vehicle's speed changes by 5 mph At low speeds, when the distance to the vehicle
(approximately 8 km/h). Standby mode (temporary deactivation)
ahead is short, ACC increases the time interval
Press to temporarily deactivate cruise con-
When the system is in active mode, the but- slightly. In order to follow the vehicle ahead as
smoothly as possible, ACC allows the time trol (put it in standby mode). The set speed, for
ton has the same function as , but results in example 55 mph, is then shown in parenthe-
interval to vary considerably in certain situa-
a smaller increase in speed. ses.
tions.
The previously set speed and time interval are
NOTE
WARNING resumed by pressing .
• If one of the Adaptive Cruise Control
• Only use a time interval that is suitable
buttons is pressed for more than WARNING
in current traffic conditions.
approximately one minute, ACC will be
deactivated. The engine must then be • A short time interval gives the driver lim- There may be a significant increase in speed
switched off and restarted to reset ACC. ited reaction time if an unexpected sit- after the button has been pressed.
uation occurs in traffic.
• In some situations Adaptive Cruise
Control cannot be put in active mode. When ACC is in active mode, the vehicle’s
Cruise control Unavailable is shown speed increases by approximately 1 mph
in the display, see page 146. (1 km/h) each additional time is pressed.

140 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

Standby mode due to action by the driver vehicle's speed to the surrounding traffic and left turn signal, ACC can assist by accelerating
ACC is temporarily deactivated and put in regulate the distance to the vehicle ahead. briefly.
standby mode: An automatic switch to standby mode may be This function is active at speeds above approx-
• if the brakes are applied caused if: imately 45 mph (70 km/h).
• if the gear selector is moved to N • engine speed (rpm) is too high/low
WARNING
• if the driver drives at a speed higher than • the vehicle's speed goes below 18 mph
the set speed for more than 1 minute. (30 km/h)3 Please be aware that this function will also
In this happens, the driver will have to regulate cause the vehicle to accelerate briefly in
• the wheels lose traction certain situations other than passing
the vehicle's speed.
• brake temperature is high another vehicle, for example using the left
turn signal to indicate a lane change or a 04
NOTE • the radar sensor is obstructed by, for turn toward a highway exit at speeds above
example, wet snow or rain.
approximately 45 mph (70 km/h).
If the accelerator pedal is only depressed for
a short time, such as when passing another Resuming the set speed
vehicle, ACC is deactivated temporarily and If ACC is in standby mode, it can be reactivated Queue Assist
is reactivated when the pedal is released. by pressing the button on the steering Queue Assist is an added ACC feature that is
wheel keypad. The vehicle will return to the linked to your vehicle's automatic transmis-
Automatic standby mode most recently set speed. sion.
Adaptive cruise control is linked to other sys- Queue Assist consists of the following func-
tems such as the stability and traction control WARNING tions:
system (DSTC). If this system is not functioning
The vehicle may accelerate quickly after • Enhanced speed interval (including when
properly, adaptive cruise control is automati-
has been pressed if its current speed is the vehicle is at a complete stop or is mov-
cally deactivated and will go into standby
considerably lower than the set speed. ing at speed below 18 mph (30 km/h))
mode.
• Automatic standby mode when ACC
In the event of automatic deactivation, an audi- changes target vehicles
ble signal will sound and the message Cruise Passing another vehicle
control Cancelled is shown in the display. If your vehicle’s speed is being regulated by • No automatic braking when at a standstill
The driver must then intervene and adapt the ACC and the driver indicates that he/she would • The parking brake is applied automatically
like to pass the vehicle ahead by using the

3 Does not apply to vehicles equipped with the optional Queue Assist

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 141

 04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

Please note that the lowest speed that can be During short stops (less than approximately Automatic standby mode when ACC
set is 18 mph (30 km/h), although ACC can 3 seconds) in slow-moving traffic, your vehicle changes target vehicles
maintain a set speed/distance to a vehicle will begin moving again automatically as soon
ahead down to a standstill. Queue Assist con- as the vehicle ahead begins to move.
sists of the following features:
If it takes more than 3 seconds for the vehicle
Enhanced speed interval ahead to begin moving, ACC will be automati-
cally go into standby mode.
NOTE The driver will then have to reactivate ACC in
The driver's door must be closed and the one of the following ways:
driver's seat belt must be fastened before • By pressing
04 ACC can be put in active mode. If the driv-
If the vehicle ahead turns suddenly, there may be
er's seat belt is taken off or if the driver's • By accelerating up to at least 3 mph a stationary vehicle ahead
door is opened, ACC will return to standby (4 km/h). ACC will then resume following
mode. the vehicle ahead. The following only applies at speeds below
approximately 18 mph (30 km/h):
Your vehicle will then resume following the
Your vehicle can maintain the set time interval vehicle ahead at the set time interval. If ACC changes target vehicles (the vehicle that
to the vehicle ahead at any permissible speed, the radar sensor has detected) from a moving
including a complete stop. NOTE vehicle to a stationary one, the system will
In order to activate ACC at speeds below apply the brakes in your vehicle.
ACC can remain active and keep your vehi-
18 mph (30 km/h): cle at a standstill for up to 4 minutes. After
4 minutes have elapsed, the parking brake WARNING
• The vehicle ahead must be within a rea- will be engaged and ACC will go into
sonable distance (not farther away than At speeds above 18 mph (30 km/h), ACC
standby mode. will not react to a stationary vehicle and
approx. 100 ft/30 meters)
To reactivate ACC, the driver must release apply the brakes but will instead accelerate
• The lowest speed that can be selected is the parking brake (see page 125). to the previously set speed. The driver must
18 mph (30 km/h), although ACC will also actively apply the brakes to stop the vehicle.
help maintain the set time interval to the
vehicle ahead at lower speeds, including a
complete stop. ACC disengages and goes into standby mode
if:

142 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

• Your vehicle's speed goes below 10 mph • The driver opens the door or takes off WARNING
(15 km/h) and ACC cannot determine if the his/her seat belt
target object is a stationary vehicle or some Accessories or other objects, such as extra
• DSTC is put in Sport mode (see page 130) headlights, must not be installed in front of
other type of object such as e.g., a speed
bump. • ACC has kept the vehicle at a standstill for the grille.
more than 2 minutes Modification of the radar sensor could make
• Your vehicle's speed goes below 10 mph
(15 km/h) and the vehicle ahead turns so • The engine has been switched off its use illegal.
that ACC no longer has a target vehicle to • The brakes have overheated
follow. The radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles
Turning ACC off completely ahead is impeded:
No automatic braking when at a
• From standby mode, press once.
standstill • if the radar sensor is obstructed and can- 04
In certain situations, ACC will no longer apply • From active mode, press twice. not detect other vehicles, for example in
the brakes and go into standby mode while the The set speed and time interval are then heavy rain, or if snow or other objects are
vehicle is not moving. This means that the cleared from the system's memory and cannot obscuring the radar sensor.
driver will have to apply the brakes. be resumed by pressing .
This happens if: NOTE
Keep the area in front of the radar sensor
• The driver presses the brake pedal The radar sensor and its limitations
clean.
• The parking brake is activated In addition to being used by ACC, the radar
sensor is also used by Distance Alert (see
• The gear selected is moved to P,N or R • if the speed of vehicles ahead is signifi-
page 148) and Collision Warning with Full
• The driver presses the button to put Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection (see
cantly different from your own speed.
ACC in standby mode page 157). This sensor is designed to detect
The parking brake is applied cars or larger vehicles driving in the same
automatically direction as your vehicle, in the same lane.
In certain situations, ACC will apply the parking
brake in order to continue keeping the vehicle
at a standstill.
This happens if:

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 143

 04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

Situations where ACC may not function In curves, the radar sensor may detect the
optimally wrong vehicle or lose sight of the target
vehicle.
WARNING
WARNING
• The radar sensor has a limited field of
vision. In some situations it may detect • Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover
a vehicle later than expected or not all driving situations and traffic, weather
detect other vehicles at all. and road conditions. The "Function"
section provides information about lim-
• If ACC is not functioning properly,
itations that the driver must be aware of
cruise control will also be disabled.
04 before using this feature.
• This system is designed to be a supple-
mentary driving aid. It is not, however,
intended to replace the driver's atten-
tion and judgement. The driver is
responsible for maintaining a safe dis-
tance and speed and must intervene if
Adaptive Cruise Control does not main-
tain a suitable speed or suitable dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead.
Radar sensor's field of vision (shown in pink) • Maintenance of ACC components may
only be performed by a trained and
In certain situations, the radar sensor can- qualified Volvo technician.
not detect vehicles at close quarters, for
example a vehicle that suddenly enters the
lane between your vehicle and the target
vehicle.
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or
vehicles not driving in the center of the lane
may remain undetected.

144 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

WARNING Fault tracing and actions

If the message Radar blocked See manual is
• Adaptive Cruise Control is not a colli-
displayed, this means that the radar signals
sion avoidance system. The driver is
always responsible for applying the from the sensor have been obstructed and that
brakes if the system does not detect a vehicle ahead cannot be detected.
another vehicle. This, in turn, means that the functions of the
• Adaptive Cruise Control does not react ACC, Distance Alert, and Collision Warning
to people or animals, or small vehicles System with Auto-brake and Pedestrian
such as bicycles and motorcycles. It Detection will not function.
also does not react to slow moving,
The table lists possible causes for this mes-
parked or approaching vehicles, or sta- 04
sage being displayed, and suitable actions.
tionary objects.
• Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in
demanding driving conditions such as
city driving or other heavy traffic situa-
tions, in slippery conditions, when there
is a great deal of water or slush on the
road, during heavy rain or snow, in poor
visibility, on winding roads or on high-
way on- or off-ramps.

Cause Action
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some way. Clean the radar surface, or remove the object causing the obstruction.

Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals. No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the
radar.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 145

 04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

Cause Action
Swirling water or snow from the surface of the road may interfere with No action possible. A very wet or snow-covered road surface may affect
the radar signals. the function of the radar.

The surface of the radar is clean but the message remains in the display. Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that
it is no longer obstructed.

Symbols and messages in the display

04
Symbol Message Description
- Standby mode or active mode when no other vehicle has been detected.

- Active mode with a detected vehicle to which ACC is adapting speed/distance.

- Time interval while it is being set.

- Time interval after it has been set.

- Turn on DSTC to enable ACC cannot be put in active mode if the stability system DSTC is in Sport mode. Switch DSTC to
Cruise normal operating mode, see page 130 for more information.
ACC cannot be put in active mode if the stability system DSTC's Spin control is switched off. See
page 130 for more information.

- Cruise control Cancelled ACC has been automatically switched off.

The driver must regulate the vehicle’s speed/distance to the vehicle ahead.

146 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

Symbol Message Description

- Cruise control Unavailable ACC cannot be put in active mode. This may be due to:
• high brake temperature
• the radar sensor is obstructed (by heavy rain, snow, etc.)
Radar blocked See manual ACC has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and cannot
detect other vehicles.
See page 143 for information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

04
Cruise control Service ACC is not functioning.
required Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

Press Brake To hold + an The vehicle is at a standstill and ACC will release the brakes before the parking brake engages to keep
audible signal the vehicle stopped but a problem with the parking brake means that the vehicle may begin to roll.
The driver will have to apply the brakes. The message will remain in the display and the audible signal
will continue until the driver applies the brakes or presses the accelerator pedal.

– Below 20 mph Only follow- This is displayed if you try to activate ACC at speeds below approx. 18 mph (30 km/h) without a vehicle
ing ahead within range (approx. 100 ft/30 meters).

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 147

 04 Driver support

Distance Alert*

Introduction NOTE Depending on the optional equipment

Distance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Con- selected, there may not be room for a Distance
Distance Alert only monitors distance to the Alert button in the center console. In this case,
trol and is a function that provides information vehicle ahead while Adaptive Cruise Control
about the time interval to the vehicle ahead. the function is controlled through the menu
is in standby mode or off.
system. Press MY CAR and go to Settings
Distance Alert is active at speeds above
approximately 18 mph (30 km/h). Time interval Car settings Distance alert On/Off.
WARNING
information is only given for a vehicle that is
Distance Alert only indicates the distance to Setting a time interval
driving ahead of your vehicle in the same direc-
tion. No information is provided for vehicles the vehicle ahead. It does not affect the
driving toward you, moving very slowly, or at a speed of your vehicle.
04 standstill.
Operation

Controls and display

Time interval: Increase/decrease
Time interval: On, while it is being set
Amber warning light1.
Time interval: On, after it has been set
An amber warning light in the windshield glows Press the button in the center instrument panel
steadily if your vehicle is closer to the one Press to increase the interval or to
to switch this function on or off. The indicator
ahead than the set time interval. decrease it.
light in the button illuminates when the function
is on.

1 The illustration is schematic - certain details may vary from model to model

148 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 04 Driver support

Distance Alert*

Five different time intervals WARNING WARNING

can be selected and are
shown in the display as 1–5 Only use a time interval that is suitable in • Bad weather or winding roads may
horizontal bars. The greater current traffic conditions. affect the radar sensor’s capacity to
the number of bars, the longer detect vehicles ahead.
the time interval. One bar rep-
Limitations • The size of the vehicle ahead, such as a
resents approximately motorcycle, may also make it difficult to
1 second to the vehicle ahead; 5 bars is Distance Alert uses the same radar sensor detect. This may result in the warning
approximately 2.5 seconds. used by Adaptive Cruise Control and the Col- light illuminating at a shorter distance
lision Warning system. See page 143 for more than the one that has been set, or that
The number of bars indicating information on the radar sensor’s limitations. the light will not come on at all.
the selected time interval are 04
shown while the setting is NOTE
being made and for several
seconds afterward. A smaller Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light
version of the symbol is then contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the
driver is not looking straight ahead may
shown to the right in the dis-
make the visual warning signal in the wind-
play. The same symbol is displayed when shield difficult to see.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is activated.

NOTE
• The higher your vehicle’s speed, the
greater the distance to the vehicle
ahead, measured in feet (meters), for a
given time interval.
• The set time interval is also used by
Adaptive Cruise Control, see page 139.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 149

 04 Driver support

Distance Alert*

Symbols and messages in the display

Symbol Message Description
- Time interval while it is being set.

- Time interval after it has been set.

Radar blocked See manual Distance Alert has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and
cannot detect other vehicles. See page 143 for information on the radar sensor’s limitations.
04
Collision warn. Service Distance Alert or Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection is not functioning
required properly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

150 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 04 Driver support

City Safety™

Introduction means that the system cannot help the driver WARNING
City Safety™1 is a support system designed to in all situations.
help the driver avoid low speed collisions when
• City Safety™ only reacts to vehicles
City Safety™ should not be used to alter the traveling in the same direction as your
driving in slow-moving, stop-and-go traffic. way in which the driver operates the vehicle. vehicle and does not react to small vehi-
City Safety™ is not active if your vehicle’s The driver should never rely solely on this sys- cles, bicycles or motorcycles or to peo-
speed is below approximately 2 mph (4 km/h). tem to safely stop the vehicle. ple or animals.
This means that City Safety™ will not react if Normally, the occupants of the vehicle will not • City Safety™ is not activated when your
your vehicle approaches another vehicle at be aware of City Safety™ except when the vehicle is backing up.
very low speed, for example, when parking. system intervenes when a low-speed collision • City Safety™ functions at speeds up to
The function is active at speeds up to approx- is imminent. 30 mph (50 km/h). This system can help
prevent a collision if the difference in 04
imately 30 mph (50 km/h) and assists the driver If the vehicle is also equipped with the optional
by applying the brakes automatically, thereby Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and speed between your vehicle and the
avoiding or helping to reduce the effects of a Pedestrian Detection system, the two systems vehicle ahead is less than 9 mph
collision. (15 km/h). If the difference in speed is
interact. For more information about the Colli-
greater, a collision cannot be avoided
City Safety™ is designed to intervene as late sion Warning with Auto-brake system, see
but the speed at which the collision
as possible to help avoid unnecessary activa- page 157.
occurs can be reduced. The driver must
tion. apply the vehicle’s brakes for full brak-
WARNING ing effect.
City Safety™ triggers brief, forceful braking if a
low-speed collision is imminent. However, the • City Safety™ is a supplemental aid to • City Safety™ will not intervene in a
system will not intervene in situations where the driver. It can never replace the potential collision situation if the vehicle
the driver actively steers the vehicle or applies driver’s attention to traffic conditions or is being driven actively. The driver is
the brakes, even if a collision cannot be avoi- his/her responsibility for operating the always responsible for maintaining a
ded. This is done in order to always give the vehicle in a safe manner. safe distance to a vehicle or object
driver’s actions highest priority. • City Safety™ does not function in all ahead.
driving situations or in all traffic, weather
City Safety™ activates in situations where the
or road conditions.
driver has not applied the brakes in time, which

1 City Safety is a registered trademark of the Volvo Car Corporation

151
 04 Driver support

City Safety™

Function tion display to indicate that the system is/has Press My Car in the center console control
been active. panel and go to Settings Car settings
Driver support systems City Safety.
NOTE Select Off.
• When City Safety™ applies the brakes, If the engine is switched off, City Safety™ will
the brake lights will illuminate. reactivate when the engine is restarted.
• In cases where City Safety™ has stop-
ped the vehicle, the system will then WARNING
release the brakes. The driver must
apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at The laser sensor emits light when the igni-
04 a standstill. tion is in mode II or higher, even if City
Safety™ has been switched off.

Location of the laser sensor in the windshield2 Using City Safety™ To switch City Safety™ on again:
City Safety™ monitors traffic ahead of you • Follow the same procedure as for switch-
using a laser sensor mounted in the upper sec- NOTE ing City Safety™ off but select On.
tion of the windshield. If a collision is imminent, The City Safety™ function is activated auto-
City Safety™ will automatically apply the matically each time the engine has been
brakes, which may feel like hard braking. Limitations
switched off and restarted.
The sensor used by City Safety™ is designed
If the difference in speed between your vehicle to detect cars and other larger motor vehicles
and the vehicle ahead is more than approxi- On and Off ahead of your vehicle in both daylight and dark-
mately 9 mph (15 km/h), City Safety™ alone In certain situations, it may be desirable to ness.
cannot prevent a collision from taking place. switch City Safety™ off, such as when driving
The driver must apply the brakes to help avoid in close quarters where leaves, branches, etc.
a collision or reduce its effect. may obscure the hood and windshield.
When the function activates and applies the When the engine is running, City Safety™ can
brakes, a message will appear in the informa- be switched off as follows:

2 The illustration is schematic; details will vary, depending on the model

152
 04 Driver support

City Safety™

WARNING NOTE Cause Action

The laser sensor has certain limitations and • Keep the windshield in front of the laser The area of the Clean the wind-
its function may be reduced (or it may not sensor free of ice, snow, dirt, etc. See
function at all) in conditions such as heavy windshield in front of shield or remove the
page 152.
rain or snowfall, or by dense fog or thick, the sensor is dirty or ice/snow.
blowing dust or snow. Condensation, dirt, • Snow or ice on the hood deeper than covered by ice or
ice or snow on the windshield may also 2 inches (5 cm) may obstruct the sen- snow.
interfere with the sensor’s function. sor. Keep the hood free of ice and snow.
The laser sensor's Remove the
• Do not mount or in any way attach any-
thing on the windshield that could field of view is obstruction.
Objects such as warning flags hanging from
obstruct the laser sensor. obstructed.
long objects on the roof or accessories such as 04
auxiliary lights or protective arches on the front
of the vehicle that are higher than the hood may
also impede the sensor’s function. Troubleshooting
If Windscreen Sensors blocked appears in
Braking distance to the vehicle ahead increa- the information display, this indicates that the
ses on slippery road surfaces, which may City Safety™ laser sensor is obstructed in
reduce City Safety’s capacity to avoid a colli- some way and cannot detect vehicles ahead of
sion. In situations like this, the DSTC system you, which means that the system is not func-
(see page 130) will help provide the best pos- tioning.
sible braking capacity and stability.
However, this message will not be displayed in
City Safety™ emits a laser beam and measures all situations in which the sensor is obstructed.
the way in which the light is reflected. There- For this reason, the driver must ensure that the
fore, vehicles or objects with low-reflective sur- area of the windshield in front of the sensor is
faces may not be detected. Normally, the always kept clean.
license plate and taillight reflectors give the
rear section of a vehicle ahead sufficient reflec- The following table shows some of the situa-
tive surfaces to be detected. tions that can cause the message to be dis-
played and suggested actions.

153
 04 Driver support

City Safety™

CAUTION The laser sensor Maximum pulse energy 2.64 μJ

If a crack, scratch or stone chip should Maximum average output 45 mW
occur in the section of the windshield in
front the laser sensor, contact a trained and Pulse length 33 ns
qualified Volvo service technician to repair
or replace the windshield (see the illustra- Divergence (horizontal × verti- 28° × 12°
tion showing the location of the sensor on cal)
page 152). Failing to do so may result in
reduced City Safety™ functionality.
To help prevent reduced functionality, NOTE
please also observe the following: The function of aftermarket laser detectors
04
• Before the windshield is replaced, con- may be affected by City Safety's laser sen-
tact a Volvo retailer to ensure that the sor.
correct windshield is ordered and
The upper decal describes the laser beam's
installed. If the wrong type of windshield WARNING
classification and contains the following text:
is used, this may cause City Safety™ to
function improperly or not at all. Volvo Invisible Laser radiation – Do not view directly The laser sensor emits light when the igni-
recommends the use of only Genuine with optical instruments (magnifiers) – Class tion is in mode II or higher, even if City
Volvo Replacement Windshields. 1M laser product. Safety™ has been switched off.
• When replacing windshield wipers, use The lower decal describes the laser beam's
the same type or ones approved by physical data and contains the text:
Volvo.
IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies with
FDA performance standards for laser products
except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice
No. 50, dated July 26th, 2001
The laser beam's physical data is listed in the
following table:

154
 04 Driver support

City Safety™

WARNING Symbols and messages in the display

When City Safety™ automatically applies the
Eye injury may occur if any of the following
points are not followed: brakes, one or more of the symbols in the main
instrument panel may illuminate and its asso-
• It is essential that all pertinent instruc- ciated message will be displayed.
tions be followed when handling laser
instruments. Testing, repairing, remov- A text message can be erased by pressing
ing, adjusting and/or replacing any briefly on the OK button on the turn signal
components in the laser sensor may lever.
only be done by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.
04
• Do not remove the laser sensor (includ-
ing removal of the lenses). A laser sen-
sor that has been removed belongs to
laser class 3B according to standard
IEC 60825-1. Devices in laser class 3B
present a risk of injury to the eyes.
• The laser sensor’s connector must be
disconnected before the sensor is
removed from the windshield.
• The laser sensor must be mounted in
place on the windshield before con-
necting the sensor’s connector.
• Do not view the laser sensor (which
emits spreading, invisible laser beams)
with optical instruments from a distance
of less than 4 inches (100 mm).

155
 04 Driver support

City Safety™

Symbol Message Meaning/action required

Auto braking by City Safety City Safety™ is applying/has applied the brakes automatically.

Windscreen Sensors The laser sensor is temporarily not functioning due to an obstruction.
blocked
• Remove the obstruction and/or clean the windshield in front of the sensor(s).
04 For more information on the sensor’s limitations, see page 152.

City Safety Service required City Safety™ is not functioning.

• If this message remains in the display, have the system checked by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.

156
 04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

Introduction The system should not be used in such a way WARNING

Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and that the driver changes his/her way of operat-
Pedestrian Detection is designed to assist the ing the vehicle. If the driver relies entirely on the • Collision Warning does not work in all
system, the chances of an accident eventually driving, traffic, weather and road condi-
driver if there is a risk of a collision with a tions. It does not react to vehicles not
pedestrian, a vehicle ahead that is at a stand- occurring increase considerably.
traveling in the same direction as your
still or one that is moving in the same direction The Collision Warning and City Safety™ sys- vehicle.
as your vehicle. tems supplement each other. See page 151 for
detailed information about City Safety™.
• Collision Warning does not react to ani-
Collision Warning consists of the following mals.
three functions:
WARNING • Warnings are only provided when the
• Collision Warning warns the driver of a risk of collision is high. The "Function"
04
potential collision situation. No automatic system can be guaranteed to section provides information about lim-
function 100% correctly in all situations. For itations that the driver must be aware of
• Brake Support helps the driver brake effi- that reason, never test the Auto-brake sys- before using Collision Warning.
ciently in a critical situation. tem by driving toward a person or object.
• Auto-brake brakes the vehicle automati- This could result in serious injury or death. • Collision Warning will not provide a
warning or brake the vehicle for pedes-
cally if a collision with a pedestrian or
trians at speeds above 50 mph
another vehicle cannot be avoided and the
(80 km/h).
driver does not apply the brakes in time or
steer around the person/vehicle. Auto-
brake can help prevent a collision or
reduce the speed at which a collision
occurs.
Since Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake
and Pedestrian Detection is activated in cir-
cumstances where the driver should have
begun braking much sooner, the system will
not be able to assist the driver in all situations.
This system is designed to activate as late as
possible to help avoid unnecessary interven-
tion.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 157

 04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

WARNING Function Brake Support

If the risk of collision continues to increase after
• Collision Warning will not provide a the collision warning has been given, Brake
warning or brake the vehicle for pedes- Support is activated. Brake Support prepares
trians in darkness or in tunnels, even if
the brake system to react quickly, and the
there is street lighting in the area.
brakes are applied slightly. This may be expe-
• The auto-brake function can help pre- rienced as a light tug.
vent a collision or reduce the speed at
impact but the driver should always If the brakes are applied quickly, full braking
apply the brakes for the best possible effect will be provided. Brake Support also
braking effect, even if auto-brake is increases brake force if the system determines
04 actively applying the brakes. that the driver has not applied adequate pres-
sure on the brake pedal.
• Never wait for a collision warning. This
system is designed to be a supplemen- Auto-brake
Function overview
tary driving aid. It is not, however,
Audio-visual warning signals, collision risk If a collision is imminent and the driver has not
intended to replace the driver's atten-
applied the brakes or begun to steer around the
tion and judgement. The driver is
Radar sensor vehicle or pedestrian, the auto-brake function
responsible for maintaining a safe dis-
tance and speed, even when the colli- is activated without the driver pressing the
Camera
sion warning system is in use. brake pedal. Full brake force is applied to help
reduce the vehicle’s speed when the collision
• Maintenance of the Collision Warning Collision Warning occurs or limited brake force is applied if this
system's components must only be The radar sensor and the camera work is sufficient to avoid the collision.
performed by a trained and qualified together to detect a pedestrian, stationary
Volvo technician. vehicles and vehicles that are moving in the
same direction as your vehicle. If there is a risk
NOTE
of collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian, the The auto-brake and brake support functions
driver is alerted by a flashing red warning light are always on and cannot be turned off.
and an audible warning signal. Collision warn-
ing is active at speeds above 3 mph (4 km/h).

158 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

Operation console control panel and going to Settings NOTE

Settings are made by pressing MY CAR on the Car settings Driver support systems
center console control panel and using the Warning sound if risk of collision.
• When Adaptive Cruise Control is used,
the warning light and signal will be used
menus displayed. by that function, even if the warnings
Setting a warning distance
Activating/deactivating both warning provided by Collision Warning have
This setting determines the distance at which been deactivated by the driver.
signals the visual and audible warnings are triggered.
To switch Collision Warning's audible and vis- Select Long, Normal or Short by pressing MY • In situations where traffic is moving at
ual signals on or off at the same time, press CAR on the center console control panel and considerably different speeds, or if the
MY CAR on the center console control panel vehicle ahead brakes suddenly, warn-
going to Settings Car settings Driver ings may be considered to be late, even
and go to Settings Car settings Driver support systems Collision Warning 04
if the setting Long has been selected.
support systems Collision Warning. If Warning distance.
Collision Warning is on, the system will perform
The warning distance determines the level of Checking settings
a self-test each time the engine is started by
sensitivity used by the system. The warning The current Collision Warning settings can be
briefly illuminating the warning light. See page
distance Long provides an earlier warning. checked by pressing MY CAR on the center
189 for a description of the menu system.
Begin by using Long and if the system gives console control panel and going to Settings
When the engine is switched on, the Collision too many warnings, try changing to Normal. Car settings Driver support systems
Warning setting that was being used when it
Collision Warning.
was switched off will be the default setting. WARNING
NOTE • The setting Short should only be used Limitations
in situations where traffic is light and
The auto-brake and pedestrian detection Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light con-
moving at low speeds.
features are always on, even if the audible trasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is
and visual warning signals have been deac- • Collision Warning alerts the driver to the not looking straight ahead may make the visual
tivated. risk of a collision but this function can- warning signal in the windshield difficult to see.
not reduce the driver’s reaction time. For this reason, always activate the audible
Activating/deactivating the audible • For Collision Warning to be as effective warning signal.
as possible, it is recommended that Dis-
warning signal only Slippery driving conditions increase braking
tance Alert be set to 4 or 5, see
The audible warning signal can be activated/ distance, which can reduce the system's
page 148.
deactivated by pressing MY CAR on the center

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 159

 04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

capacity to avoid a collision. In these condi- WARNING NOTE

tions, the ABS and DSTC systems provide the
best possible braking effect while helping to • In certain situations, the system cannot If warnings are given too frequently, the
maintain stability. provide warnings or warnings may be warning distance can be reduced (see
delayed if traffic conditions or other page 159). This causes the system to pro-
external factors make it impossible for vide later warnings, which decreases the
NOTE the radar sensor or camera to detect a total number of warnings provided.
The visual warning signal may be temporar- pedestrian or a vehicle ahead.
ily disengaged in the event of high passen- • Warnings may not be provided if the WARNING
ger compartment temperature due to strong distance to the vehicle ahead is short,
sunlight, etc. If this occurs, the audible
or if movements of the steering wheel/ • The system is not activated at speeds
warning signal will be used, even if it has under approx. 2 mph (4 km/h). There-
04 brake pedal are great, such as during
been deactivated in the menu system. fore, it will not brake your vehicle if you
active driving.
approach a vehicle ahead at very low
• The sensor system has a limited range speed, such as when parking.
for pedestrians and provides warnings
and braking effect most effectively at • The driver's actions always have high-
speeds up to 30 mph (50 km/h). For sta- est priority and override the Collision
tionary or slow-moving vehicles, the Warning system. This means that the
system functions best if your vehicle’s system will not intervene in situations
speed is below approximately 45 mph where the driver is actively steering,
(70 km/h). braking or pressing the accelerator
pedal, even if a collision is imminent.
• Warnings for stationary or slow-moving
vehicles may not be provided in dark • When Auto-brake has prevented a col-
conditions or in poor visibility. lision with a stationary object, your vehi-
cle will remain at a standstill for approx.
1.5 seconds. If your vehicle has been
The Collision Warning system uses the same braked for a moving vehicle ahead, your
radar sensors as Adaptive Cruise Control. For vehicle's speed will be reduced to the
more information on the radar sensor and its same speed as that vehicle's.
limitations, see page 143.

160 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

The camera’s limitations WARNING Pedestrians

The camera is used by Collision Warning with
Auto-brake, Driver Alert Control (see • The camera has the same limitations as
page 165), and Lane Departure Warning (see the human eye. In other words, its
“vision is impaired” by adverse weather
page 168).
conditions such as heavy snowfall,
dense fog, etc. These conditions may
NOTE reduce the function of systems that
• To help protect the camera in very hot depend on the camera or cause these
conditions, it may be temporarily systems to temporarily stop function-
switched off for approximately 15 ing.
minutes after the engine has been • Never place any objects, decals, etc., 04
started. on the windshield in front of the camera.
• Keep the section of the windshield in This could reduce or block the camera’s
function, and could cause one or more The system cannot identify all pedestrians
front of the camera clean and free of ice,
snow, or condensation. of the systems that utilize the camera to The Collision Warning system can only identify
stop functioning. and detect a pedestrian who is standing
• Strong sunlight, reflections from the upright. This person can be standing still, walk-
road surface, ice or snow covering the ing or running.
road, a dirty road surface, or unclear This means that the system has to be able to
lane marker lines may drastically reduce identify a person's head, arms, shoulders, legs,
the camera’s capacity to detect the side
the upper and lower parts of the body and a
of a lane, a pedestrian or another vehi-
person's pattern of movement when walking or
cle.
running.
If parts of the body are not visible to the cam-
era, the system cannot detect the pedestrian.
The following conditions apply:
• In order to detect a pedestrian, the system
must have a full view of the person's entire

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 161

 04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

body and the person must be at least Fault tracing and actions
32 in. (80 cm) tall. If the message Windscreen Sensors
• The system cannot detect a pedestrian blocked is displayed, this means that the cam-
carrying a large object. era is obscured and cannot detect pedestrians,
• The camera's capacity to see a pedestrian vehicles or road marker lines in front of the
at dawn or dusk is limited, much as it is for vehicle.
the human eye. This, in turn, means that Collision Warning with
• The camera's function is deactivated and Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection,
will not detect a pedestrian in darkness or Lane Departure Warning, and Driver Alert Con-
in tunnels, even if there is street lighting in trol will not have full functionality.
04 the area.
The table lists possible causes for this mes-
sage being displayed, and suitable actions.
WARNING
• Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake
and Pedestrian Detection is designed to
be a supplementary driving aid. It is not,
however, intended to replace the driv-
er's attention and judgement. The driver
is always responsible for operating the
vehicle in a safe manner.
• The system cannot detect all pedes-
trians in all situations, such as in dark-
ness/at night and cannot detect parti-
ally hidden pedestrians, people who are
less than approx. 32 in. (80 cm) tall, or
people wearing clothing that obscures
the contours of their bodies.

162 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

Cause Action
The surface of the windshield in front of the camera is dirty or covered Clean or clear the section of the windshield in front of the camera.
with ice or snow.

Fog, heavy rain or snow is interfering with the function of the camera. No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the
camera.

The surface of the windshield is clean but the message remains in the Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the camera to register
display. visibility.

The surface between the inside of the windshield and the camera is dirty. Contact an authorized Volvo retailer or service technician to have this
04
surface cleaned.

Symbols and messages in the display

Symbol Message Description
Collision Warning Off Collision Warning is switched off. This message is displayed when the engine is started and will dis-
appear after approx. 5 seconds. It can also be erased by pressing the OK button.

Collision Warning Unavail- Collision Warning cannot be activated. This message is displayed when the driver attempts to activate
able the function. It will disappear after approx. 5 seconds or can be erased by pressing the OK button.

Auto braking was acti- Auto-braking has been active. This message can be erased by pressing the OK button.
vated

Windscreen Sensors The camera is temporarily not functioning. This message is displayed if the camera is obstructed by
blocked snow, ice, dirt, etc., on the windshield. Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera, see
page 161 for more information on the camera’s limitations.

``

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 163

 04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

Symbol Message Description

Radar blocked See man- Collision Warning and Auto-brake are temporarily not functioning. The radar sensor is blocked, for
ual example by heavy rain or snow that has accumulated in front of the sensor, and cannot detect other
vehicles, see page 143 for more information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

Collision warn. Service Collision Warning and Auto-brake are partially or completely not functioning.
required Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message remains in the display.

04

164 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 04 Driver support

Driver Alert System*

Introduction Driver Alert Control (DAC)– DAC is designed to help detect a slowly chang-
The Driver Alert System is designed to help a introduction ing driving pattern. It is primarily intended to be
driver who may be becoming fatigued or who used on main roads and is not meant for use in
is inadvertently leaving the lane. city traffic.

The Driver Alert System consists of two differ-

WARNING
ent functions that can be switched on together
or separately. • DAC is not intended to extend the dura-
tion of driving. Always plan breaks at
• Driver Alert Control (DAC) regular intervals to help remain alert.
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW), see • In certain cases, fatigue may not affect
page 168 04
the driver’s behavior. In situations of
When one or both of the functions has been this type, no warning will be provided.
switched on, it is in standby mode and is acti- Therefore, it is important to take breaks
vated when the vehicle exceeds a speed of at regular intervals, regardless of
40 mph (65 km/h). This function is intended to alert the driver if whether or not DAC has given a warn-
his/her driving becomes erratic, such as if the ing.
The function deactivates if the vehicle's speed
goes under 37 mph (60 km/h). driver is distracted or fatigued.
Limitations
Both functions use a camera that is dependent
on the road/lane being clearly marked by pain-
NOTE In certain situations, DAC may provide warn-
ings even if the driver’s driving pattern has not
ted lines on each side. The camera has certain limitations, see
page 143. become erratic.

WARNING • if the driver is testing the LDW function

The Driver Alert System does not function in A camera monitors the painted lines marking • in strong crosswinds
all situations and is designed to be a sup- the lane in which the vehicle is traveling and • on grooved road surfaces.
plementary aid. It is not, however, intended compares the direction of the road with the
to replace the driver’s attention and judge- driver’s movements of the steering wheel. The
ment. driver is alerted if the vehicle does not follow
the lane smoothly.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 165

 04 Driver support

Driver Alert System*

Operating DAC Thumb wheel. Turn this wheel until Driver If the vehicle is being driven erratically, the
Certain settings can be made from the menu Alert is displayed. The second line shows driver will be alerted by an audible signal and
system controlled from the center instrument the alternatives Off Driver Alert Standby the message Driver Alert, Time for a break is
panel. <40 mph (Driver Alert Standby <65 km/ displayed. The warning will be repeated after a
h), Unavailable or the level ( number of short time if the driving pattern remains the
The current system status can be checked on same.
bars) will be displayed.
the trip computer’s display by using the but-
tons on the left steering wheel lever. OK button. Confirms and erases a mes-
sage in the display. WARNING

Activating DAC
• An alert should be taken seriously since
it is sometimes difficult for a driver to
04 Press MY CAR in the center instrument panel realize that he/she is fatigued.
and go to Car settings Driver Alert and
• In the event of a warning or if the driver
select On. See page 189 for more information feels fatigued, stop as soon as possible
on the menu system. in a safe place and rest.
The function is activated when the
vehicle exceeds a speed of 40 mph
(65 km/h). The display will show level
markings of 1–5 bars, where a low
number of bars indicates erratic driving. A high
number of bars indicates stable driving.

166 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 04 Driver support

Driver Alert System*

Symbols and messages in the display

Symbol Message Description
- Driver Alert OFF The function is not switched on.

- Driver Alert Standby <40 The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph (65 km/h).
mph (Driver Alert Standby
<65 km/h)
- Driver Alert Unavailable The road lacks clear marker lines.

Driver Alert The function is analyzing the driver’s driving pattern. The number of bars varies from 1–5, where a low 04
number of bars indicates erratic driving. A high number of bars indicates stable driving.

Driver Alert Time for a The vehicle has been driven erratically. The driver receives an audible signal and a text message.
break

Windscreen Sensors The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the area
blocked of the windshield in front of the camera. See page 161 for information on the camera’s limitations.

Driver Alert Sys Service The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message
required remains in the display.

``

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 167

 04 Driver support

Driver Alert System*

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)– Operation and function and Driver Alert Standby <40 mph will be
introduction displayed.
If the camera can no longer monitor the road’s
side marker lines, Lane Depart Warn
Unavailable will be displayed.
If the vehicle unexpectedly crosses the lane’s
left or right side marker lines, the driver will be
alerted by an audible signal.
No warning signal will be given in the follow-
04 ing situations:
• The turn signal is being used
• The driver’s foot is on the brake pedal1
LDW can be switched on or off by pressing the
This function is designed to help reduce the button on the center console. A light in the but- • The throttle pedal is pressed quickly1
risk of accidents in situations where the vehicle ton illuminates when the function is on. • If the steering wheel is moved quickly1
leaves its lane and there is a risk of driving off • In sharp turns that cause the vehicle’s
The trip computer display shows Lane Depart
the road or into the opposite lane. LDW con- body to sway
Warn Standby <40 mph (Lane Depart Warn
sists of a camera that monitors the lane’s side See page 161 for information on the camera’s
Standby <65 km/h) when the function is in
marker lines. The driver is alerted by an audible limitations.
standby mode.
signal if the vehicle crosses a side marker line
or the road’s center dividing line. When LDW is in standby mode, the function is
activated automatically after the camera has WARNING
monitored the road’s side marker lines and the The driver will only be warned once for each
vehicle’s speed exceeds 40 mph (65 km/h). time the wheels cross a marker line. No
Lane Depart Warn Unavailable will be dis- alarm will be given if a marker line is
played. between the wheels.

If the vehicle’s speed falls below 37 mph

(60 km/h), LDW will return to standby mode

1 When Increased sensitivity has been selected, a warning will be issued if a side marker line is crossed in this situation.

168 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 04 Driver support

Driver Alert System*

Settings the system will be in the mode that it was in

Settings for Lane Departure Warning can be when the engine was switched off.
made in the menu system by pressing My Increased sensitivity: This selection increa-
Car. Go to Settings Car settings Driver ses the function’s sensitivity. Warnings will be
support systems Lane Departure given at an earlier stage and fewer limitations
Warning. apply. When this setting is being used, the sys-
tem only needs to monitor lane marker lines on
There are two alternatives: one side of the vehicle to change status to
On at start-up: This selection switches LDW Lane Depart Warn Available.
on each time the engine is started. Otherwise,
04

Symbols and messages in the display

Symbol Message Description
Lane departure warning ON/Lane The function is switched on or off. The text disappears after 5 seconds.
departure warning OFF

- Lane Depart Warn Available The function is monitoring the road’s marker lines.

- Lane Depart Warn Standby <40 The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph
mph (Lane Depart Warn Standby (65 km/h).
<65 km/h)
- Lane Depart Warn Unavailable The road lacks clear marker lines.

``

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 169

 04 Driver support

Driver Alert System*

Symbol Message Description

Windscreen Sensors blocked The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean
the area of the windshield in front of the camera. See page 161 for information on the camera’s
limitations.

Driver Alert Sys Service required The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the
message remains in the display.

04

170 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 04 Driver support

Park assist*

Introduction Function Activating/deactivating

The park assist system is designed to assist The system is activated automatically when the
you when driving into parking spaces, garages, vehicle is started.
etc. It utilizes ultrasound sensors in the front – Press the Park assist button on the center
bumper and rear bumper(s) to measure the dis- console to temporarily deactivate the sys-
tance to a vehicle or an object that may be tem(s).
close to the front or rear of your vehicle. An
> The indicator light in the button will go
audible signal and symbols in the audio sys-
out when the system has been deacti-
tem’s display indicate the distance to the
vated.
object.
Park assist will be automatically reactivated the 04
NOTE next time the engine is started, or if the button
is pressed (the indicator light in the button will
A trailer hitch whose wiring is integrated illuminate).
Park assist button
with the vehicle's electrical system will be
included in the measurement of the availa- The system is activated automatically when the
ble space behind the vehicle. vehicle is started. The indicator light in the but- NOTE
ton in the center console illuminates when the Park assist is disengaged automatically
system is on. when the parking brake is applied.
WARNING
Park Assist is an information system, NOT a • The front park assist system is active from
safety system. This system is designed to the time the engine is started until the vehi-
be a supplementary aid when parking the cle exceeds a speed of approximately
vehicle. It is not, however, intended to 10 mph (15 km/h). It is also active when the
replace the driver's attention and judge- vehicle is backing up.
ment. • Rear park assist is active when the engine
is running and reverse gear has been
selected.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 171

 04 Driver support

Park assist*

Signals from the park assist system Audible signal Rear park assist
The Park Assist system uses an intermittent
tone that pulses faster as you come close to an
object, and becomes constant when you are
within approximately 1 ft (30 cm) of an object
in front of or behind the vehicle. If there are
objects within this distance both behind and in
front of the vehicle, the tone alternates
between front and rear speakers.

04 NOTE
The level of the audible signal can be low-
ered/raised with the infotainment volume
View in the display (warning for objects front left/ control. The level can also be set in the MY The distance monitored behind the vehicle is
right rear) CAR menu system. See page 189 for a approximately 5 ft (1.5 m). The audible signal
description of the menu system.
Visual indicator comes from the rear speakers.
The audio system’s display gives an overview The system must be deactivated when towing
of the vehicle’s position in relation to a If the volume of another source from the audio
system is high, this will be automatically low- a trailer, carrying bicycles in a rear-mounted
detected object. carrier, etc, which could trigger the rear park
ered.
The marked sectors in the display indicate that assist system's sensors.
one or more of the sensors has detected an
object. The closer the car symbol comes to a NOTE
sector, the closer the vehicle is to the object.
Rear park assist is deactivated automati-
If the infotainment system is switched off, the cally when towing a trailer if Volvo genuine
park assist system will not be able to provide a trailer wiring is used.
visual indicator. An audible signal will still be
provided.

172 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 04 Driver support

Park assist*

Front park assist Faults in the system Cleaning the sensors

If the information symbol illuminates and Park
assist syst Service required is shown on the
information display, this indicates that the sys-
tem is not functioning properly and has been
disengaged. Consult a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.

CAUTION
In certain circumstances, the park assist
system may give unexpected warning sig- 04
nals that can be caused by external sound
sources that use the same ultrasound fre-
quencies as the system. This may include Location of the front sensors
The distance monitored in front of the vehicle
is approximately 2.5 ft (0.8 m). The audible sig- such things as the horns of other vehicles,
wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes,
nal comes from the audio system's front motorcycle exhaust pipes, etc. This does
speakers. not indicate a fault in the system.
It may not be possible to combine auxiliary
headlights and front park assist since these
lights could trigger the system's sensors.

NOTE
Front park assist is deactivated when the
parking brake is applied and or when the
gear selector is in the P position.
Location of the rear sensors
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to
ensure that they work properly. Clean them

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 173

 04 Driver support

Park assist*

with water and a suitable car washing deter-

gent.
Ice and snow covering the sensors may cause
incorrect warning signals.

NOTE
If the sensors are obstructed by e.g., dirt,
snow, or ice, this could result in false warn-
ing signals from the park assist system.

04

174 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 04 Driver support

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*

Introduction Function Ambient lighting conditions

The Park Assist Camera uses the display in the The camera automatically monitors the ambi-
center console to show the area behind the car ent lighting conditions behind the vehicle and
while you are backing up. constantly adjusts sensitivity to light. This may
cause the brightness and quality of the image
PAC also shows guiding lines in the on-screen on the screen to vary slightly. Sensitivity to light
image to indicate the direction that the vehicle is increased in dark conditions or in bad
will take as it moves rearward, which helps weather, which may affect image quality.
simplify parallel parking, backing into a tight
space or when attaching a trailer to the vehicle. If the image on the screen seems too dark,
brightness can be increased with the thumb
NOTE wheel on the lighting panel. 04

A trailer hitch whose wiring is integrated

with the vehicle's electrical system will be
NOTE
included in the measurement of the availa- The driver sees what is behind the vehicle and In order to function properly, the camera
ble space behind the vehicle. if a person or animal should suddenly appear lens should always be kept clean. This is
from the side. particularly important in bad weather. Keep
the lens free of dirt, ice or snow.
WARNING PAC is mounted on the rear of the trunk lid,
near the opening handle.
• PAC is designed to be a supplementary
aid when parking the vehicle. It is not, The camera has built-in electronics that help
however, intended to replace the reduce the “fish-eye” effect so that the image
driver’s attention and judgment. shown on the screen is as natural as possible.
This may cause some objects on the screen to
• The camera has blind spots where it
cannot detect objects or people behind “lean,” which is normal.
the vehicle.
WARNING
• Pay particular attention to people or ani-
mals that are close to the vehicle. Objects seen on the screen may be closer
than they appear to be.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 175

 04 Driver support

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*

Using PAC With the camera zoomed in on the trailer hitch, Guiding lines
a guiding line showing the hitch's path toward
Activation the trailer will be projected. This feature can be
activated in the MY CAR menu. See page
189 for a description of the menu system. The
guiding lines for the wheels (see the following
section "Guiding lines") and for the trailer hitch
cannot be displayed at the same time.
If the camera shows an enlarged (zoomed)
image, turn TUNE counterclockwise, or press
04 EXIT, CAM or OK to return to a normal view.

Deactivation
Move the gear selector from R to another posi-
The lines on the screen are projected as if they
tion. There is a slight delay in the PAC system,
were a path on the ground behind the vehicle
PAC is activated when the gear selector is which means that the view from behind the
and are affected by the way in which the steer-
moved to R if the system is selected in the MY vehicle will remain on the screen for approxi-
ing wheel is turned. This enables the driver to
CAR menu system or by pressing the CAM mately 15 seconds after the gear selector has
see path the vehicle will take, even if he/she
button in the center console. See page 189 for been moved from the R position or until the
turns the steering wheel while backing up.
a description of the menu system. vehicle reaches a forward speed of 6 mph
(10 km/h). The screen will then revert to the
If the Volvo Navigation System (VNS) is in use, mode that it was in before R was selected and NOTE
PAC will automatically override the navigation will, for example, display navigation system When backing up with a trailer, the guiding
system to show the camera's image on the information. lines show the path that the vehicle will
screen instead of navigation information, for as take, not the trailer.
long as reverse gear is selected.
NOTE
Zoom If any button on the center console control
The camera can be useful when attaching a panel is pressed, the camera image will dis-
trailer. Press CAM to zoom in on the trailer appear from the display. Pressing CAM will
hitch (and press this button again to return to return the camera image to the display.
the normal camera view).

176 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 04 Driver support

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*

WARNING The dashed line (2) indicates the clear zone of The markers change color (from yellow to
approximately 5 feet (1.5 m) behind the orange to red) as the vehicle comes closer to
Keep in mind that the image on the screen bumper. These lines also indicate the outmost the object.
only shows the area behind the vehicle. The limits that any object (door mirrors, corners of
driver must always watch for people, ani-
mals, other vehicles, etc., near the sides of the body, etc.) extends out from the vehicle , Marker (color) Distance to
the vehicle when turning while backing up. even when the it turns. object
The "wheel tracks" (3) between the side marker
Yellow more than 5 ft (1.5 m)
Marker lines lines show where the wheels will roll and can
extend up to approximately 10.5 ft (3.2 m) Orange 5–1 ft (0.3–1.5 m)
behind the bumper if there are no objects in the
way. Red 0–1 ft (0–0.3 m) 04

Vehicles equipped with Park Assist Settings

Press OK/MENU when a normal camera view
is displayed and make the desired settings.
Parking camera settings
• Mark Guide lines to display the sidelines
while backing up.
• Mark Distance bars to display the inter-
secting lines while backing up.
The PAC system's lines
Activating the system
Marker line for a 1-foot (30-centimeter)
zone behind the vehicle
• Mark Automatic activation of rear
camera to activate PAC each time reverse
Marker line for the clear back-up zone gear is selected.
Colored fields (4-one per sensor) indicate distance
"Wheel tracks" • Mark Off to turn off PAC completely.
If the vehicle is equipped with the optional Park
The solid line (1) indicates a zone within 1 ft Assist system, the distance to an object will be Summary
(30 centimeters) of the rear bumper. indicated more exactly and colored markers in • The camera is activated when the gear
the display indicate which of the sensor(s) has selector is moved to R (this can be
detected the object. changed in the MY CAR menu) and the

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 177

 04 Driver support

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*

image is shown on the center console dis- R. This setting can be changed in the in MY
play. CAR menu.
• When backing up, two solid lines are pro- • If there are two cameras installed on the
jected on the screen to show the path that vehicle*, to switch between cameras, turn
the vehicle's rear wheels will take. These TUNE (at least one of the cameras has to
lines are affected by movements of the be active), press CAM repeatedly or use
steering wheel. The vehicle's approximate the center console controls. If the front
outer dimension are shown by two dashed camera is on, it overrides the optional park
lines. assist system's visual indicator but there
• The graphic lines will not be displayed will still be an audible signal.
when backing up with a trailer that is con-
04
nected to the vehicle's electrical system. Limitations
• Objects on the ground that are closer than Even if a fairly small section of the screen image
1 ft (30 centimeters) cannot be detected by appears to be obstructed, this may mean that
the camera. a relatively large area behind the vehicle is hid-
• The camera is active for approx. den and objects there may not be detected
5 seconds after the gear selector is moved until they are very near the vehicle.
to R or until the vehicle's speed exceeds
6 mph (10 km/h). NOTE
• The optional Park Assist sensors and the Bicycle carriers or other accessories moun-
parking camera work together and infor- ted on the trunk may obstruct the camera's
mation from the sensors is shown graphi- field of view.
cally on the display.
• The graphic lines shown on the screen Keep in mind
when the vehicle backs up can be disabled
in the settings menu.
• Keep the camera's lens free of dirt, ice and
snow. Remove ice and snow carefully to
• Manual zoom can be selected in the MY avoid scratching the lens.
CAR menu.
• Clean the lens regularly with warm water
• The system can be switched off by press- and a suitable car washing detergent.
ing CAM. By default, the system is acti-
vated when the gear selector is moved to

178 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 04 Driver support

Blind Spot Information System*

Introduction WARNING NOTE

• BLIS is an information system, NOT a The door panel indicator light illuminates on
warning or safety system. the side of the vehicle where the system has
detected another vehicle. If your vehicle is
• BLIS does not eliminate the need for passed on both sides at the same time, both
you to visually confirm the conditions lights will illuminate.
around you, and the need for you to turn
your head and shoulders to make sure
that you can safely change lanes. BLIS has an integrated function that alerts the
driver if a fault should occur with the system.
• As the driver, you have full responsibility
For example, if one or both of the system's
for changing lanes in a safe manner.
cameras are obscured, a message (see the 04
G021426 table on page 181) will appear in the informa-
The system is based on digital camera tech- tion display in the instrument panel. If this
BLIS camera nology. The cameras are located beneath the occurs, clean the camera lenses. If necessary,
side-view mirrors. the system can be temporarily switched off (for
Indicator light instructions, see page 181).
When one (or both) of the cameras have
BLIS symbol detected a vehicle in the blind area (up to
approximately 10 ft. (3 meters) from the side of
The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) is an
your vehicle, and up to approximately 31 ft.
information system that indicates the presence
(9.5 meters) behind the side-view mirror), see
of another vehicle moving in the same direction
the illustration, the indicator light in the door
as your vehicle in the side-view mirror's "blind
panel illuminates. The light will glow continu-
area."
ously to alert the driver of the vehicle in the
blind area.
CAUTION
The BLIS system should only be repaired by
a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-
nician.
Areas monitored by BLIS Distance A = approx.
31 ft. (9.5 meters), Distance B = approx. 10 ft.
(3 meters)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 179

 04 Driver support

Blind Spot Information System*

When does BLIS function Darkness NOTE

The system functions when your vehicle is BLIS reacts to the headlights of surrounding
vehicles. In order to be detected by BLIS, a If the BLIS indicator lights illuminate occa-
moving at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). sionally even when there are no other vehi-
vehicle in the blind area must have its head- cles in the blind area, this does not indicate
When you pass another vehicle: lights on. This means, for example, that the a fault in the system.
The system reacts when you pass another system will not detect a trailer without head-
vehicle at a speed of up to 6 mph (10 km/h) lights that is being towed behind a car or truck. In the event of a fault, Blind spot syst.
faster than that vehicle. Service required will be displayed.

When you are passed by another vehicle: WARNING

The following are several examples of situa-
The system reacts if your vehicle is passed by • BLIS does not react to cyclists or tions in which the BLIS indicator light(s) may
04 another vehicle at a speed of up to 43 mph mopeds. illuminate even when there are no other vehi-
(70 km/h) faster than your vehicle.
• BLIS does not react to vehicles that are cles in the area monitored by the system.
standing still.
WARNING
• The BLIS cameras have the same limi-
• BLIS does not function in sharp curves. tation as the human eye. In other words,
• BLIS does not function when your vehi- their "vision is impaired" by adverse
cle is backing up. weather conditions such as heavy
snowfall, intense light directly into the
• If you are towing a wide trailer, this may
camera, dense fog, etc.
prevent the BLIS cameras from detect-
ing other vehicles in adjacent lanes.
Limitations
In certain situations, the BLIS indicator light(s) Light reflected from a wet road surface
How BLIS functions in daylight and
may illuminate even when there are no other
darkness
vehicles in the area monitored by the system.
Daylight
BLIS reacts to the shape of surrounding vehi-
cles. The system is designed to help detect
motor vehicles such as cars, trucks, buses,
motorcycles, etc.

180 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 04 Driver support

Blind Spot Information System*

CAUTION switched off, and a text message is dis-

played.
• Clean the lenses carefully to avoid
• BLIS can be switched on again by pressing
scratching.
the button. The indicator light in the button
• The lenses are electrically heated to will illuminate and a new text message will
help melt ice or snow. If necessary, gen- be displayed. Press the OK button (see
tly brush away snow from the lenses. page 187) to erase the message.
Depending on the vehicle's optional equip-
ment, there may not be space for the BLIS but-
The vehicle's own shadow against a large, light, Switching BLIS on and off
ton in the center console. In this case, BLIS can
smooth surface such as barriers between lanes on be switched on and off in the menu system by
a highway 04
pressing MY CAR and going to Settings
Car settings BLIS. See page 189 for a
description of the menu system.

BLIS system messages

Text in the dis- System status
play
Blind spot syst. BLIS not functioning
Service required properly. Contact an
Sunlight directly in the camera when the sun is low authorized Volvo
on the horizon
BLIS is automatically activated when the igni- service technician.
Cleaning the BLIS camera lenses tion is switched on. The indicator lights will
provide confirmation by flashing 3 times. Blind spot syst. BLIS camera
In order to function optimally, the BLIS camera
Camera blocked obscured. Clean the
lenses must be kept clean. They can be wiped • The system can be switched off by press- lenses.
clean with a soft cloth or wet sponge. ing the BLIS button in the center console
(see the illustration). The indicator light in Blind-spot info BLIS system on
the button goes out when the system is system ON

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 181

 04 Driver support

Blind Spot Information System*

Text in the dis- System status

play
Blind-spot info BLIS system off
system OFF

Blind spot syst. The BLIS cameras'

Reduced function function has been
reduced due to
weak or impaired
data transfer
04 between the BLIS
system's cameras
and the vehicle's
electrical system.
The cameras will
reset themselves
when this data
transfer has
returned to normal.

182 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

04 Driver support

04

183
 Volvo Sensus........................................................................................ 186
Menus and messages........................................................................... 187
The MY CAR menus.............................................................................. 189
Climate system..................................................................................... 195
Trip computer........................................................................................ 203
Active chassis system–Four C*............................................................. 205
Passenger compartment convenience................................................. 206

184 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

COMFORT AND DRIVING PLEASURE
 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Volvo Sensus

Introduction as well as other options such as the park assist

camera(s), etc.
Volvo Sensus uses the screen in the center
instrument panel to display information and
selections are made using this panel’s controls
and buttons. Certain features can also be con-
trolled using the steering wheel keypad.
Press MY CAR to present all of the available
settings related to driving and/or controlling
the vehicle, such as City Safety, setting the
clock, lock settings, etc.
Press RADIO, MEDIA, TEL, NAV* and CAM*
Center console control panel to change a source and to activated systems
Volvo Navigation System (VNS)* – NAV: or functions such as AM, FM1, CD, DVD, Blue-
05 tooth, navigation* and the park assist camera
see the separate VNS manual for operating
instructions. *.
Infotainment (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL): see See the respective sections in this manual for
page 212 . more detailed information about your vehicle's
various features and functions.
Vehicle-related settings - MY CAR: see
page 189.
Park assist camera - CAM*: see page 175.
Climate system: see page 195.

Volvo Sensus is the operating system in your

vehicle providing a coordinated interface for a
number of functions such as the individualized
settings that can be made in the MY CAR
menus, the climate and infotainment systems

186 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

Main instrument panel Average Press OK to acknowledge and scroll among

the messages.
Instantaneous
Average speed NOTE
Current speed in mph (Canadian models If a warning message appears while you are
only) using the trip computer, the message must
Engine oil level* be read and confirmed by pressing OK
before the previous activity can be
Calibrate tire pressure* resumed.

Messages Message Description

Stop engineA Stop and switch off
Information display and menu controls the engine as soon
OK – access to the list of messages and as possible. Serious
05
message confirmation. risk of damage.
Thumb wheel – browse among menus and Contact an author-
options in the list of functions. ized Volvo work-
shop.
RESET – reset the active function. Used in
certain cases to select/activate a function, Stop safelyA Stop and switch off
see the explanation under each respective the engine. Serious
function. risk of damage.
The menus shown on the information displays Contact an author-
in the instrument panel are controlled with the ized Volvo work-
When a warning, information or indicator sym- shop.
left lever. The menus shown depend on ignition
bol comes on, a corresponding message
mode. Press OK to erase a message and return
appears on the information display. An error
to the menus.
message is stored in a memory list until the
Menu overview fault is rectified.
Driving distance on current fuel reserve

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 187

 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

Message Description Message Description

Service urgentA Have the vehicle Maintenance over- If the service inter-
checked by an due vals are not fol-
authorized Volvo lowed, the warranty
workshop immedi- does not cover any
ately. damaged parts.
Contact an author-
Service requiredA Have the vehicle ized Volvo workshop
checked by an for service.
authorized Volvo
workshop as soon Temporarily OFFA A function has been
as possible. temporarily
switched off and is
See manualA Read the owner's reset automatically
manual. while driving or after
05
Book time for Time to book service starting again.
maintenance at an authorized Low battery Power The audio system is
Volvo retailer. save mode switched off to save
Time for regular Time for regular current. Charge the
service at an author- battery.
maintenance
ized Volvo work- A There will also be a system-specific part of this message
shop. The timing is
determined by the
number of miles
driven, number of
months since the
last service, engine
running time.

188
 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

Introduction Operation • Reject and incoming phone call

The menu system provides access to
Center console controls
• The current function will be cancelled
menus for operating many of the vehi- • Characters that have been entered will be
cle's functions, such as setting the erased
clock, door mirrors, locks, etc.
• The most recent selection will be cancelled
Navigating in the menus is done using the but- • Go back (upward) in the menu system
tons on the center console control panel or with
the right-side steering wheel keypad. A long press will take you to the highest menu
level (the main view), giving you access to all of
Some of the features mentioned in this section the vehicles/menus. See page 213 for addi-
are optional. tional information.

Steering wheel keypad

Center console controls for menu navigation 05

Press MY CAR to access the My Car
menus.
Press OK/MENU to select a highlighted
selection or to store a certain function in
the system's memory.
Turn to navigate up/down among menu
selections.
EXIT

EXIT functions The keypad varies according to the vehicle's

The results of a short press on EXIT vary, equipment
depending on where the cursor is and where Turn the thumb wheel to go up/down
you are in the menu structure. among menu selections. Press the thumb

``

189
 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

wheel to make a selection or store a func- 6. Use the thumb wheel to move to the My S60
tion in the system's memory. desired choice and press the thumb wheel
EXIT. to put an X in the box.
7. Finish by exiting the menu system either
Paths one step at a time with short presses on
The current menu level is displayed at the EXIT (2) or press and hold this button to
upper right of the center console display. Menu return to the main menu.
paths are displayed as follows, for example:
The OK/MENU (2), EXIT (4) and control (3) in
Settings Car settings Lock settings the center console can be used in the same
way.
Doors unlock Driver door, then all

The following is an example of how to set a MY CAR

function in the menu system: When the MY CAR symbol has been selected, MY CAR My S60
the following menu alternatives are displayed.
05 1. Press the MY CAR button on the center The display shows all of the vehicle's driver
console control panel. support systems, which can be activated/
deactivated here.
2. Navigate to a menu, for example
Settings using the thumb wheel (1) and
press it to open a submenu.
3. Navigate to the desired submenu such as
Car settings.
4. Navigate to Lock settings and press the
thumb wheel to open a new submenu.
5. Navigate to Doors unlock and press the
thumb wheel to open a submenu with alter-
natives that can be selected. • My S60
• Support systems
• Settings

190
 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

Driver support systems Doors unlock See page 53 for more information.
All doors
Approach light duration
Driver door, then all
Off
Keyless entry
30 sec
All doors
60 sec
Any door
90 sec
Doors on same side
See page 55 for more information.
Both front doors
Home safe light duration
Audible confirmation
30 sec
See page 53 and 61 for more information.
MY CAR Support systems 60 sec
Reduced Guard
(MY CAR > Support systems) 90 sec 05
Activate once
The screen shows the current status (settings) See page 100 for more information.
Ask when exiting
for the vehicle's driver support systems.
See page 71 for more information. Triple indicator
Menu settings Side mirror settings See page 98 for more information.
The following pages list the main menus/sub- Fold mirrors Daytime running lights
menus and possible selections.
Tilt left mirror See page 93 for more information.
Car key memory
Tilt right mirror
See pages 88 and 53 for more information. Active bending lights
See page 105 for more information.
Lock settings See page 96 for more information.
Light settings
Automatic door locking Tire pressure system
Door lock confirmation light
Warns if tyre pressure is too low
Unlock confirmation light

``

191
 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

Calibrate tire pressure Lane Departure Warning

MY CAR Settings System options
See page 298 for more information. This sys- Lane Departure Warning
tem is optional in Canada. Set/change time
On at start-up
Steering wheel force See page 82 for more information.
Increased sensitivity
High Time format
See page 168 for more information.
Medium 12 h
Road Sign Information
Low 24 h
On
See page 205 for more information. Screen saver
Off
Reset car settings The contents of the screen are replaced by
Speed alert
This feature returns the "Car settings" menu to another image if this selection is marked. The
On contents of the screen will be displayed again
the original factory settings.
Off if one of the buttons (1-4) is pressed, see
05
page 189.
MY CAR Settings Driver support DSTC
systems Uncheck the selection to turn the screen saver
See page 130 for more information.
off.
Collision Warning City Safety
Language
Collision Warning See page 151 for more information.
Select the language for menu texts.
Warning distance BLIS
Show help text
Long See page 179 for more information.
This displays help texts for the current menu.
Normal Distance Alert
Distance and fuel units
Short See page 148 for more information.
MPG (UK)
Warning sound Driver Alert
MPG (US)
See page 159 for more information. See page 165 for more information.
km/l
l/100km

192
 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

See page 203 for more information about the Voice command list Voice user setting
trip computer.
Phone commands Default setting
Temperature unit
Phone User 1
Celsius
Phone call contact User 2
Fahrenheit
Phone dial number Two user profiles can be set, which is useful if
Select the temperature scale to be displayed more than one person uses voice commands
Navigation commands
by the climate control unit. regularly. Default setting resets the factory
Navigation settings.
Volume levels
Navigation repeat instruction Voice training
Voice output volume
Navigation go to address User 1
Front park assist volume
General commands User 2
Rear park assist volume
Help Voice training enables the system to become
Phone ringing volume 05
Cancel familiar with the driver's voice and pronuncia-
Reset system options tion. A list of phrases is presented on the
Voice tutorial screen for the driver to read aloud. When the
This feature returns the "System options"
menu to the original factory settings. The menu alternatives under Phone system has registered the driver's pronuncia-
commands show examples of the voice com- tion, no additional phrases will be displayed.
mands available when a cell phone is con- After completed voice training, select User 1
MY CAR Settings Voice settingsA.
nected to the BluetoothŸ hands-free system. or User 2 in Voice user setting to set the sys-
A Only on vehicles with the optional Volvo Navigation System See page 248 for more detailed information. tem to the current user.
and/or a BluetoothŸ-connected cell phone
The menu alternatives under Navigation Voice output volume
Voice tutorial commands show examples of the voice com- • A volume control will be displayed. To set
Select this menu alternative and press OK for mands available for the optional Volvo the volume level:
spoken information about how the system Navigation System. Refer to the navigation 1. Adjust the volume using the thumb wheel
works. system's manual for detailed information.
2. Test the setting by pressing OK
3. Store the setting and leave the menu by
pressing EXIT.
``

193
 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

Voice POI list This feature returns the "Climate settings"

menu to the original factory settings.
Edit list
For more information about the climate sys-
The navigation system has a large number of
tem, see page 195.
points of interest (POIs). A maximum of 30 POIs
can be stored in this list.
MY CAR Settings Favourites (FAV)
The menu alternative Voice POI list is only
displayed if the vehicle is equipped with the
optional Volvo Navigation System. Refer to the See page 217 for more information about this
navigation system's manual for detailed infor- feature.
mation.
MY CAR Settings Information
MY CAR Settings Audio settings
Number of keys
05 See page 212 for more information about the See page 52 for more information.
infotainment system.
VIN number

MY CAR Settings Climate settings See page 341 for more information.
DivX® VOD code
Automatic blower adjustment See page 233 for more information.
Normal Bluetooth software version in car
High See page 221 for more information.
Low Map and software version
Recirculation timer Refer to the optional Volvo Navigation System
Automatic rear defroster manual for more information.
Interior air quality system
Reset climate settings

194
 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

Introduction NOTE mercially available window washing spray will

also help prevent fogging or misting.
Air conditioning The sunlight sensor monitors which side of
The vehicle is equipped with Electronic Climate the car that is most exposed to sunlight. Vents in the parcel shelf
Control (ECC). The climate control system This can mean that the temperature may
differ between the right and left-side air
cools, heats or dehumidifies the air in the pas- NOTE
vents, even if the temperatures set for both
senger compartment. sides of the passenger compartment are the The air vents at the rear of the parcel shelf
same. should never be obstructed.
NOTE
• The air conditioning can be switched • The temperature sensor for the passenger Temporary shut-off of the air
off, but to ensure the best possible cli- compartment is located below the climate
conditioning
mate comfort in the passenger com- control panel.
The air conditioning is momentarily disen-
partment and to prevent the windows • The outside (ambient) temperature sensor gaged during full-throttle acceleration or when
from misting, it should always be on. is located on the door mirror. driving uphill with a trailer. This may result in a
• In warm weather, a small amount of • The humidity sensor* is located in the inte- temporary increase in cabin temperature. 05
water may accumulate under the car rior rearview mirror.
when it has been parked. This water is Ice and snow
condensation from the A/C system and Always keep the air intake grille at the base of
NOTE
is normal. the windshield free of snow.
Do not cover or block the sensors with
clothing or other objects. Climate system maintenance
Sensor location
Special tools and equipment are required to
• The sunlight sensor is located on the top maintain and carry out repairs on the climate
side of the dashboard. Side windows and moonroof
To ensure that the air conditioning works opti- system. Work of this type should only be done
mally, the side windows, and the optional by a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-
moonroof should be closed. nician.

Fog on the inside of the windows Refrigerant

The defroster function should be used to Volvo cares about the environment. The air
remove fog or mist from the inside of the win- conditioning system in your car contains a
dows. Keeping the windows clean with a com- CFC-free refrigerant – R134a. This substance
will not deplete the ozone layer. The air condi-

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 195

 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

tioning system contains 1.8 lbs (820 g) of NOTE Air distribution

R134a. The systems uses PAG oil.
Contact your Volvo retailer for IAQS air filter
Passenger compartment filter replacement intervals.
Replace the cabin air filter with a new one at
the recommended intervals. Please refer to Materials used in the cabin
your Warranty and Service Records Informa- The materials used in the cabin have been
tion booklet, or consult a trained and qualified developed to help minimize the amount of dust
Volvo service technician for these intervals. and make the cabin easier to keep clean. All
The filter should be replaced more often when floor mats can be easily removed for cleaning.
driving under dirty and dusty conditions. The Use car cleaning products recommended by
filter cannot be cleaned and therefore should Volvo. See also the information beginning on
always be replaced with a new one. page 333.

NOTE Menu settings The incoming air is distributed from a number

05 The default settings for four of the climate sys- of different vents in the passenger compart-
There are different types of cabin air filters.
tem's functions can be changed in the menu ment.
Ensure that the correct type is installed.
system.
Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) • Blower speed in automatic mode. mode.
A multifilter helps reduce gases and particles • Recirculation timer for passenger com- If desired, air distribution can be controlled
in the incoming air, thereby reducing the levels partment air. manually, see page 202.
of odors and contaminants entering the vehi- • Automatic rear window defrosting.
cle. The air quality sensor detects increased • The optional Interior Air Quality System
levels of contaminants in the outside air. When (IAQS).
the air quality sensor detects contaminated
The functions can also be returned to factory
outside air, the air intake closes and the air
settings in the menu system.
inside the passenger compartment is recircu-
lated, i.e. no outside air enters the vehicle. The See page 189 for a description of the menu
filter also cleans recirculated passenger com- system.
partment air.

196
 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

Air vents in the dashboard Air vents in the door pillars

Open Closed
Closed Open 05

Horizontal airflow Horizontal airflow

Vertical airflow Vertical airflow
Direct the outer air vents toward the side win- Direct the outer air vents toward the side win-
dows to defrost. dows to defrost.
Direct the vents into the passenger compart-
ment to help maintain the desired temperature
in the rear seat.

``

197
 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

Electronic climate control, ECC

05
Temperature control, driver's side Heated front passenger's seat*
Heated driver's seat* Temperature control, passenger's side
Defroster (maximum effect) Recirculation
Blower AUTO
Manual air distribution—floor A/C on/off
Manual air distribution—dashboard air
vents
Manual air distribution—defroster
Heated rear window and door mirrors, see
page 106

198 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

Climate system controls Heated rear seats* Air distribution

Heated front seats*

Heat control for the outboard seating positions Manual air distribution—defroster
The current seat temperature is shown in the cen- is done in the same way as for the front seats. Manual air distribution—dashboard air 05
ter console display vents
Blower control
Press the button once for the Turn the control clockwise to Manual air distribution—floor
highest heat level – three indi- increase or counterclockwise
cator lights come on. The figure consists of three buttons. When a
to decrease the blower
button is pressed, the corresponding figure will
Press the button twice for a speed. If AUTO is selected,
appear in the display with an arrow indicating
lower heat level – two indica- blower speed will be regula-
which manual air flow has been selected (see
tor lights come on. ted automatically and this will
the following illustration). See also the air dis-
override manual adjustment.
Press the button three times for the lowest heat tribution chart on page 202.
level – one indicator light comes on.
NOTE
Press the button four times to switch off the
heat – no indicator lights come on. If the blower is turned off completely, the air
conditioning is disengaged, which may
Seat heating will automatically switch off when result in fogging on the windows.
the engine is switched off.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 199

 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

NOTE A/C – ON/OFF

When the indicator light in the
Selecting the lowest blower speed may button is on, the air condition-
increases the risk of fog forming on the win-
dows. ing is controlled automati-
cally. This cools/heats and
dehumidifies the incoming air.
Temperature control When the indicator light in the
The temperatures on the button is off, the air condition-
driver and passenger sides ing is disengaged. Other functions are still con-
can be set separately. When trolled automatically. When maximum
the vehicle is started, the defroster is selected, the air conditioning sys-
most recent setting is tem is set for maximum blower speed and
Air distribution is shown in the center console dis- resumed. dehumidification.
play
NOTE Defroster
05
Auto This function defrosts/de-ices
The function automatically Heating or cooling cannot be speeded up by the windshield and front side
regulates cooling, heating, selecting a higher/lower temperature than windows. The indicator light
blower speed, recirculation, the actual temperature required.
in the defroster button lights
and air distribution to main- when the function is active.
tain the chosen temperature.
If you select one or more man-
ual functions, the other func- • Blower speed increases automatically and
tions continue to be controlled automatically. the air conditioning will switch on (if not
The air quality sensor is engaged and all man- already on and if the passenger compart-
ual settings are switched off when AUTO is ment blower is not turned off) to dehumid-
pressed. The display shows AUTO CLIMATE. ify the air in the passenger compartment.
Air conditioning can be switched off by
Blower speed in automatic mode can be set pressing the AC button.
under Climate settings Automatic blower • Recirculation will not function while defrost
adjustment. Choose between Low, Normal is engaged.
or High.

200
 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

The climate system will return to its previous is selected by automatically switching off the enters the vehicle. The filter also cleans recir-
settings when the defroster function is function after a certain length of time, depend- culated passenger compartment air. When the
switched off. ing on the ambient temperature. Activate/ AUTO button is depressed the air quality sen-
deactivate the function under Climate sor is always engaged.
Recirculation/air quality system settings Recirculation timer. See page Activate or deactivate this function in Climate
Recirculation 189 for a description of the menu system. settings Interior air quality system.
This function can be used to
shut out exhaust fumes, NOTE
smoke, etc., from the passen- NOTE
ger compartment. The air in When Defroster is selected, recirculation is
always deactivated. • The air quality sensor should always be
the passenger compartment engaged in order to obtain the best air
is then recirculated, i.e., no air in the passenger compartment.
from outside the car is taken Interior Air Quality System–IAQS*
• Recirculation is limited in cold weather
into the car when this function is activated. The This system consists of a multifilter and an air to avoid fogging.
indicator light in the button will illuminate when quality sensor. The filter helps remove gases
recirculation is selected. and particles from the incoming air, thereby • If the insides of the windows start fog- 05
ging, disengage the air quality sensor.
reducing the amounts of odors and contami-
If the air in the car recirculates for too long, Use the defroster function to increase
nants entering the vehicle. The air quality sen-
there is a risk of condensation forming on the airflow to the front, side, and rear win-
sor detects increased levels of contaminants in
insides of the windows, especially in winter. dows.
the outside air. When the air quality sensor
Timer detects contaminated outside air, the air intake
The timer function minimizes the risk of fog- closes and the air inside the passenger com-
ging, or stale air when the recirculation function partment is recirculated, i.e., no outside air

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 201

 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

Air distribution table

Air distribution Use Air distribution Use
Air to windows. Some air To remove de-fog/de- Air to the floor and windows. To ensure comfortable
flows from the dashboard ice the front side win- Some air flows from the conditions and good de-
air vents. The air is not dows and windshield dashboard air vents. fogging in cold or humid
recirculated. Air condition- quickly. weather.
ing is always engaged.

Air to windshield and side In cold or humid Air to floor and from dash- In sunny weather with
windows. Some air flows weather (blower board air vents. cool outside tempera-
from the air dashboard speed should be tures.
vents. moderate to high).

05
Airflow to windows and To ensure good com- Air to floor. Some air flows to To warm or cool the feet.
from dashboard air vents. fort in warm, dry the dashboard air vents and
weather. windows.

Airflow to the head and To ensure efficient Airflow to windows, from To cool the feet or pro-
chest from the dashboard cooling in warm dashboard air vents and to vide warmer air to the
air vents. weather. the floor. upper body in cold
weather or hot, dry
weather.

202
 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Trip computer

Introduction Functions updated every few seconds. When the vehicle

is stationary, "----" appears on the display.
NOTE
Average fuel consumption
If a warning message appears while you are The average fuel consumption since the last
using the trip computer, this message must reset. Reset using RESET.
be acknowledged in order to return to the
trip computer function. Acknowledge a Driving distance on current fuel reserve
message by pressing OK. This function shows the approximate distance
that can be driven on the fuel remaining in the
To change the unit of measure specified for tank. The calculation is based on average fuel
distance and speed, contact an authorized consumption during the last 20 miles (30 km)
Volvo workshop. of driving and the amount of fuel remaining in
the tank when the reading was taken. When the
Information display and controls Average speed message ---- miles to empty tank appears in
OK–press to acknowledge/confirm/erase The system calculates the average speed from the display, refuel as soon as possible.
the last resetting. Reset using RESET. 05
a message)
Thumb wheel (used to scroll among the trip Current speed in mph (Canadian models NOTE
computer menus) only) The actual distance that can be driven on
RESET–resets certain functions This function provides the driver with an instan- the usable fuel remaining in the tank may be
taneous conversion of the car's current speed influenced by a change in driving style.
To scroll through trip computer information,
from km/h to mph.
move the thumb wheel up or down. Continue
See also page 254 for information on driving
turning to return to the starting point. Current speed in km/h (U.S. models only) economically.
This function provides the driver with an instan-
taneous conversion of the car's current speed Resetting
from mph to km/h. 1. Select --- mph average speed or --.-
mpg average.
Current fuel consumption
2. Press and hold RESET for approx. 1 sec-
(Instantaneous)
ond to reset the selected function. If
Current fuel consumption is calculated every
RESET is kept depressed for at 3 three
second. The information on the display is

203
 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Trip computer

seconds, Average speed and Average fuel

consumption are reset simultaneously.

05

204
 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Active chassis system–Four C*

Active chassis (Four C) Operation NOTE

Active chassis, Four-C (Continuously Con-
This steering force level menu function can-
trolled Chassis Concept), regulates the cha- not be accessed when the vehicle is in
racteristics of the shock absorbers so that the motion.
car's driving characteristics can be adjusted.
There are three settings: Comfort, Sport and
Advanced.

Comfort
Comfort mode offers a somewhat softer ride
and the transmission shifts gears at lower rpm.
This mode is particularly suitable for long-dis-
tance highway driving. The indicator light in the
button will be on when this mode is selected. Chassis settings

Sport Use the buttons in the center console to

05
In this mode, the vehicle's body sway is change setting. The setting in use when the
reduced during cornering and steering engine is switched off is activated the next time
response is more immediate. The transmission the engine is started.
shifts up at higher rpm for sportier driving. The
indicator light in the button will be on to indi- Speed-dependent steering force*
cate that Sport mode has been selected. Steering force increases with the speed of the
Advanced vehicle to give the driver enhanced sensitivity.
In this mode, body sway in curves is minimal At low speed the vehicle is easy to steer in
and steering response is very direct. Gear shift- order to facilitate parking, etc.
ing is done at high rpm in each gear for Steering force can be changed under MY CAR
dynamic and active driving. Car settings Steering wheel force.
Select Low, Medium or High. For a descrip-
tion of the menu system, see page 189.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 205

 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Passenger compartment convenience

Storage spaces

05

206
 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Passenger compartment convenience

Compartment in door panel Tunnel console Glove compartment

Storage pocket on the front edge of the
front seat cushions
Glove compartment
Storage compartment
Jacket holder
Storage compartment, 12-volt socket and
AUX input/USB connector
Rear seat cup holders
Storage pocket
Storage compartment (for CDs, etc.) under The owner's manual and maps can be kept
Jacket holder armrest, AUX input/USB connector. here. There are also holders for pens and fuel 05
The jacket hanger is located on the inboard Includes cup holder for driver and passen- cards. The glove compartment can be locked
side of the front passenger's seat head ger, 12-volt socket and small storage com- manually with the key blade, see page 67.
restraint. It is only intended for hanging light partment.
garments.

``

207
 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Passenger compartment convenience

Vanity mirror 12-volt sockets ignition must be in at least mode I, see

page 84.
The maximum current consumption is 10A
(120W) if only one of the 12-volt sockets in the
passenger compartment is in use. If both the
front and rear sockets are used at the same
time, the maximum current consumption per
socket is 7.5A (90W).
The auxiliary sockets can also be used to
power a cigarette lighter. Accessory cigarette
lighters and ashtrays can be purchased from
G021438
your Volvo retailer.
Vanity mirror with lighting 12-volt socket in the front tunnel console
WARNING
05 The light comes on automatically when the
cover is lifted. Always keep the sockets covered when not
in use.

12-volt socket in the trunk*

12-volt socket in the rear center console

The electrical sockets can be used for 12-volt
accessories such as cell phone chargers and
coolers. For the socket to supply current, the

208 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Passenger compartment convenience

Fold down the cover to access the electrical

socket.

NOTE
The 12-volt socket in the trunk provides
electrical current even when the ignition is
switched off. Using the socket while the
engine is not running will drain the battery.

05

209
 Introduction........................................................................................... 212
Radio..................................................................................................... 222
Media player......................................................................................... 231
AUX/USB sockets................................................................................. 235
BluetoothŸ media ................................................................................. 238
Bluetooth® hands-free connection ...................................................... 240
Cell phone voice control....................................................................... 248

210
INFOTAINMENT
 06 Infotainment

Introduction

General information NOTE Audyssey MultEQ1

The infotainment system consists of radio and
To help avoid excessive battery drain,
media player features and also makes it pos- remove the remote key from the ignition slot
sible to communicate via a cell phone. The if the infotainment system is used while the
information is displayed on a 7" screen in the engine is switched off.
center console. Infotainment functions can be
controlled from the center console or via the
Dolby Pro Logic
buttons on the steering wheel keypad. On
models equipped with the optional navigation
system, voice commands can also be used to
e.g., set destinations, make calls from a
The Audyssey MultEQ system has been used
BluetoothŸ-connected cell phone, etc.
to optimize sound quality to help ensure a
If the infotainment system was on when the world-class listening experience.
ignition was switched off, the most recently
used source (FM1, etc.) will restart the next
time the ignition is put in mode I or higher. The
driver's door must also be closed on vehicles
with keyless drive*. The system is manufactured under license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing
06 The infotainment system can be operated for Corporation.
15 minutes at a time while the engine is
switched off by pressing the On/Off button. Dolby Pro Logic II and the symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing
While the engine is being started, the infotain-
Corporation.
ment system will be temporarily interrupted
and will resume when the engine has started.

1 Applies only to models with Premium Sound Multimedia.

212 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 06 Infotainment

Introduction

Infotainment system overview Basic infotainment functions

Corresponding controls - keypad and center con-

sole
Sockets for external audio sources (AUX Infotainment controls in the center console
SOUND: press to access the menu for
and USB)
adjusting bass, treble, etc., see page 217
Steering wheel keypad for additional information.
7" display VOL: turn to raise or lower the volume level.

Center console control panel ON/OFF/MUTE: short press - switch 06

the system ON. Press and hold (until the
screen turns black) - switch the system
OFF. A short press when the infotainment
system is on will mute/unmute the sound.
The entire infotainment system, including
the navigation* and telephone functions, is
switched on/off at the same time by using
this button.
Mode buttons: select a mode (e.g.,
RADIO, MEDIA, TEL, etc.) by pressing its
button on the center console. The most

``

213
 06 Infotainment

Introduction

recent source in the selected mode (e.g., "* FAV—storing a shortcut" on page 217 EXIT: a short press takes you upward in
FM1) will be displayed. The location of for information on using this button. the menu system, cancels a current func-
these buttons on the center console may tion, rejects an incoming phone call or era-
vary slightly from model to model. ses characters that have been entered on
Steering wheel keypad
OK/MENU: confirm a menu selection. This the screen. Press and hold from a mode’s
The buttons on the right-hand steering wheel main view to come to the infotainment sys-
leads to the selected mode’s (RADIO, keypad can be used in the same way as some
MEDIA) menu view. Arrows at the right of tem's main view.
of the controls on the center console. There are
the screen indicate submenus. two versions of the keypad, depending on your Thumb wheel: pressing functions in the
TUNE: turn to scroll among tracks/folders, vehicle's specifications. same way OK/MENU on the center con-
radio stations, phone contacts or to navi- sole. Turning the thumb wheel functions in
gate among the alternatives shown on the the same way as TUNE on the center con-
screen. sole.
EXIT: short press - go upward in the menu Voice button: 2 press to voice-activate cer-
system, cancel a current function, reject an tain functions on a BluetoothŸ-connected
incoming phone call or erase characters cell phone and the navigation system.
that have been entered on the screen.
Press and hold - from a mode’s main view Main view
to come to the infotainment system's main From a mode’s normal view, pressing and
view, see page 216.
06 holding EXIT will display the infotainment sys-
# INFO: if more information is available tem's main view, which enables you to select
than is currently displayed on the screen, a mode.
press # INFO to display the remaining Left/right arrow keys: a short press moves
information. between preset radio stations or tracks on NAV: Navigation system*
Keypad (for preset stations, entering let- a disc. Press and hold to search within
ters or numbers, etc). tracks or to tune to the next/previous
strong radio station. RADIO
* FAV: this button can be used to store a
shortcut to a commonly used function in Volume
AM/FM/SIRIUS/DISC, etc. See the section

2 Models with the optional navigation system only. On models without navigation, this button mutes/unmutes the infotainment system.

214 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 06 Infotainment

Introduction

MEDIA: (DISC, USB, etc.)

TEL: BluetoothŸ hands-free

MY CAR: Driving-related settings

CAM: Park assist camera*

06

``

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 215

 06 Infotainment

Introduction

Menu navigation

06

An example of menu navigation in MEDIA mode when a CD is playing

216
 06 Infotainment

Introduction

Mode button (in this example, the MEDIA The * FAV button can be used to store fre- 3. Turn TUNE to scroll through the list of
button). The number of buttons varies, quently used functions, making it possible to alternatives displayed and press OK/
depending on your vehicle’s specifica- start the stored function by simply press- MENU to confirm (store) your choice.
tions). Each mode has four basic views: ing * FAV. One favorite (for example, > The next time the infotainment system
Normal view Equalizer) can be programmed for each of the mode (RADIO, MEDIA, etc.) is selected,
following infotainment system functions: a short press on * FAV will start the
Shortcut view stored function.
In RADIO mode
Quick scroll view
• AM
Basic sound settings
Menu view • FM1/FM2
Press SOUND to display the basic sound set-
Select a mode by pressing its button (1) • SIRIUS1/SIRIUS2* ting menu (Bass, Treble, etc). Continue press-
(RADIO, MEDIA, TEL, etc.). Navigate using In MEDIA mode ing SOUND or OK/MENU to display the other
TUNE, OK/MENU or EXIT. setting alternatives.
• DISC
• USB Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and save
* FAV—storing a shortcut the new setting by pressing OK/MENU.
• iPod
• Bluetooth Continue pressing SOUND or OK/MENU to
display:
• AUX
Favorites can also be stored for MY CAR, • Surround:3 Can be set to On or Off. When 06
CAM* and NAV*. See page 189 for a descrip- switched on, the system will automatically
tion of the menu system. select settings for the best sound quality,
which is normally DPLII and will
To program a function on the * FAV button: appear in the display. If the recording was
1. Select a mode (e.g., RADIO, MEDIA, etc.). made using Dolby Digital technology, play-
back will be provided with this setting and
2. Press and hold * FAV until the "favorite"
will appear in the display. If Sur-
menu is displayed.

3 Premium Sound Multimedia only

``

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 217

 06 Infotainment

Introduction

round is switched off, audio will be provi- MENU. Do the same for the other frequen- External audio source volume
ded using 3 channel stereo. cies. If an external device such as an MP3 player or
• Bass: Bass level. 4. When you have finished making your set- an iPod Ÿ is connected to the AUX socket, the
• Treble: Treble level. tings, press EXIT to save and return to nor- device's volume may be different than the vol-
mal view. ume of the internal sound sources such as the
• Fader: Balance between the front and rear disc player or the radio. If the external sound
speakers. For general information regarding menu navi- source's volume is too high, the quality of the
• Balance: Balance between the right and gation, see page 216 and menu overview see sound may be impaired. To help prevent this,
left speakers. page 219. adjust the input volume of the external audio
• DPL II centre level/3 channel centre source:
Sound stage5
level3: Volume for the center speaker. The sound experience can be optimized for the
• DPL II surround level3/4: Surround level. driver's seat, both front seats or the rear seat. NOTE
If the front and rear seats are occupied, the Sound quality may be affected if the MP3
sound stage setting Front seats is recom- player is being charged while the system is
Advanced sound settings in AUX mode. To help prevent this, avoid
mended. Select one of the options under
Equalizer charging the MP3 player in a 12-volt socket
Audio settings Sound stage.
while it is being played.
Sound levels for different frequencies can be
adjusted separately using this feature. Audio volume and automatic volume
control 1. Press MEDIA and turn TUNE to AUX.
06 To do so: Press OK/MENU or the thumb wheel on
The infotainment system compensates for dis-
1. Press OK/MENU to access Audio rupting noises in the passenger compartment the steering wheel keypad.
settings and select Equalizer by increasing the volume according to the 2. Press OK/MENU and turn TUNE to AUX
2. Turn TUNE to select one of the frequencies speed of the vehicle. The level of sound com- input volume. Confirm by pressing OK/
and press OK/MENU. pensation can be set at low, medium, high or MENU.
off. Select the level under Audio settings
3. Turn TUNE to adjust the sound setting and 3. Turn TUNE to adjust the volume.
Volume compensation.
confirm the change by pressing OK/

3 Premium Sound Multimedia only

4 Only when Surround is on.
5 Premium Sound Multimedia only

218
 06 Infotainment

Introduction

Optimal sound reproduction RADIO menus ൅

Main SAT1*/SAT2* menu (SiriusXM൅
The infotainment system is pre-calibrated for satellite radio)
optimal sound reproduction using digital signal Main AM menu SAT1
processing. AM menu
SIRIUS radio off. Press RADIO button
This calibration takes into account factors such Show presets6 to activate SIRIUS.
as the speakers, amplifier, cabin acoustics, the Scan SAT2
listeners' seating positions, etc., for each com-
bination of vehicle/infotainment system. Audio settings7 SIRIUS radio off. Press RADIO button
Sound stage8 to activate SIRIUS.
There is also a dynamic calibration that takes
into consideration the volume level, radio Equalizer9 Song memory
reception, and the speed of the vehicle.
Volume compensation Add song
The settings that are described in this manual,
Reset all audio settings Song Seek
(Bass, Treble, Equalizer etc.) are only
intended to enable the user to adapt sound Delete song
reproduction to his/her personal tastes. Main FM1/FM2 menu View song memory
FM menu
Channel list information
Infotainment system menus Show radio text
Station name
Show presets 06
Artist
Scan
Title
Advanced settings
Information
Reset all FM settings
Show presets
Audio settings7
Category list

6 High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia only.

7 The audio settings are the same for all infotainment system modes
8 Premium Sound Multimedia only.
9 To reach sub menus, see "Main menu AM.
``

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 219

 06 Infotainment

Introduction

Advanced SIRIUS settings Stop Main iPod menu

Skip options Random iPod menu

Channel skip list Repeat folder Random

Lock options Change subtitles Scan

Channel lock list Change audio track Audio settings7

Unlock all channels Scan

Main USB menu
Temporarily unlock all chan- Audio settings7 USB menu
nels
Play/Pause
Change code Main DVD10 Video menu
DVD Video Menu Stop
Audio settings7
DVD disc menu Random

Play/Pause/Continue Repeat folder

MEDIA menus Select USB device
Stop
Main CD Audio menu Change subtitles
Subtitles
Disc menu
Audio tracks Change audio track
06 Random
Advanced settings Scan
Scan
Angle Audio settings7
Audio settings7
DivX® VOD code
Main AUX menu
Main CD/DVD10 Data menu Audio settings7 AUX menu
Disc menu
AUX input volume
Play/Pause
Audio settings7

7 The audio settings are the same for all infotainment system modes
10 The media player can only play DVDs in models equipped with the optional navigation system.

220
 06 Infotainment

Introduction

TEL menus Receive vCard

Main Bluetooth media menu Memory status

Bluetooth menu Clear phone book
Random Change phone
Change device Remove Bluetooth device
Remove Bluetooth device Phone settings
Scan Discoverable
Bluetooth software version in car Sounds and volume
Audio settings7 Download phone book
Bluetooth software version in
Main BluetoothŸ hands-free menu car
Phone menu
Call options
Call lists
Auto answer
All calls
Voicemail number
Missed calls 06
Disconnect phone
Answered calls
Dialled calls
Call duration
Phone book
Search
New contact
Speed dials

7 The audio settings are the same for all infotainment system modes

221
 06 Infotainment

Radio

General functions Menu navigation currently tuned station will be indicated in

RADIO menu selections can be made from the the list by magnified text.
center console or the steering wheel keypad, 3. Turn TUNE again in either direction to
see page 214 for more information. select a station on the list.
Selecting a station (in wavebands AM/ 4. Confirm by pressing OK/MENU or the
FM1/FM2) thumb wheel on the steering wheel key-
pad.
Automatic tuning
1. Press RADIO, turn TUNE to toggle to the
desired waveband (AM, FM1, etc.) and NOTE
press OK/MENU or the thumb wheel on • This list will only display the frequencies
the steering wheel keypad. of the stations currently being received,
2. Press not a complete list of all radio frequen-
/ keys on the center console
RADIO button for selecting the AM, FM1, cies on the currently selected wave-
control panel or steering wheel keypad to band.
FM2, SAT1* or SAT2* wavebands. search for the next available station.
Keypad (buttons 0-9) • If the signal from the currently tuned
List of stations (in wavebands FM1/FM2 station is weak, this may prevent the
Navigate among the menu alternatives in only) radio from updating the list of stations.
the display by turning TUNE or the thumb The radio automatically compiles a list of the If this occurs, press while the list
06 wheel on the steering wheel keypad. strongest FM stations whose signals are cur- of stations is displayed to switch to
Confirm your selection or access the radio rently being received. This enables you to find manual tuning mode and select a sta-
menus by pressing OK/MENU or the stations when driving in areas where radio sta- tion. If the list of stations is no longer
thumb wheel on the steering wheel key- tions and their frequencies are unfamiliar. displayed, turn TUNE in either direction
pad. to display the list again and press
To access this list:
.
Left/right arrow keys: Press and hold to go 1. Select the desired waveband (FM1 or
to the next/previous strong station, press FM2).
briefly to tune to a preset station. The list will disappear from the display after
2. Turn TUNE slightly in either direction. This several seconds.
displays the list of stations in the area. The
If the station list is no longer displayed, turn
TUNE in either direction and press on the

222 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 06 Infotainment

Radio

keypad on the center console to switch to NOTE been stored on the number key button
manual tuning (or to switch back from manual used.
tuning to the "list of stations" function). The radio is initially set to automatically
search for stations in the area in which you A list of preset stations can be displayed. This
Manual tuning are driving (see the preceding section, "List function can be activated/deactivated in AM/
By default, the list of stations of the strongest of stations"). FM mode in FM menu Show presets or in
stations in the area will be displayed when you However, if you have switched to manual AM menu Show presets
turn TUNE (see the preceding section, "List of tuning (by pressing on the keypad on
stations"). While the list of stations is displayed, the center console while the list of stations Scan
press on the center console keypad to is displayed), the radio will remain in manual The function automatically searches the cur-
switch to manual tuning, which enables you to tuning mode the next time it is switched on. rent waveband for radio stations. When a sta-
select a frequency from the complete list of all To switch back to "list of stations" mode, tion is found, it is played for several seconds
radio frequencies available on the currently turn TUNE one step (to display the full list of before scanning is resumed. While the station
selected waveband. In other words, in manual stations) and press . is playing it can be stored as a preset in the
tuning mode, turning TUNE one step will Please note that if you press when the usual way (see "Manually storing preset sta-
change from e.g., 93.3 to 93.5, etc.). list of stations is not displayed, this will acti- tions").
vate the INFO function.
To manually tune a station: – To start scanning in AM/FM mode, go to
1. Press RADIO. Turn TUNE to scroll to the FM menu Scan or in AM menu
Storing preset stations Scan.
desired waveband (AM, FM1, etc.) and
Ten preset stations can be stored for each 06
press OK/MENU or the thumb wheel on Stop station scanning by pressing EXIT.
waveband (AM, FM1, etc.).
the steering wheel keypad to confirm.
Stored preset stations are selected using the NOTE
2. Turn TUNE or the thumb wheel to select a
buttons on the keypad on the center console.
frequency. Storing a station interrupts the SCAN func-
Manually storing preset stations tion.
1. Tune to a station (see "Selecting a station"
on page 222).
Radio text
2. Press and hold one of the number key but- Some stations transmit information on pro-
tons. gram content, artists, etc. This information can
> The sound will be muted for several sec- be shown on the display.
onds and when it returns, the station has

223
 06 Infotainment

Radio

Activate/deactivate in FM mode under Show developer of a broadcasting technology called ing” (consisting of a frequency's main
radio text. IBOC or In Band On Channel, which refers to channel and any sub-channels that may
the method of transmitting a digital radio also be available on that particular fre-
broadcast signal centered on the same fre- quency. See also the section "Sub-chan-
൅reception (U.S. models
HD Radio൅ nels" below).
quency as the AM or FM station's present fre-
only) quency. • When receiving a digital signal there is no
Introduction The IBOC system is referred to as a "hybrid" multipath disturbance or hisses/pops/
crackling due to outside influences.
since it is both analogue and digital. During
hybrid operation, receivers still continue to How HD broadcasting works
receive the analogue (non-digital) signal. HD HD Radio works similarly to conventional radio
radio receivers incorporate both modes of and broadcasts of this type are available in
reception, where the receiver will automatically many areas of the United States. However,
switch to the analogue signal if the digital signal there are a few key differences:
cannot be decoded or is lost by the receiver.
When you have tuned to an HD Radio station, • Instead of transmitting one analogue sig-
the symbol will appear in the infotain- nal, stations send out a bundled signal –
both analogue and digital.
ment system display. The symbol is "grayed-
out" when HD Radio is in standby mode and • An HD radio receiver can receive both dig-
white when the radio is actively receiving an HD ital and analogue broadcasts. Depending
06 Display when the radio is receiving an HD Radio broadcast. on the terrain and location of the vehicle
broadcast (which will influence the signal strength),
More information about HD radio and IBOC the receiver will determine which signal to
NOTE can be found on Ibiquity's website, receive.
www.hdradio.com and www.ibiquity.com.
HD radio volume may fade in and out at
times due to coverage limitations.
Limitations
Benefits of digital broadcasting • Main channel vs. sub-channels (FM
• Better sound (FM sounds near CD quality only): The main channel is the only channel
HD radio is a brand name registered by the and AM as analogue FM). that can receive in hybrid mode (both dig-
Ibiquity digital corporation1. They are the • Some FM frequencies offer a greater num- ital and analogue). If a frequency has sub-
ber of listening choices through “multicast- channels, they are broadcast in digital

1 HD Radio (TM) technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio(TM) and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity
Digital Corp.

224
 06 Infotainment

Radio

mode only. The main FM channel will be NOTE 3. Turn TUNE and move the marker to HD
displayed as, for example, 93.9 WNYC Radio.
(Volvo uses the symbol ">" to indicate There may be a noticeable difference in
sound quality when a change from analogue 4. Press OK/MENU to turn HD off (the X will
there are sub-channels available) The sub- disappear from the box on the display
FM channels will be displayed as 93.9 – 2 to digital or digital to analogue occurs, such
as: screen).
WNYC, 93.9 - 3 WNYC, etc.
• Volume increase or decrease This will disable the radio's capability to receive
• Reception coverage area: Due to current digital broadcasts but it will continue to func-
IBOC transmitter power limitations, the • Equalizer settings, i.e., Bass/ Midrange/
tion as a conventional (analogue) AM/FM
reception coverage area in digital mode is Treble cut or boost
receiver. Please note that when HD is switched
somewhat more limited than the station's • Time alignment (Digital program mate-
analogue coverage area. Please be aware off, it will not be possible to tune to sub-chan-
rial in extreme cases can be as much as nels (see the following section for a more
that as with any radio broadcast technol- 8 seconds behind the analogue). This
ogy, terrain, time of day, foliage level and detailed explanation of sub-channels).
will noticeable as a "stuttering" effect.
building location can have positive or neg- Repeat steps 2-4 above to reactivate HD (an X
ative effects on radio reception. The above items are dependant on the
broadcaster's equipment settings and do will appear in the box on the display screen).
• Analogue to digital/digital to analogue not indicate a fault in the vehicle's radio Please note that this will only switch HD on or
blending: Analogue to digital blending will receiver or antenna systems. off for the selected waveband (AM, FM1, etc.).
occur as the signal strength reaches a pre-
set threshold in the receiver. This will be Sub-channels
noticeable in fringe areas (areas with weak
Switching HD on or off
reception) and is normal. The factory setting for HD radio is off. If acti- 06
vated when driving through areas with weak
HD signals (fringe areas), you may experience
that the radio repeatedly switches between
analogue/digital and digital/analogue recep-
tion. If this happens, it may be desirable to
switch HD off. To do so:
1. Be sure the infotainment system is
switched on and in one of the AM or FM
modes.
2. Press OK/MENU in the center console
control panel. Example of an HD Radio station with sub-channels

225
 06 Infotainment

Radio

In many cases, a main HD Radio station (FM NOTE SiriusXM൅ satellite radio*
wavebands only) will also have sub-channels
offering additional types of programming or • When the radio has gone into HD mode, Listening to satellite radio
music. it may take several seconds before the The SiriusXM൅ satellite system consists of a
">" symbol (if the current frequency has number of high elevation satellites in geosyn-
In such cases, the “-” symbol will be displayed any sub-channels) is displayed to the chronous orbit.
to the left of the frequency number and a num- left of the frequency. Pressing and hold-
ber will be displayed to the right of the fre- ing the arrow keys for approximately
quency number indicating that the currently 1 second before the main-/sub-channel
NOTE
tuned frequency has at least one sub-channel. icon is displayed will cause the radio to • The digital signals from the satellites are
tune to the next available radio station, line-of-sight, which means that physical
Selecting sub-channels not to the current station's sub-chan- obstructions such as bridges, tunnels,
To listen to a station's sub-channel(s), press nels. etc, may temporarily interfere with sig-
and hold the right arrow key on the center con- nal reception.
sole or on the steering wheel keypad for • When you are no longer in broadcasting
approximately 1 second. To go back to the range of the currently tuned sub-chan- • Avoid any obstructions, such as metal-
nel, No reception will be displayed. lic objects transported on roof racks or
main channel, press and hold the left arrow key
The radio will then be muted and it will in a ski box, or other antennas that may
on the center console or on the steering wheel
be necessary to tune to or search for a impede signals from the SiriusXM൅
keypad for approximately 1 second. To go to
new radio station. satellites.
subchannel 2 (if available), press and hold the
right arrow key on the center console or on the
06 Sub-channels can also be stored as presets,
steering wheel keypad for approximately Selecting SiriusXM൅ radio mode
1 second. see page 223 for information on storing sta- 1. With the infotainment system switched on,
tions. press RADIO.
If you are currently tuned to a frequency's main
channel, pressing and holding the left arrow If you press a sub-channel's preset button, it 2. Turn TUNE or the thumb wheel on the
key for approximately 1 second will tune to the may take up to 6 seconds before the channel steering wheel keypad to scroll to the
next lower radio frequency. becomes audible. If you press this button while desired waveband (SAT1 or SAT2) and
you are out of digital range of the transmitter, press OK/MENU or the thumb wheel on
No reception will be displayed. the steering wheel keypad.
Activating SiriusXM൅ radio
1. Tune to a satellite channel that has no
audio, which means that the channel is

226 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 06 Infotainment

Radio

unsubscribed and the text Subscription 3. Turn TUNE to scroll through the list of cat- NOTE
update needed is displayed (see also egories and press OK/MENU to make a
"Selecting a channel"). selection. • The numbers of skipped or locked
channels will not be displayed.
2. Call SiriusXM൅ at 1-888-539-SIRIUS > The channels in the selected category
(7474). are displayed. • If a channel is locked, the access code
must be entered before the channel can
3. If you tune to an unsubscribed channel, the be selected. See "Unlocking a channel"
NOTE on page 229.
SiriusXM൅ ID will be displayed. The Sir-
iusXM൅ ID can also be accessed from the • The category All is default, which ena-
menu (press OK/MENU, turn TUNE to bles you to scroll through the entire list
Direct channel entry
scroll to the Advanced settings menu, of available satellite channels.
The SiriusXM൅ satellite channels are in numer-
press OK/MENU, scroll to SIRIUS ID and • The channel categories are automati- ical order throughout all of the categories. To
press OK/MENU to display the number). cally updated several times a year. This access a channel directly:
takes approximately two minutes and
4. Updating subscription will be displayed 1. Turn TUNE to access the channel list.
will interrupt normal broadcasting. A
while the subscription is being updated, message will be displayed while updat-
after which the display will return to the 2. Use the keypad buttons to enter the chan-
ing is in progress. Information on chan- nel's number.
normal view. nel or feature updates is available at
www.siriusxm.com. 3. Press OK/MENU. The radio will tune to this
൅ ID
SiriusXM൅ channel, even if it belongs to a category
The SiriusXM൅ ID (sometimes referred to as other than the currently selected one. 06
the Electronic Serial Number or ESN) is Selecting a channel
required when contacting the SiriusXM൅ Call There are three ways of tuning in a channel: Scanning
Center. It is used to activate your account and • Using the left and right arrow keys to go to Scan automatically searches through the list of
when making any account transactions. the next channel. Skipped channels (see satellite channels. The search will only be car-
page 229) will be excluded. ried out in the selected category, see
Selecting a channel category page 223 for more detailed information on the
1. Turn TUNE to display a list of channels. • By turning the TUNE control and selecting
a channel from the list scan function.
2. Press EXIT.
• Through direct channel entry. Storing a channel
A total of 20 satellite channels can be stored;
10 channels each for SAT1 and SAT2, see

227
 06 Infotainment

Radio

page 223 for detailed information on storing 2. Turn TUNE to scroll to Song memory and Radio text
channels. press OK/MENU. This text provides information about the song
• A long press on one of the number keys 3. Turn TUNE to scroll to Song Seek and that is currently playing. To turn this feature on
stores the currently tuned channel on that press OK/MENU to activate or deactivate or off, press OK/MENU and scroll to Show
key. the function. radio text and press OK/MENU to toggle
between on or off.
• A short press on a number key while the
radio is in SAT1 or SAT2 mode will tune to NOTE
the preset satellite channel stored on that Advanced SiriusXM൅ settings
When the song has ended, the radio will
button, regardless of the currently selected This menu function enables you to make set-
remain tuned to the channel on which the
channel category. song was played. tings on certain SiriusXM൅ satellite radio func-
tions. To access this menu:
Searching for and storing songs
The Song Seek function provides notification Song memory 1. Press OK/MENU.
when SiriusXM൅ is broadcasting the songs Up to ten songs can be saved in the system's 2. Scroll to the Advanced settings menu
selected in song memory. Song memory ena- memory.
and press OK/MENU.
bles you to store the name of the song for
To add the currently playing song to the list:
future advance notification when that song is
being played. 1. Press OK/MENU. WARNING
2. Scroll to Song memory and press OK/ Settings should be made when the vehicle
Song seek is at a standstill.
06 When a satellite radio channel plays one of the MENU.
songs stored in the song memory while the 3. Scroll to Add current song to song
Song seek feature is activated, the listener will The following settings can be made in the sat-
memory and press OK/MENU. ellite menus:
be alerted by a text message and an audible
signal. If a new song is selected when the memory is
• Channel skip settings can be made
full, you will be prompted to delete a song from
Press OK/MENU to listen to the song or EXIT the list. To do so: • Channel lock settings can be made
to cancel. • The channel access code can be displayed
1. Press OK/MENU. or changed (see also "Locking a channel"
To activate/deactivate the song seek function:
2. Turn TUNE to scroll through the list of on page 229)
1. Press OK/MENU. songs. Select a song and press OK/ • Your SiriusXM൅ ID can be displayed
MENU to delete it from the list.
• Reset SiriusXM൅ settings

228
 06 Infotainment

Radio

Skip options be skipped the next time the ignition is 7. Press OK/MENU to select Lock all
This function is used to remove a channel from switched on. channels in the category or turn TUNE
the list of available channels. to scroll to a channel and press OK/
Channel lock MENU to select it. Multiple channels can
Skipping a channel Access to specific channels can be restricted be selected.
1. Press OK/MENU. (locked). A locked channel will not provide
audio, song titles, or artist information. The selected channel is now locked and a
2. Scroll to the Advanced settings menu.
checked box will be displayed to indicate this.
3. Press OK/MENU to enter the Skip It will be necessary to enter the channel access
NOTE
options menu. code2 in order to listen to a locked channel.
All channels are initially unlocked.
4. Press OK/MENU to enter Channel skip Unlocking a channel
list. A channel's access code2 is required to unlock
Locking a channel
5. Press OK/MENU to select All categories 1. Press OK/MENU. a channel.
or turn TUNE to scroll to a category and Unlock all channels
press OK/MENU to select it. 2. Scroll to the Advanced settings menu.
This permanently removes all channels from
6. Press OK/MENU to select Skip all 3. Press OK/MENU and turn TUNE to scroll the locked list and makes them available for
channels in the category or turn TUNE to the Lock options menu and press OK/ selection.
to scroll to a channel and press OK/ MENU.
Temporarily unlock all channels
MENU to select or deselect it. Multiple 4. Use the keypad in the central control panel This function will temporarily unlock all chan- 06
channels can be selected. to enter the channel access code2 and nels and make them available for selection. The
Unskip all channels press OK/MENU. channels remain on the locked list and will
This removes all channels from the skip list and 5. Press OK/MENU to enter the Channel again be locked the next time the ignition is
makes them available for selection. switched on.
lock list.
Temporary unskip all channels CHANGE CODE
6. Press OK/MENU to select All categories
This function will temporarily unskip all chan- This function makes it possible to change the
or turn TUNE to scroll to a category and
nels and make them available for selection. The channel access code. The default code is
press OK/MENU to select it.
channels remain on the skip list and will again 0000.
To change the code:

2 The default code is 0000. If you have changed the code and forgotten it, see the section "If you have forgotten the access code."

229
 06 Infotainment

Radio

1. Select Change code in the Lock

options menu and press OK/MENU.
2. Enter the new code and press OK/MENU.
3. Confirm the new code and press OK/
MENU.
If an incorrect code is entered, the text
Incorrect code is displayed.
If you have forgotten the access code:
1. Select SIRIUS ID in the Advanced
settings menu and press OK/MENU.
2. Press and hold the OK/MENU button for
several seconds.
3. The current code will be displayed.
Your Volvo retailer can also provide you with
assistance.

06 ൅ ID
SiriusXM൅
This function displays the 12-digit SiriusXM൅
activation ID.

230
 06 Infotainment

Media player

CD/DVD1 functions OK/MENU: Press to confirm your selec- Playing a disc

tion or access the menus for the currently Press MEDIA ans scroll to Disc. Press OK/
selected source (e.g., Disc) or press the MENU or the thumb wheel on the steering
thumb wheel on the steering wheel key- wheel keypad. If there is a disc in the player, it
pad. will begin playing automatically. Otherwise,
Left/right arrow keys: Fast back/forward Insert disc will be displayed. Insert the disc
and change track or chapter2. into the slot with the text side upward and it will
begin playing automatically.
The media player supports and can play the
following main types of discs and files: If a disc with audio/video files is inserted, its
folder structure will be read by the system. It
• Purchased CDs (CD Audio)
may take several seconds until the disc begins
• Home-burned CDs with audio and /or playing, depending on its quality and the
video files amount of information it contains.
Center console control panel • Home-burned DVDs with audio and /or
Disc slot video files Disc eject
For reasons of traffic safety, an ejected disc
MEDIA button, the most recently used
• Purchased DVDs
must be removed within 12 seconds or it will
active source will start when MEDIA is For a list of compatible formats, see be automatically drawn back into the slot.
pressed. Pressing this key from Media page 234.
mode's main view will display a shortcut Media menu selections can be made from the Pause 06
menu. center console or the steering wheel keypad. When the infotainment system volume is
For more information about the infotainment turned off completely or the sound is muted,
Eject
menu system, see page 214. the player will pause. It will resume playing
Keypad when the volume is turned up again or if the
For general information regarding menu navi- sound is unmuted. Pause is also available via
TUNE:Turn to navigate among menu gation, see page 216 and menu overview see the menu system, select Play/Pause.
selections/folders/tracks (or turn the page 219.
thumb wheel on the steering wheel key-
pad).

1 The media player can only play DVDs in models equipped with the optional navigation system.
2 DVDs only
``

231
 06 Infotainment

Media player

Navigating a disc and playing tracks When a file has been played, the player will DVD videos
continue to play the rest of the files (of the same For information, see page 231.
CD audio discs
type) in the current folder. When all of the files
Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist and to Fast forward/reverse
in the folder have been played, the player will
navigate in this list. Press OK/MENU to con-
automatically go to the next folder and play the Press and hold the / buttons to fast
firm a choice and begin listening. Press EXIT
files in it (unless Repeat folder is activated). forward/reverse. This is done at one speed for
to cancel. Press and hold EXIT to return to the
The system automatically detects and changes audio files but several speeds can be chosen
playlist's root level.
settings if a disc containing only audio or only for video files. Press the / buttons sev-
The / buttons on the center console or video files is inserted in the player and will play eral times to increase the speed. Release the
steering wheel keypad can also be used to these files. However, the system will not button to return to normal viewing speed.
change tracks. change settings if a disc containing both audio
and video files is inserted and the player will Scan3
Home-burned CD/DVD audio/video files
continue to play the current type of file. This function plays the first ten seconds of
Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist and to
each track/audio file. To start scanning:
navigate in this list. Press OK/MENU to con-
firm a choice and begin listening. Use EXIT to NOTE 1. Press OK/MENU.
stop or to go back in the disc's folder structure.
Video images will only be visible when the 2. Scroll to Scan.
Press and hold EXIT to return to the playlist's vehicle is not moving. When the vehicle is
root level. > The first ten seconds of each track/
traveling faster than approximately 4 mph audio file will be played.
The / buttons on the center console or (6 km/h), No visual media available while
06 driving will be displayed. Sound from the 3. Stop scanning by pressing EXIT. The cur-
steering wheel keypad* can also be used to film will still be audible and video images will rent track/audio file will continue playing.
change audio/video files. be shown again when the vehicle stops.
The following symbols are used in the display: Random3
This function plays the tracks in random order
• - audio files NOTE (shuffle). The random tracks/sound files can be
• - video files Some copy protected audio files or home- scrolled through in the normal way. To listen to
burned audio files may not be read by the tracks in random order:
• - folders player.
1. Press OK/MENU,

3 Not video DVDs

232 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 06 Infotainment

Media player

2. Scroll to Random NOTE currently playing). Press OK/MENU to choose

a chapter and return to the normal view in the
3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate Video images will only be visible when the display (if a film was playing, it will resume).
the random play function. vehicle is not moving. When the vehicle is
Press EXIT to access the list of titles.
traveling faster than approximately 4 mph
Press the / buttons on the center con- (6 km/h), No visual media available while In the list of titles, turn TUNE to make a selec-
sole or steering wheel keypad to change driving will be displayed. Sound from the tion and press OK/MENU to confirm. This also
tracks/audio files. film will still be audible and video images will returns you to the list of chapters. Press EXIT
be shown again when the vehicle stops. to cancel and return to the normal view (without
Repeat folder4
having made a selection).
This function makes it possible to play files in
Navigating in a DVD's menus It is also possible to change chapters by press-
a folder repeatedly. When the last file has been
played, the first file will begin again. To acti- ing / on the center console control
vate: panel or on the steering wheel keypad.
1. Press OK/MENU.
Advanced settings
2. Turn TUNE to Repeat folder.
Angle
3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate If the DVD supports this function, it is possible
the function. to select a camera angle for a certain scene.
This can be done in DVD mode under DVD disc
Playing video DVDs menu Advanced settings Angle. 06
Play
DivXŸ Video On Demand
When playing a video DVD, a disc menu may
The media player can be registered to play
appear on the display, giving you access to Buttons in the center console control panel, DivX VOD files from home-burned discs or
extra functions and settings such as choice of shown above, are used to navigate in a DVD's USB. The registration code can be found by
subtitle and language, scene selection, etc. menus. pressing the MY CAR button, and going to
Changing chapters or title Settings Information DivX® VOD
TurnTUNE to access the list of chapters and code. See page 189 for more information
navigate in this list (the film will pause if it is about the menu system.

4 Applies to audio/video files on home-burned discs/USB only.

233
 06 Infotainment

Media player

See also www.divx.com/vod for more informa- NOTE

tion.
Dual format (double-sided discs) such as
Screen settings DVD Plus or CD-DVD are thicker than nor-
Screen settings can be made (when the vehicle mal discs and may not play in your infotain-
is not moving) for: ment system.
If a disc containing both CDDA and MP3
• Brightness tracks is played, all MP3 tracks will be
• Contrast ignored.
1. Press OK/MENU and choose Image
settings and confirm by pressing OK/ Audio CD-Audio, mp3, wma,
MENU. formats aac, m4a
2. Turn TUNE to the desired setting and
Video for- CD-Video, DVD-Video, divx,
press OK/MENU.
mats avi, asf
3. Change the setting by turning TUNE and
confirm the change by pressing OK/
MENU.
Press OK/MENU or EXIT to return to the
06 screen settings list.
To return to the factory settings, select Reset .

Compatible formats
The media player can play a number of differ-
ent types of files and disc formats, and is com-
patible with the formats listed in the following
table.

234
 06 Infotainment

AUX/USB sockets

Connecting external devices 1. Press MEDIA and turn TUNE to select the NOTE
desired source (iPod, USB or AUX). Press
OK/MENU. • The system supports a number of
iPodŸ models produced in 2005 or later.
> For example, if a USB device has been
selected, the text Connect USB will be • In order to help avoid damage to the
displayed. USB socket, it will be switched off if
there is a short circuit or if the con-
2. Connect the device to one of the sockets nected device uses too much current
in the center console storage compartment (which can happen if the device does
(see the illustration). not comply with the USB standard). The
The text Reading USB will be displayed while USB socket will reactivate the next time
the ignition is switched on if the problem
the system reads the device's folders. This may
no longer exists. If the problem persists,
take a short time, depending on the folder
contact a trained and authorized Volvo
Sockets for auxiliary devices in the storage com- structure and the number of files.
service technician.
partment between the front seats
When this information has been loaded, track
An auxiliary device, such as an iPodŸ or MP3 information will be displayed and a track can Media menu selections can be made from the
player can be connected to the infotainment be selected. center console or the steering wheel keypad,
system via one of the sockets in the center see page 214 for more information.
console storage compartment. A device con-
nected to the USB socket can be operated Navigating and playing tracks1 06
using the vehicle's infotainment system con- Turn TUNE to access the device's playlist and
trols. to navigate in this list. Press OK/MENU to
An iPodŸ or an MP3 player with rechargeable either select a sub-folder or confirm a choice
batteries will also be charged if the device is and begin playback. Press EXIT to cancel and
connected to the USB socket (if the vehicle's exit the playlist or to go back in the folder struc-
ignition is on or if the engine is running). ture. Press and hold EXIT to go to the highest
level in the playlist.
To connect a device:

1 USB and iPodŸ only

235
 06 Infotainment

AUX/USB sockets

The / buttons on the center console or Random1 External sound sources

steering wheel keypad can also be used to For information, see page 232. USB flash drive
change tracks/files. To simplify the use of a USB flash drive, it is
Search1
The following symbols are used in the display: advisable to only store music files on the drive.
The keypad in the center console can be used
It will take considerably longer for the system
• - audio files to search for a file in the currently selected
to index the files on the drive if it contains any-
folder.
• - video files thing other than compatible music files.
Start the search by either turning TUNE (to
• - folders access the folders) or by pressing one of the NOTE
When a file has been played, the player will character keys to enter a letter/number. Pos-
continue to play the rest of the files (of the same sible search results will be displayed as char- • The system supports removable media
acters are entered. that uses the USB 2.0 standard and the
type) in the current folder. When all of the files
FAT32 file system. It can index up to
in the folder have been played, the player will Play the file by pressing OK/MENU. 1,000 folders and a maximum of 254
automatically go to the next folder1 (unless sub-folders/files for each folder. How-
Repeat folder is activated) and play the files Repeat2 ever, the highest folder level can sup-
in it. This function makes it possible to play files in port up to 1,000 sub-folders/files.
The system automatically detects and changes a folder repeatedly. When the last file has been
played, the first file will begin again. For infor-
• When using a longer type of USB
settings if a device containing only audio or device, connecting it with a USB
only video files is connected to the USB socket mation, see page 233. adapter cable will help reduce mechan-
06
and will play these files. However, the system ical wear on the USB socket and on the
Pause
will not change settings if the device contains device.
When the infotainment system volume is
both audio and video files and will continue to
turned off completely or the sound is muted,
play the current type of file. USB hub
the player will pause. It will resume playing
Fast forward/reverse1 when the volume is turned up again or if the A USB hub can be connected to the USB
sound is unmuted. Pause is also available via socket, making it possible to connect several
For information, see page 232.
the menu system, select Play/Pause. USB devices at the same time. To select one
Scan1 of the devices, go to the menu USB menu
For information, see page 232. Select USB device

1 USB and iPodŸ only

2 USB only

236
 06 Infotainment

AUX/USB sockets

MP3 player
Many MP3 players have a file indexing system
that is not supported by the vehicle's infotain-
ment system. In order to use an MP3 player,
the system must be set to USB Removable
device/Mass Storage Device.
iPodŸ
An iPodŸ receives current and its battery is
charged through the USB cable.
The system will only play audio files from an
iPodŸ.

NOTE
When an iPodŸ is used as a sound source,
the vehicle's infotainment system has a
menu structure similar to the one in the
iPodŸ. See the iPod's manual for detailed
information.
06
Compatible file formats via the USB
socket
The following audio and video files are suppor-
ted by the system when playing a device con-
nected to the USB socket.

Audio formats mp3, wma, aac,

m4a

Video formats divx, avi, asf

237
 06 Infotainment

BluetoothŸ media

Introduction The vehicle's media player can only play audio EXIT: Press to go back in the menu struc-
The vehicle's media player is equipped with files through the BluetoothŸ function. ture or cancel a function.
BluetoothŸ and can play streaming audio files Left/right arrow keys: Short press: change
from a BluetoothŸ device such as a cell phone Overview tracks. Long press: fast forward/reverse
or mp3 player. Navigation and control of the within a track. The arrow keys on the steer-
device can be done through the vehicle's cen- ing wheel keypad can be used in the same
ter console control panel or the steering wheel way.
keypad. On certain external devices, it is also
possible to change tracks from the device. Pairing and connecting an external
device
NOTE Before an external device can be connected, it
Any Bluetooth cell phones used must sup- must be paired to the infotainment system. The
port Audio/Video Remote Control Profile procedure for connecting an external device
(AVRCP) and Advanced Audio Distribution varies, depending whether or not the device
Profile (A2DP). The phone must use AVRCP has previously been paired to the infotainment
version 1.3 and A2DP 1.2. If older versions
system. A maximum of 10 external devices can
of these standards are used, certain fea- Center console control panel
tures (e.g., scan or random) may not func- be paired and each device only needs to be
tion. VOL: Volume control paired once. To pair a device, see page 241.
06 Not all cell phones are fully compatible with MEDIA button, the most recently used
the vehicle's Bluetooth system. A list of active source will start when MEDIA is Automatic connection
compatible phones is available at you Volvo pressed. Pressing this key from Media When the BluetoothŸ function is active and the
retailer or at www.volvocars.us.
mode's main view will display a shortcut most recently used device is within range, it is
menu. automatically connected. When the infotain-
Menu navigation TUNE: Turn to navigate among menu alter- ment system searches for the most recently
Choices can be made in the Bluetooth menus natives and folders shown in the display. used device, its name is shown in the display.
from the center console control panel or the To connect another paired device, press EXIT.
steering wheel keypad. For additional informa- OK/MENU: Press to confirm your selec- See the following section for information about
tion about navigating the various menus, see tion or access the menus. switching to another device.
page 214.

238
 06 Infotainment

BluetoothŸ media

Switching to another device Disconnecting an external device Scanning audio files on an external
It is possible to switch among paired The external device is automatically discon- device1
BluetoothŸ devices that are in the vehicle. To nected from the infotainment system if it is This function plays the first ten seconds of
do so: moved out of range. each audio file. This function can be activated/
1. Press MEDIA,scroll to Bluetooth and deactivated under: Bluetooth menu Scan.
press the thumb wheel on the steering Removing a paired device Scanning can be canceled by pressing EXIT.
wheel keypad or OK/MENU. 1. In Bluetooth mode, press OK/MENU.
2. Be sure the BluetoothŸ device is discover- 2. Scroll to Remove Bluetooth device and BluetoothŸ version information
able (refer to its user manual if necessary). press the thumb wheel or OK/MENU. This feature offers information about the
BluetoothŸ version installed in the vehicle's
3. Press the thumb wheel or OK/MENU. 3. Scroll to the device to be removed by turn-
infotainment system. This information can be
ing the thumb wheel or TUNE and confirm
4. Turn the thumb wheel or TUNE to Change found under Bluetooth menu Bluetooth
by pressing the thumb wheel or OK/
device and confirm by pressing the thumb software version in car.
MENU.
wheel or OK/MENU.
> A question asking if you would like to
> After several seconds, the names of any
remove the device will be displayed.
paired external devices will be dis-
played. 4. Press the thumb wheel or OK/MENU to
confirm or EXIT to cancel.
5. Scroll to the device to be connected and
06
press the thumb wheel or OK/MENU.
> The device will be connected. Random1
This function plays the audio files on the exter-
Audio files can now be selected using the
nal device in random order (shuffle). This func-
/ buttons in the center console or on
tion can be activated/deactivated under:
the steering wheel keypad.
Bluetooth menu Random
Press the / buttons on the center con-
sole or steering wheel keypad to change
tracks.

1 Function is not supported on all cell phones.

239
 06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

Introduction Compliance Canada: IC 700BIAM2101

This feature makes it possible to set up a wire- FCC/IC common sentence Menu navigation
less connection between a BluetoothŸ-ena- This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules TEL menu selections can be made from the
bled cell phone or other device and the vehi- and RSS-Gen of IC Rules. Operation is subject center console or the steering wheel keypad.
cle’s infotainment system. This enables the to the following two conditions: (1) this device For additional information about navigating the
infotainment system to function as a hands- may not cause interference, and (2) this device various menus, see page 214.
free connection and allows you to remote-con- must accept any interference, including inter-
trol a number of the phone’s functions. The ference that may cause undesired operation of
microphone used by this system is located this device.
near the driver's side sun visor (2). The buttons
and other controls on the cell phone can USA: FCC ID A269ZUA130
always be used regardless of whether or not FCC WARNING
the phone is connected to the hands-free sys-
Changes or modifications not expressly
tem.
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
NOTE the equipment.
Not all cell phones are fully compatible with IC RSS-Gen
the hands-free system. A list of compatible This equipment complies with FCC/IC radia-
phones is available at your Volvo retailer or System overview
06 at www.volvocars.us tion exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled
equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency Cell phone
(RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to
WARNING OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency Location of the microphone

Never use the hands-free feature or any

(RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very Steering wheel keypad
other device in your vehicle in a way that low levels of RF energy that it deemed to com-
distracts you from the task of driving safely. ply without maximum permissive exposure Center console control panel and display
Distraction can lead to a serious accident. evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it
should be installed and operated with at least
8 in. (20 cm) and more between the radiator
and person’s body (excluding extremities:
hands, wrists, feet and ankles).

240
 06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

Bluetooth® functions in the center wheel keypad can be used in the same Pairing (connecting) external
console control panel way. Bluetooth® devices
OK/MENU: Press to answer an incoming A maximum of 10 cell phones or other devices
call, confirm your selection or access the can be paired with the hands-free system. Pair-
phone menus. Incoming calls can also be ing only needs to be done once for each phone.
answered by pressing the thumb wheel on After pairing, the cell phone no longer needs to
the steering wheel keypad. be in sight or discoverable.
EXIT: Press to end or reject calls, erase Two Bluetooth® devices (e.g., a phone and an
characters that have been entered, end an iPod®) can be active at the same. However, two
ongoing function and goes back in the phones cannot be used at the same time to
menus. This button on the steering wheel make calls.
keypad can also be used in the same way.
There are two ways of pairing a cell phone to
the hands-free system for the first time:
Control panel in the center console. Getting started
Method 1: Search for the external device using
Use the controls on the steering wheel keypad
Keypad containing letters and numbers for the infotainment menus
and in the center console to access, navigate
dialing numbers, adding phone book
and make selections in the hands-free sys- 1. Activate the cell phone’s BluetoothŸ func-
entries, etc.
tem’s menus. tion to make it discoverable (refer to the
TEL: Press this button to activate/deacti- phone’s user manual if necessary) or go to 06
vate the BluetoothŸ function. If TEL is Activation www.volvocars.com
already active, pressing this button again A short press on the TEL button in the center
will display a shortcut menu with com- console activates the Bluetooth® hands-free 2. Press TEL.
monly used functions. system. If the system is already activated when > The infotainment system will search for
the button is pressed, a shortcut menu will be previously paired devices.
TUNE: From TEL mode's normal view, turn
clockwise to display the phone book or displayed. The symbol at the upper right 3. Press the thumb wheel on the steering
counterclockwise for the phone list. It can of the display indicates that the hands-free wheel keypad or OK/MENU and select
also be used for navigating in displayed system is active. Add phone.1
menus. The thumb wheel in the steering

1 Select Change phone if the cell phone or device has already been paired with the infotainment system. If several phones or devices have already been paired, their names will also be displayed.
Scroll to the device to be connected and press the thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad or OK/MENU.
``

241
 06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

4. With the cell phone in discoverable mode, 2. Make the vehicle discoverable by pressing Connect manually
press OK/MENU. the thumb wheel or OK/MENU and select- To connect a phone other than the one that
> The infotainment system will search for ing Phone settings Discoverable. was most recently connected or to switch
cell phones or devices that are in range, between cell phones that are already paired
3. Search for the vehicle using the phone or
which takes approximately 30 seconds. with the hands-free system, go to Phone
external device's BluetoothŸ function.
Any phones detected will be displayed menu Change phone.
Refer to its user manual if necessary.
using their BluetoothŸ names. The
hands-free system’s BluetoothŸ name 4. Select My Volvo Car on the phone or Changing phones or devices
will appear in the cell phone’s display as external device’s screen and follow the More than one device can be used in the vehi-
My Volvo Car. directions provided. cle as long as this device has been paired. To
do so, see page 241.
5. Turn the thumb wheel or TUNE to select 5. Enter a PIN code of your choice in the
one of the cell phones shown in the center external device and press its button to pair Changing devices:
console display and press the thumb wheel the device. When prompted, enter the 1. Check that the external device is discov-
or OK/MENU. same PIN code in the vehicle using the erable.
center console keypad.
6. Using the cell phone’s keypad, enter the 2. Press TEL and select Change phone.
digits (PIN code) shown in the center con- 6. Pair My Volvo Car from the external
> The infotainment system will search for
sole display and press the button on the device.
previously paired devices. Those that
cell phone used to confirm a choice. When the external device has been paired, its are detected will be displayed on the
06 The external device is now paired and can be BluetoothŸ name appear in the center console screen.
controlled from the infotainment system. display. This device can now be controlled
3. Select the desired device by turning the
from the infotainment system.
If the connection failed: Press EXIT and con- thumb wheel or TUNE and confirm by
nect with method 2 below. Connect automatically pressing the thumb wheel or OK/MENU.
When the hands-free system is active and the > The device will be connected.
Method 2: Search for the vehicle using the
most recently connected cell phone is within
external device’s BluetoothŸ function. Making a call
range, it will be connected automatically. If this
1. Press TEL. If a phone or external device is phone is not within range, the hands-free sys- 1. Ensure that is shown at the top of the
already connected, disconnect it. tem will attempt to connect one of the other center console display and that the hands-
> The BluetoothŸ function will search for paired cell phones. When the infotainment sys- free function is in telephone mode.
previously paired devices. tem searches for the most recently connected
phone, its name appears in the display.

242
 06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

2. Dial the desired phone number using the Even if the cell phone has been disconnected Call settings
center console keypad or use the speed manually, some phones may reconnect auto- While a call is in progress, press OK/MENU or
dial function (see page 247). In normal matically, for example when a new call is initi- the thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad
view (see page see page 213 for informa- ated. to access the following functions:
tion about the various display views), it is
also possible to turn TUNE clockwise to Removing a paired device • Mute: mute the infotainment system’s
A paired phone or device can be removed from microphone.
access the phone book and then counter-
clockwise for the call list. See page 247 for the list. To do so: • Mobile phone: transfer the call from
more information about the phone book. hands-free to the cell phone. On certain
1. Press TEL.
cell phones, the connection will be broken,
3. Press the thumb wheel or OK/MENU. 2. Select Phone menu Remove which is normal. The hands-free function
End or reject a call by pressing EXIT. Bluetooth device. will ask if you would like to reconnect.
• Dial number: dial a third party during an
Disconnecting the cell phone ongoing call using the keypad (the current
The cell phone is automatically disconnected Handling calls
call will be put on hold).
from the infotainment system if it is moved out Incoming calls
of range. Call lists
– Press OK/MENU (or the thumb wheel on
Call lists are copied to the hands-free function
The cell phone can be manually disconnected the steering wheel keypad) to answer a
each time a cell phone is connected and the
from the hands-free system by pressing and call, even if the infotainment system is cur-
lists are updated while the phone is connected.
holding TEL or in phone mode, going to Phone rently in another mode (e.g., RADIO or 06
In normal view, turn TUNE counter-clockwise
menu Disconnect phone. See also page MEDIA).
to see the All calls list.
244 for more information about connections. Press EXIT to reject a call.
In phone mode, the various call lists can be
The hands-free system is also deactivated displayed in Phone menu Call lists:
Auto answer
when the ignition is switched off (or if the
This function means that incoming calls will be
driver’s door is opened). • All calls
answered automatically. Activate or deactivate
When the cell phone is disconnected from the the function in the menu system under Phone • Missed calls
hands-free system, a call in progress can be menu Call options Auto answer. • Answered calls
continued using the cell phone’s own speaker
• Dialled calls (certain cell phones show
and microphone. this list in reverse order)
• Call duration
``

243
 06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

If no number has been stored, this menu can Ringing volume Phone book
be accessed by pressing and holding 1. In phone mode, go to Phone menu Phone The hands-free system uses two phone books
settings Sounds and volume Ring (one with the cell phone's list of contacts and
Voice mail
volume and adjust the volume by turning one with contacts saved directly in the info-
In normal view, a speed dial number for voice
VOL. Save the setting by pressing EXIT. tainment system), which are combined to form
mail can be programmed and accessed by
one phone book.
pressing and holding 1.
Ringing tones
The number for voice mail can be changed in
• The infotainment system downloads the
The hands-free system’s integrated ringing phone book from a connected cell phone.
phone mode in Phone menu Call options tones can be selected in Phone menu This phone book will only be displayed
Voicemail number Change number. Phone settings Sounds and volume when this cell phone is connected to the
Ring signals Ring signal 1, etc. hands-free system.
Sound settings • The infotainment system also has an inte-
NOTE grated phone book made up of contacts
Call volume that have been saved in the system,
Call volume can be only be adjusted during a The connected cell phone’s ring tone may regardless of which cell phone is currently
not be switched off when one of the hands- connected when the contact is saved.
call. Use the buttons in the steering wheel key-
free system's ringing tones is used. These contacts will be displayed regard-
pad or the infotainment system’s VOL control.
less of the cell phone that is connected. If
Infotainment system volume If you prefer to use the connected cell phone’s a contact has been saved in the infotain-
06 If no phone call is in progress, volume for the ring tone2, go to Phone menu Phone ment system, the symbol will be dis-
infotainment system can be adjusted in the settings Sounds and volume Ring played next to it.
normal way with the infotainment system's
signals Mobile phone ring signal.
VOL control or from the steering wheel keypad.
Infotainment system sound can be automati-
cally muted when a phone call is received in
Phone menu Phone settings Sounds
and volume Mute radio/media.

2 Not supported by all cell phones.

244
 06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

NOTE Contact shortcuts Buttons in the center console

A quick way of searching the phone book for Button Function
Changes made from the infotainment sys- contacts in normal view is to turn TUNE clock-
tem to a contact in the cell phone's phone
book will result in a new contact being wise to access the phone book and then coun- Space . , - ? @ : ; / ( ) 1
added to the infotainment system's phone ter-clockwise to select a contact from the list.
book. However, this contact will not be Press OK/MENU to call. ABCÅÄÆÀÇ2
saved in the cell phone's phone book. The
Each name in the phone book has a default
infotainment system's display will show
duplicate contacts with different icons. phone number. If the symbol is displayed to DEFÈÉ3
the right of it, this indicates that there are addi-
Please also note that if a speed dial number
is saved or if a contact's information is edi- tional phone numbers for this contact. To use
GHIÌ4
ted, this will result in a new contact in the a phone number other than the default one,
infotainment system's phone book. press the button on the center console
JKL5
control panel. Turn TUNE to select a different
The symbol must be displayed before phone number and press OK/MENU to call.
MNOÖØÑÒ6
the phone book can be used and the hands- It is also possible to search for a contact by
free function must be in phone mode. using the center console keypad to enter the
first letter(s) of the contact's name (see also the PQRSß7
The infotainment system saves a copy of each
following table "Buttons in the center console"
paired cell phone's phone book. This phone
for each button's function). TUVÜÙ8 06
book can be copied each time the phone is
connected. The list of contacts can also be accessed from
normal view by pressing and holding the button WXYZ9
– Activate/deactivate this function in phone
on the center console keypad with the first let-
mode in Phone menu Phone settings
ter of the contact's name. For example, press- Shift between upper and lower
Download phone book. ing and holding button 6 would provide direct case
If the phone book contains information about access to the section of the list with contacts
someone who is trying to call you, this infor- whose names begin with M. +0pw
mation will be shown in the display.
#*

245
 06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

Searching for contacts 3. To switch from letter entry mode to the Adding a new contact
entry mode for numbers or special charac-
ters, or to go to the phone book, turn
TUNE to one of the selections (see the
explanation in the following table) in the list
for switching character entry mode (2) and
press OK/MENU.

Character entry modes

123/ Toggle between letters and num-
ABC bers by pressing OK/MENU.

More Switch to special characters by

Searching for contacts using the text wheel pressing OK/MENU. Enter the name of a new contact
List of characters Switch between character entry modes
This leads to the phone book (3).
(see the following table)
Switch between character entry modes Turn TUNE to select a contact
(see the following table) and press OK/MENU to display Character entry field
the contact's information. New contacts can be added in phone mode in
Phone book (list of contacts)
06 Phone menu Phone book New
To search for or edit a contact in phone mode, Press EXIT briefly to erase a single character. contact.
go to Phone menu Phone book Press and hold EXIT to erase all of the char-
Search. acters that have been entered. 1. When Name is highlighted, press OK/
MENU to go to the character entry mode
1. Turn TUNE to the desired letter and press If a number button on the center console is (see the illustration).
OK/MENU to confirm. The number/letter pressed while the text wheel is displayed, a list
keys on the center console can also be of characters (1) will be displayed. Briefly press 2. Turn TUNE to the desired letter and press
used. the button once to enter its first letter, twice to OK/MENU to confirm. The number/letter
enter the second letter, etc. Continue to press keys on the center console can also be
2. Continue to the next letter, etc. The results used.
of the search will be displayed in the phone the button to display other characters. Con-
book (3). tinue with the next character, etc.
To enter a number, press and hold the button.

246
 06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

3. Continue to the next letter, etc. The name Toggle between upper and lower is activated in Phone menu Phone book
entered will be displayed in the character case letters by pressing OK/ Receive vCard.
entry field (2). MENU.
4. To switch from letter entry mode to the Memory status
entry mode for numbers or special charac- Press OK/MENU and the cursor In phone mode, the memory status of the info-
ters, or to toggle between upper and lower will move to the character entry tainment system's phone book and the con-
case letters, etc., turn TUNE to one of the field (2) at the top of the display. nected cell phone's phone book can be seen
selections (see the explanation in the fol- The cursor can now be moved by in Phone menu Phone book Memory
lowing table) in the list (1) and press OK/ turning TUNE to a position where status.
MENU. new characters can be entered
or deleted by pressing EXIT. In Clearing the phone book
When you have finished entering the name, order to add characters, return to In phone mode, all entries in the infotainment
select OK in the list in the display (1) and press text entry mode by pressing OK/ system's phone book can be cleared in Phone
OK/MENU. Continue by entering the phone MENU. menu Phone book Clear phone book.
number in the same way.
When you have entered the phone number, Speed dial NOTE
press OK/MENU and select a tag for the num- Speed dial numbers can be added in phone
mode in Phone menu Phone book Clearing the entries in the infotainment sys-
ber (Mobile phone, Home, Work or General).
tem's phone book does not delete entries in
Press OK/MENU to confirm. Speed dial. the cell phone's phone book.
06
When all of the contact's information has been To use speed dial to make a call in phone
entered, select Save contact in the menu to mode, press a button on the center console
save. keypad followed by OK/MENU. If a contact BluetoothŸ version information
has not been saved on the speed dial number For information about the BluetoothŸ version
123/ Toggle between letters and num- used, you will be prompted to save a contact installed in the vehicle, go to Phone menu
ABC bers by pressing OK/MENU. on the number selected. Phone settings Bluetooth software
Accept vCards version in car.
More Switch to special characters by
pressing OK/MENU. vCards from other cell phones can be added to
the infotainment system's phone book. To ena-
OK Save and return to Add contact ble this feature, put the infotainment system in
by pressing OK/MENU. discoverable mode for BluetoothŸ. The feature

247
 06 Infotainment

Cell phone voice control

Introduction WARNING Languages

The infotainment system's voice control fea-
As the driver, you have full responsibility for
ture1 enables the driver to voice-activate cer- operating the vehicle safely and adhering to
tain functions in a BluetoothŸ-connected cell all applicable traffic regulations.
phone or the navigation system.
The voice control feature provides access to a
NOTE number of functions in the BluetoothŸ hands-
• The information in this section applies free and navigation systems while allowing you
to using voice commands to operate a to keep your hands on the steering wheel. Input
BluetoothŸ-connected cell phone. is in dialogue form using spoken commands
See also the section "BluetoothŸ from the user and verbal prompts from the sys-
hands-free connection" beginning on tem. Voice control uses the same microphone
page 240 for detailed information about as the BluetoothŸ hands-free system (see the List of languages.
using a cell phone with the vehicle's illustration on page 240) and system prompts
infotainment system. are provided through the infotainment sys- Voice control is not available for all languages.
tem's front speakers. The available languages are indicated by the
• The navigation system has a separate
icon. The language can be changed in the
user's guide containing information
about voice commands for operating MY CAR menu system under MY CAR
that system. Settings System options Language.
06

Voice commands offer convenience and help

avoid distractions so that you can concentrate
on driving and focus your attention on road and
traffic conditions.

1 Available in vehicles equipped with the optional Volvo Navigation System only

248
 06 Infotainment

Cell phone voice control

Getting started • When giving commands, speak at your This feature can be accessed by pressing the
usual speed and in a normal tone of voice MY CAR button in the center console and turn-
after the tone ing TUNE.
• The vehicle's doors, windows and moon- Tutorial
roof should be closed when using the voice
The tutorial feature can be started in two ways:
control system
• Avoid background noises in the cabin NOTE
when using the system
The tutorial feature can only be started when
the vehicle is parked and the parking brake
NOTE is applied.
If you are uncertain of the commands that
you can use, saying "help" will prompt the
system to provide a number of commands • By pressing the voice control button and
Voice control button (1) on the steering wheel. that can be used in a specific situation. saying "Voice tutorial."

Activating the system Voice control commands can be cancelled • By pressing MY CAR and going to
by: Settings Voice settings Voice
Before any phone voice commands can be
tutorial. Press OK/MENU to begin the
used, a BluetoothŸ-enabled cell phone must • Saying "cancel"
tutorial lesson.
be paired with the infotainment system. If a • Not speaking
phone command is given, the system will The tutorial is divided into three lessons, which
• Pressing and holding the voice control take a total of approximately 5 minutes to com- 06
inform you If there is no cell phone paired. See
button plete.
page 241 for information on pairing a cell
phone. • Pressing EXIT or one of the mode but- By default, the system will begin with the first
tons (RADIO, MEDIA, etc.).
Press the voice control button (1 in the illustra- lesson. To skip to the next lesson, press the
tion) to activate the system and initiate a com- voice control button and say "next." Go back
mand dialogue. The system will display com- Voice control support feature to a previous lesson by saying "previous."
monly used commands on the screen when the • Tutorial: A feature that helps acquaint you Press and hold the voice control button to exit
button has been pressed. with the system and the procedure for giv-
the tutorial.
ing commands.
While using the voice control system, keep the
following points in mind:

249
 06 Infotainment

Cell phone voice control

Voice output volume The following is a list of features that can be User action
Press MY CAR and go to Settings Voice voice-controlled with a BluetoothŸ-connected Begin saying the digits in the phone number. If
settings Voice output volume. Press OK/ cell phone. you say several digits and pause, the system
MENU and turn TUNE to raise or lower the will repeat them and prompt you by saying
Shortcuts "Continue."
volume. Press EXIT to save the change and Shortcut commands for using the phone can
exit the menu. be found in the MY CAR menu system, under Continue saying the digits. When you have fin-
ished, complete the command by saying
Settings Voice settings Voice
Using voice commands "Dial."
command list Phone commands and
The driver initiates a voice command dialogue General commands. See page 189 for more • You can also change the number by using
by pressing the voice control button (see the information on the menu system. the commands "Correction" (which dele-
illustration on page 249). tes the last group of digits spoken) or
Dialing a number "Delete" (which will erase the entire phone
When a dialogue has been initiated, commonly number).
The system understands the digits zero to nine.
used commands will be shown in the display.
These numbers can be spoken individually, in
Grayed-out texts or texts in parentheses are Dialing from a call list
groups of several digits at a time, or the entire
not part of the spoken command. The dialogue below enables you make a call
number can be given at once. Numbers above
from one of your cell phone's call lists.
Once you become familiar with the system, you nine will not be recognized.
can speed up the command dialogue by briefly The user initiates the dialogue by saying:
The following is an example of a voice com-
pressing the voice control button to skip Phone > dial from call list
06 mand dialogue. The system's response may
prompts from the system.
vary depending on the situation. or
Commands can be given in several ways.
The user initiates the dialogue by saying: Phone dial from call list
For example, the command "Phone call con-
tact" can be spoken as: Phone > dial number Continue by responding to the system's
or prompts.
• "Phone > Call contact"—say "Phone," wait
for a system response, and then continue Phone dial number Calling a contact
by saying "Call contact." The dialogue below enables you to call the pre-
System response
• "Phone call contact"—give the entire com- Number please defined contacts in your cell phone. See the
mand at one time phone's user's guide if necessary.

250
 06 Infotainment

Cell phone voice control

The user initiates the dialogue by saying: Continue by responding to the system's
Phone > call contact prompts.
or
Phone call contact
Continue by responding to the system's
prompts.
When calling contacts, keep the following in
mind:
• If there are several contacts with similar
names, they will be presented in the dis-
play in numbered lines and the system will
prompt you to pick a line number
• If there are more lines in the list than can
be displayed at one time, saying "Down"
will enable you to scroll downward in the
list (and saying "up" will take you back up
through the list).
06
Dialing voice mail
The dialogue below enables you to call your
voice mail to check any messages that you
may have received. Your voice mail phone
number must be registered in the BluetoothŸ
function, see page 244.
The user initiates the dialogue by saying:
Phone > dial voice mail
or
Phone dial voice mail

251
 Driving recommendations..................................................................... 254
Refueling............................................................................................... 257
Loading................................................................................................. 262
Towing a trailer...................................................................................... 265
Emergency towing................................................................................ 268

252
DURING YOUR TRIP
 07 During your trip

Driving recommendations

General information • Do not exceed posted speed limits. WARNING

Economical driving conserves natural
• Avoid carrying unnecessary items (extra Driving with the trunk open: Driving with
load) in the vehicle. the trunk open could lead to poisonous
resources
Better driving economy may be obtained by • Maintain correct tire pressure. Check tire exhaust gases entering the passenger com-
pressure regularly (when tires are cold). partment. If the trunk must be kept open for
thinking ahead, avoiding rapid starts and stops any reason, proceed as follows:
and adjusting the speed of your vehicle to • Remove snow tires when threat of snow or
immediate traffic conditions. ice has ended. • Close the windows

Observe the following rules: • Note that roof racks, ski racks, etc, • Set the ventilation system control to air
increase air resistance and also fuel con- flow to floor, windshield and side win-
• Bring the engine to normal operating tem- sumption. dows and the blower control to its high-
perature as soon as possible by driving est setting.
with a light foot on the accelerator pedal for
• At highway driving speeds, fuel consump-
tion will be lower with the air conditioning
the first few minutes of operation. A cold on and the windows closed than with the
engine uses more fuel and is subject to Weight distribution affects handling
air conditioning off and the windows open. At the specified curb weight your vehicle has a
increased wear.
• Using the onboard trip computer's fuel tendency to understeer, which means that the
• Whenever possible, avoid using the vehicle consumption modes can help you learn steering wheel has to be turned more than
for driving short distances. This does not how to drive more economically. might seem appropriate for the curvature of a
allow the engine to reach normal operating
Other factors that decrease gas mileage bend. This ensures good stability and reduces
temperature.
are: the risk of rear wheel skid. Remember that
• Drive carefully and avoid rapid acceleration these properties can alter with the vehicle load.
and hard braking. • Dirty air cleaner The heavier the load in the trunk, the less the
• Use the transmission's Drive (D) position • Dirty engine oil and clogged oil filter tendency to understeer.
as often as possible and avoid using kick- • Dragging brakes
07 down. Handling, roadholding
• Incorrect front end alignment Vehicle load, tire design and inflation pressure
• Using the transmission's Sport mode1 may Some of the above mentioned items and others
increase fuel consumption somewhat. Use all affect vehicle handling. Therefore, check
the transmission's Drive (D) position as are checked at the standard maintenance that the tires are inflated to the recommended
often as possible. See page 119 for addi- intervals. pressure according to the vehicle load. See the
tional information about Sport mode. "Tire pressure" section. Loads should be dis-

1 Certain models only.

254
 07 During your trip

Driving recommendations

tributed so that capacity weight or maximum CAUTION WARNING

permissible axle loads are not exceeded.
• Engine damage will occur if water is The cooling fan may start or continue to
Driving through water drawn into the air cleaner. operate (for up to 6 minutes) after the engine
• The vehicle can be driven through water up has been switched off.
• If the vehicle is driven through water
to a depth of approximately 10 in. (25 cm), deeper than 10 in (25 cm), water may
at a maximum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h). enter the differential and the transmis- • Remove any auxiliary lights from in front of
• Take particular care when driving through sion. This reduces the oil's lubricating the grille when driving in hot weather con-
flowing water. capacity and may shorten the service ditions.
life of these components. • Do not exceed engine speeds of 4500 rpm
• Clean the electrical connections for trailer
wiring after driving in mud or water. • Do not allow the vehicle to stand in if driving with a trailer in hilly terrain. The oil
water up to the door sills longer than temperature could become too high.
• When driving through water, maintain low absolutely necessary. This could result
speed and do not stop in the water. Conserving electrical current
in electrical malfunctions.
Keep the following in mind to help minimize
WARNING • If the engine has been stopped while the
battery drain:
vehicle is in water, do not attempt to
After driving through water, press lightly on restart it. Have the vehicle towed out of • When the engine is not running, avoid
the brake pedal to ensure that the brakes the water. using ignition mode II. Many electrical sys-
are functioning normally. Water or mud can tems (the audio system, the optional navi-
make the brake linings slippery, resulting in gation system, power windows, etc) will
delayed braking effect. Engine and cooling system function in ignition modes 0 and I. These
Under special conditions, for example when modes reduce drain on the battery.
driving in hilly terrain, extreme heat or with
heavy loads, there is a risk that the engine and • Please keep in mind that using systems,
cooling system will overheat. Proceed as fol- accessories, etc., that consume a great
deal of current when the engine is not run- 07
lows to avoid overheating the engine.
ning could result in the battery being com-
• Maintain a low speed when driving with a pletely drained. Driving or having the
trailer up long, steep hills. engine running for approximately
• Do not turn the engine off immediately 15 minutes will help keep the battery
when stopping after a hard drive. charged.

255
 07 During your trip

Driving recommendations

Before a long distance trip • Consider your destination. If you will be Moreover, the capacity of the battery
It is always worthwhile to have your vehicle driving through an area where snow or ice decreases as the temperature drops. In
checked by a trained and qualified Volvo serv- are likely to occur, consider snow tires. very cold weather, a poorly charged bat-
ice technician before driving long distances. tery can freeze and be damaged. It is there-
Cold weather precautions fore advisable to check the state of charge
Your retailer will also be able to supply you with
If you wish to check your vehicle before the more frequently and spray an anti-rust oil
bulbs, fuses, spark plugs and wiper blades for
approach of cold weather, the following advice on the battery posts.
your use in the event that problems occur.
is worth noting:
As a minimum, the following items should be
• Volvo recommends the use of snow tires
• Make sure that the engine coolant contains on all four wheels for winter driving, see
checked before any long trip: page 286.
50 percent antifreeze. Any other mixture
• Check that engine runs smoothly and that will reduce freeze protection. This gives • To prevent the washer fluid reservoir from
fuel consumption is normal. protection against freezing down to freezing, add washer solvents containing
• Check for fuel, oil, and fluid leakage –31 °F (–35 °C). The use of "recycled" anti- antifreeze. This is important since dirt is
freeze is not approved by Volvo. Different often splashed on the windshield during
• Have the transmission oil level checked. types of antifreeze must not be mixed. winter driving, requiring the frequent use of
• Check condition of drive belts.
• Volvo recommends using only genuine the washers and wipers. Volvo Washer
• Check state of the battery's charge. Volvo antifreeze in your vehicle's radiator. Solvent should be diluted as follows: Down
to 14 °F (–10 °C): 1 part washer solvent and
• Examine tires carefully (the spare tire as • Try to keep the fuel tank well filled – this 4 parts water Down to 5 °F (–15 °C): 1 part
well), and replace those that are worn. helps prevent the formation of condensa-
Check tire pressures. washer solvent and 3 parts water Down to
tion in the tank. In addition, in extremely
0 °F (–18 °C): 1 part washer solvent and
• The brakes, front wheel alignment, and cold weather conditions it is worthwhile to
2 parts water Down to –18 °F (–28 °C):
steering gear should be checked by a add fuel line de-icer before refueling.
1 part washer solvent and 1 part water.
trained and qualified Volvo service techni- • The viscosity of the engine oil is important.
cian only. Oil with low viscosity (thinner oil) improves • Use Volvo Teflon Lock Spray in the locks.
07
• Check all lights, including high beams. cold-weather starting as well as decreas- • Avoid using de-icing sprays as they can
ing fuel consumption while the engine is cause damage to the locks.
• Reflective warning triangles are legally warming up. 0W-30 oil is recommended for
required in some states/provinces. driving in areas with sustained low temper-
• Have a word with a trained and qualified atures.
Volvo service technician if you intend to
drive in countries where it may be difficult
• The load placed on the battery is greater
during the winter since the windshield wip-
to obtain the correct fuel. ers, lighting, etc., are used more often.

256
 07 During your trip

Refueling

Fuel requirements ness of the emission control system and could sonal air quality standards, some areas require
result in loss of emission warranty coverage. the use of "oxygenated" fuel.
Deposit control gasoline (detergent State and local vehicle inspection programs
Volvo allows the use of the following "oxygen-
additives) will make detection of misfueling easier, pos-
ated" fuels; however, the octane ratings listed
Volvo recommends the use of detergent gas- sibly resulting in emission test failure for mis-
on page 258 must still be met.
oline to control engine deposits. Detergent fueled vehicles.
gasoline is effective in keeping injectors and Alcohol – Ethanol
intake valves clean. Consistent use of deposit NOTE Fuels containing up to 10% ethanol by volume
control gasolines will help ensure good driva- may be used. Ethanol may also be referred to
bility and fuel economy. If you are not sure Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines contain as Ethyl alcohol, or "Gasohol".
an octane enhancing additive called methyl-
whether the gasoline contains deposit control
cyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl Ethers – MTBE: Fuels containing up to
additives, check with the service station oper- (MMT). If such fuels are used, your Emission 15% MTBE may be used.
ator. Control System performance may be affec-
ted, and the Check Engine Light (malfunc- Methanol
NOTE tion indicator light) located on your instru- Do not use gasolines containing methanol
ment panel may light. If this occurs, please (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practice
Volvo does not recommend the use of exter- return your vehicle to a trained and qualified
nal fuel injector cleaning systems. Volvo service technician for service. can result in vehicle performance deterioration
and can damage critical parts in the fuel sys-
tem. Such damage may not be covered under
Unleaded fuel Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers, the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Each Volvo has a three-way catalytic converter "Oxygenated fuels"
and must use only unleaded gasoline. U.S. and Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing
Canadian regulations require that pumps deliv- "oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or
ering unleaded gasoline be labeled "UNLEA- ethers. In some areas, state or local laws
DED". Only these pumps have nozzles which require that the service pump be marked indi- 07
fit your vehicle's filler inlet. It is unlawful to dis- cating use of alcohols or ethers. However,
pense leaded fuel into a vehicle labelled there are areas in which the pumps are
"unleaded gasoline only". Leaded gasoline unmarked. If you are not sure whether there is
damages the three-way catalytic converter and alcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy, check
the heated oxygen sensor system. Repeated with the service station operator. To meet sea-
use of leaded gasoline will lessen the effective-

257
 07 During your trip

Refueling

Octane rating NOTE ers, or other store-bought additives to your

vehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems.
Minimum octane When switching to higher octane fuel or Overuse may damage your engine, and some
changing gasoline brands, it may be neces- of these additives contain organically volatile
sary to fill the tank more than once before a
difference in engine operation is noticeable. chemicals. Do not needlessly expose yourself
to these chemicals.

Fuel Formulations WARNING

Do not use gasoline that contains lead as a
knock inhibitor, and do not use lead additives. Never carry a cell phone that is switched
Besides damaging the exhaust emission con- on while refueling your vehicle. If the phone
trol systems on your vehicle, lead has been rings, this may cause a spark that could
ignite gasoline fumes, resulting in fire and
G028920 strongly linked to certain forms of cancer. injury.
Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent.
Unburned benzene has been strongly linked to
Typical pump octane label certain forms of cancer. If you live in an area
WARNING
Volvo recommends premium fuel for best per- where you must fill your own gas tank, take Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, colorless,
formance, but using 87 octane1 or above will precautions. These may include: and odorless gas. It is present in all exhaust
not affect engine reliability. gases. If you ever smell exhaust fumes
• standing upwind away from the filler nozzle inside the vehicle, make sure the passenger
while refueling compartment is ventilated, and immediately
Demanding driving
• refueling only at gas stations with vapor return the vehicle to a trained and qualified
In demanding driving conditions, such as oper- Volvo service technician for correction.
ating the vehicle in hot weather, towing a trailer, recovery systems that fully seal the mouth
or driving for extended periods at higher alti- of the filler neck during refueling
07 tudes than normal, it may be advisable to • wearing neoprene gloves while handling a
switch to higher octane fuel (91 or higher) or to fuel filler nozzle.
change gasoline brands to fully utilize your
engine's capacity, and for the smoothest pos- Use of Additives
sible operation. With the exception of gas line antifreeze during
winter months, do not add solvents, thicken-

1 AKI (ANTI KNOCK INDEX) is an average of the Research Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane Number (MON), MON+RON/2.

258
 07 During your trip

Refueling

Opening/closing the fuel filler door tral locking button does not lock the fuel Manually opening the fuel filler door
filler door.
• Be sure the fuel filler door is not obstructed
and is completely closed after refueling.
• Open the fuel filler cap slowly during hot
weather.
Close the fuel filler door by pressing it; a click
indicates that it is closed.

CAUTION
• Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling.
In addition to causing damage to the
environment, gasolines containing
The fuel filler door is located on the right rear If necessary, the fuel filler door can be opened
alcohol can cause damage to painted
fender (indicated by an arrow beside the fuel manually:
surfaces, which may not be covered
tank symbol on the information display ) under the New Vehicle Limited War- 1. Open the side hatch in the trunk (on the
ranty. same side as the fuel filler door).
With the ignition switched off, press and
release the button on the lighting panel to 2. Grasp the green cord with a handle.
unlock the fuel filler door. Please note that the
3. Gently pull the cord straight rearward until
fuel filler door will remain unlocked until the
the fuel filler door clicks open.
vehicle begins to move forward. An audible
click will be heard when the fuel filler door
relocks. 07
• If you intend to leave your vehicle while it
is being refueled, this feature enables you
to lock the doors/trunk while leaving the
fuel filler door unlocked.
• You can also keep the vehicle locked if you
remain inside it during refueling. The cen-

259
 07 During your trip

Refueling

Opening/closing the fuel cap CAUTION avoid malfunctions that could damage the
three-way catalytic converter.
• Do not refuel with the engine running2.
• Do not park your vehicle over combustible
Turn the ignition off or to position I. If the materials, such as grass or leaves, which
ignition is on, an incorrect reading could can come into contact with the hot exhaust
occur in the fuel gauge. system and cause such materials to ignite
• Avoid overfilling the fuel tank. Do not under certain wind and weather condi-
press the handle on the filler nozzle tions.
more than one extra time. Too much fuel
in the tank in hot weather conditions can
• Excessive starter cranking (in excess of
one minute), or an intermittently firing or
cause the fuel to overflow. Overfilling flooded engine can cause three-way cata-
could also cause damage to the emis- lytic converter or exhaust system over-
sion control systems. heating.
Fuel vapor expands in hot weather. Open the • Remember that tampering or unauthorized
filler cap slowly. Emission controls modifications to the engine, the Engine
Control Module, or the vehicle may be ille-
After refueling, close the fuel filler cap by turn- Three-way catalytic converter gal and can cause three-way catalytic con-
ing it clockwise until it clicks into place. • Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain verter or exhaust system overheating. This
engine malfunctions, particularly involving includes: altering fuel injection settings or
the electrical, fuel or distributor ignition components, altering emission system
systems, may cause unusually high three- components or location or removing com-
way catalytic converter temperatures. Do ponents, and/or repeated use of leaded
not continue to operate your vehicle if you fuel.
detect engine misfire, noticeable loss of
07 power or other unusual operating condi- NOTE
tions, such as engine overheating or back-
firing. A properly tuned engine will help Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with
three-way catalytic converters.

2 If the fuel filler cap is not closed tightly or if the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled, the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) may indicate a fault. However, your vehicle's
performance will not be affected. Use only Volvo original or approved fuel filler caps.

260
 07 During your trip

Refueling

Heated oxygen sensors

The heated oxygen sensors monitor the oxy-
gen content of the exhaust gases. Readings
are fed into a control module that continuously
monitors engine functions and controls fuel
injection. The ratio of fuel to air into the engine
is continuously adjusted for efficient combus-
tion to help reduce harmful emissions.

07

261
 07 During your trip

Loading

Introduction WARNING Load anchoring eyelets

The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is
determined by factors such as the number of
• Stop the engine, put the gear selector in
P, and apply the parking brake when
passengers, the amount of cargo, the weight
loading or unloading long objects.
of any accessories that may be installed, etc.
• The vehicle's driving characteristics
To increase loading space, the rear seat back- may change depending on the weight
rests can be folded down, see page 89. and distribution of the load.
When loading the trunk, keep the following in • A 44-pound (20 kg) object produces a
mind: force of 2,200 pounds (1,000 kg) in a
head-on collision at 30 mph (50 km/h).
The trunk lid can be unlocked an pop-
ped open slightly via the button • The rear seat should not be loaded to a
located on the lighting panel, see page 67. level higher than 2 in. (5 cm) below the
upper edge of the rear side windows.
• Load objects in the trunk against the back- Objects placed higher than this level The load anchoring eyelets on both sides of the
rest whenever possible. could impede the function of the Volvo vehicle are used to fasten straps, etc., to help
Inflatable Curtain. anchor items in the trunk.
• Unstable loads can be secured to the load
anchoring eyelets with straps or web lash-
ings to help keep them from shifting.
Folding down the rear seat backrests
• Stop the engine and apply the parking
brake when loading or unloading long The rear seat backrests can be folded down for
objects. The gear selector can be knocked additional loading space, see page 90.
out of position by long loads, which could
set the vehicle in motion.
07

262 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 07 During your trip

Loading

WARNING The grocery bag holder holds shopping bags

in place.
• Cover sharp edges on long loads to help
prevent injury to occupants. Secure the 1. Open the hatch in the floor of the trunk.
load to help prevent shifting during sud- 2. Secure the shopping bags with the strap.
den stops.
• Always secure large and heavy objects
Ski hatch
with a seat belt or cargo retaining
straps.
• Always secure the load to help prevent
it from moving in the event of sudden There is a hatch in the right section of the rear
stops. seat backrest that can be opened for transpor-
tation.
• Switch off the engine, apply the parking
brake and put the gear selector in P Fold the right backrest forward.
when loading and unloading the vehicle.
Release the hatch in the rear seat backrest
by sliding the catch up while folding the
Grocery bag holder* hatch forward.
Return the backrest to the upright position
with the hatch open.
Use the seat belt to prevent the load from mov-
ing.

07

Grocery bag holder under the floor of the trunk

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 263

 07 During your trip

Loading

WARNING Volvo has developed especially for your

vehicle.
• Always secure the load to help prevent
• Volvo-approved removable roof racks are
it from moving in the event of sudden
designed to carry the maximum allowable
braking.
roof load for this vehicle: 220 lbs (100 kg).
• Switch off the engine, apply the parking For non-Volvo roof racks, check the man-
brake and put the gear selector in P ufacturer's weight limits for the rack.
when loading and unloading the vehicle.
• Never exceed the rack manufacturer's
weigh limits and never exceed the maxi-
The cover on the rear seat armrest/child seat mum rated roof load of 220 lbs (100 kg).
has no hinge. The cover must be removed • Avoid single-point loads. Distribute loads
before the ski hatch is used. evenly.
Removal: • Place heavier cargo at the bottom of the
load.
– Open the cover 30 degrees and lift straight
up. • Secure the cargo correctly with appropri-
ate tie-down equipment.
Installation:
• Check periodically that the load carriers
– Insert the cover in the grooves behind the and load are properly secured.
upholstery and close the cover.
• Remember that the vehicle's center of
gravity and handling change when you
Roof loads carry a load on the roof.

Using load carriers

• The vehicle's wind resistance and fuel con-
07 sumption will increase with the size of the
Load carriers are available as Volvo accesso- load.
ries. Observe the following points when in use:
• Drive smoothly. Avoid rapid starts, fast
• To avoid damaging your vehicle and to cornering and hard braking.
achieve maximum safety when driving, we
recommend using the load carriers that

264
 07 During your trip

Towing a trailer

Introduction when driving in hot climates or hilly terrain. WARNING

Volvo recommends the use of Volvo trailer Use a lower gear and turn off the air con-
hitches that are specially designed for the vehi- ditioner if the temperature gauge needle • Bumper-attached trailer hitches must
enters the red range. not be used on Volvos, nor should
cle. safety chains be attached to the
• If the automatic transmission begins to bumper.
NOTE overheat, a message will be displayed in
the text window. • Trailer hitches attaching to the vehicle
See page 344 for the maximum trailer and rear axle must not be used.
tongue weights recommended by Volvo. • Avoid overload and other abusive opera-
tion. • Never connect a trailer's hydraulic
brake system directly to the vehicle
• Observe the legal requirements of the • Hauling a trailer affects handling, durabil- brake system, nor a trailer's lighting
ity, and economy.
state/province in which the vehicles are system directly to the vehicle lighting
• All Volvo models are equipped with • It is necessary to balance trailer brakes system. Consult your nearest author-
with the towing vehicle brakes to provide a ized Volvo retailer for correct installa-
energy-absorbing shock-mounted bump-
safe stop (check and observe state/local tion.
ers. Trailer hitch installation should not
regulations).
interfere with the proper operation of this • When towing a trailer, the trailer's safety
bumper system. • Do not connect the trailer's brake system wire must be correctly fastened to the
directly to the vehicle's brake system. hole or hook provided in the trailer hitch
Trailer towing does not normally present any
particular problems, but take into considera- • More frequent vehicle maintenance is on the vehicle. The safety wire should
required. never be fastened to or wound around
tion:
the drawbar ball.
• Increase tire pressure to recommended full • Remove the ball holder when the hitch is
not being used.
pressure. See the tire inflation table on
page 279. • Volvo recommends the use of synthetic
engine oil when towing a trailer over long
• When your vehicle is new, avoid towing distances or in mountainous areas.
07
heavy trailers during the first 620 miles
(1,000 km).
• Maximum speed when towing a trailer:
50 mph (80 km/h).
• Engine and transmission are subject to
increased loads. Therefore, engine coolant
temperature should be closely watched

265
 07 During your trip

Towing a trailer

NOTE Detachable trailer hitch (accessory) 4. Slide the locking bolt through the hitch
assembly/ball holder.
• When parking the vehicle with a trailer
on a hill, apply the parking brake before 5. Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the end
putting the gear selector in P. Always of the locking bolt.
follow the trailer manufacturer's recom-
mendations for wheel chocking. Removing the ball holder
1. Remove the cotter pin from the locking bolt
• When starting on a hill, put the gear C
and slide the locking bolt out of the ball
selector in D before releasing the park- holder/hitch assembly.
ing brake. See also page 125 for more
detailed information about starting off D 2. Pull the ball holder out of the hitch assem-
on a hill while towing a trailer. E bly.
B

G010496
• If you use the manual (Geartronic) shift A
positions while towing a trailer, make NOTE
sure the gear you select does not put Ball holder
A cover for the hitch assembly is also
too much strain on the engine (using too included in the kit.
Locking bolt
high a gear).
• The drawbar assembly/trailer hitch may Cotter pin
be rated for trailers heavier than the Trailer Stability Assist (TSA)
Hitch assembly
vehicle is designed to tow. Please Trailer Stability Assist is a system designed to
adhere to Volvo's recommended trailer Safety wire attachment help stabilize a vehicle that is towing a trailer
weights. when the vehicle and trailer have begun to
• Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of Installing the ball holder sway and is part of the Dynamic Stability and
more than 15%. 1. If necessary, remove the cotter pin from Traction Control system (DSTC). See page
07 the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt 130 for information on DSTC.
Trailer cable out of the hitch assembly.
Function
An adapter is required if the vehicle's trailer 2. Slide the ball holder into the hitch assem- A vehicle towing a trailer may begin to sway for
hitch has a 13-pin connector and the trailer has bly. various reasons. Normally this only occurs at
7 pins. Use an adapter cable approved by high speeds but, for example, if the trailer is
3. Align the hole in the ball holder with the one
Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on overloaded or if the load is unevenly distributed
in the hitch assembly.
the ground. in the trailer, there is risk of swaying at speeds

266
 07 During your trip

Towing a trailer

between approximately 45-55 mph (70-90 km/ movement. If the system detects a tendency to
h). sway, the brakes are applied individually on the
front wheels, which has a stabilizing effect on
Swaying may be caused by factors such as:
the vehicle and trailer. This is often enough to
• The vehicle and trailer are hit by a sudden, enable the driver to regain control of the vehi-
strong crosswind cle.
• The vehicle and trailer are traveling on an If this is not adequate to stop the swaying
uneven road surface or drive over a bump motion, the brakes are applied to all of the
• Sudden movements of the steering wheel wheels on the vehicle and on the trailer if it is
equipped with brakes, and engine power is
Facts about TSA temporarily reduced. As the swaying motion
• TSA intervenes at speeds above approxi- begins to decrease and the vehicle-trailer have
mately 40 mph (60 km/h)
once again become stable, TSA will no stop
• The DSTC symbol ( ) in the instru- regulating the brakes/engine power and the
ment panel will flash when TSA is working driver regains control of the vehicle.
• If the driver switches off the DSTC sys-
tem's Spin Control function, TSA will also
be switched off (but will be on again the
next time the engine is started)
• TSA may not intervene when the vehicle
and trailer begin to sway if the driver tries
to compensate for the swaying motion by
moving the steering wheel rapidly
07
How TSA works
Once swaying has begun, it can be very diffi-
cult to stop, which makes it difficult to control
the vehicle and trailer.
The TSA system continuously monitors the
vehicle's movements, particularly lateral

267
 07 During your trip

Emergency towing

Towing eyelet sides of either the front or rear bumper (see NOTE
illustration).
On certain models equipped with a trailer
There are two different types of covers over hitch, the towing eyelet cannot be screwed
the openings for the towing eyelet and they into the hole in the rear bumper. The towing
have to be opened differently. rope should be attached to the trailer hitch
instead. For this reason, the detachable
• If the cover has a notch, insert a coin, section of the trailer hitch should be safely
etc., into the notch and pry open the stowed in the vehicle at all times.
edge of the cover. Open the cover com-
pletely and remove it.
Location of the towing eyelet • If the cover has a mark along one edge
or in a corner, press the mark while pry-
ing out the opposite side/corner using a
coin, etc. Open the cover and remove it.
Screw the towing eyelet in place, first by hand
and then using the tire iron until it is securely in
place.
After the vehicle has been towed, the eyelet
should be removed and returned to its storage
location.
Press the cover for the attachment point back
into position.

07 Removing the front/rear covers

Attaching the towing eyelet

The towing eyelet is located under the floor
of the trunk. This eyelet must be screwed
into the positions provided on the right

268
 07 During your trip

Emergency towing

WARNING Towing the vehicle CAUTION

1. With the remote key fully pressed into the
• When the vehicle is being towed, the
ignition slot1, press START/STOP
General towing precautions:
ignition should be in mode II (in mode I,
all of the vehicle's airbags are deacti- ENGINE for approximately 2 seconds to • Please check with state and local
activate ignition mode II. authorities before attempting this type
vated). See page 85 for more informa- of towing, as vehicles being towed are
tion about ignition modes. 2. The remote key must remain in the ignition subject to regulations regarding maxi-
• Never remove the remote key from the slot2 for the entire time that the vehicle is mum towing speed, length and type of
ignition slot when the vehicle is being being towed. towing device, lighting, etc.
towed. For vehicles with keyless drive,
the remote key must remain inside the
3. Keep the tow rope taut when the towing • If the vehicle's battery is dead, attach
vehicle slows down by applying light pres- jumper cables (see page 116) to provide
vehicle. current for releasing the electric parking
sure on the brake pedal. This will help pre-
• The power brakes and power steering vent jarring movements of the vehicle brake and to move the gear selector
will not function when the engine is not being towed. from the P position to N. If this is not
running. Approximately 5 times more possible, see page 120 for information
pressure will be required on the brake 4. Be prepared to apply the brakes to stop the about manually overriding the shiftlock
pedal and the steering wheel will be vehicle being towed. system to move the gear selector from
considerably harder to turn. P to N.
• The towing eyelets must not be used for • Maximum speed: 50 mph (80 km/h). Do
pulling the vehicle out of a ditch or for not exceed the maximum allowable
any similar purpose involving severe towing speed.
strain. Do not use the towing eyelets to
pull the vehicle up onto a flat bed tow
• Maximum distance with front wheels on
ground: 50 miles (80 km).
truck.
• The vehicle should only be towed in the 07
forward direction.

1 Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

2 For vehicles with the the optional keyless dirive, the remote key must be in the vehicle.

269
 07 During your trip

Emergency towing

Having the vehicle towed by a tow

truck
Call for professional help from an authorized
towing company.Volvo recommends the use of
flat bed equipment.

CAUTION
• The vehicle should always be towed in
the forward direction.
• Vehicles with All Wheel Drive (AWD)*
that are being towed with the front
wheels off the ground should not be
towed at a speed above approx. 45 mph
(70 km/h) and should not be towed far-
ther than 30 miles (50 km).
• If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bed
truck, the towing eyelet must not be
used to pull the vehicle up onto the flat
bed or to secure the vehicle on the flat
bed. Consult the tow truck operator.

07

270 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

07 During your trip

07

271
 General information .............................................................................. 274
Tire inflation........................................................................................... 277
Inflation pressure ................................................................................. 279
Tire designations .................................................................................. 280
Glossary of tire terminology ................................................................. 282
Vehicle loading ..................................................................................... 283
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................................................... 285
Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires ............................................... 286
Temporary Spare ................................................................................. 287
Tire Sealing System.............................................................................. 288
Changing a wheel ................................................................................ 294
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)............................................. 298

272
WHEELS AND TIRES
 08 Wheels and tires

General information

Introduction without the "all-season" rating. However, for Tire rotation

Your vehicle is equipped with tires according optimum road holding on icy or snow-covered Your vehicle has no required tire rotation. Tire
to the vehicle's tire information placard on the roads, we recommend suitable winter tires on wear is affected by a number of factors such
B-pillar (the structural member at the side of all four wheels. as tire inflation, ambient temperature, driving
the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door When replacing tires, be sure that the new tires style, etc.
opening). are the same size designation, type (radial) and
preferably from the same manufacturer, on all NOTE
CAUTION four wheels. Otherwise there is a risk of altering • If the tires are rotated, they should only
Some Volvo models are equipped with an the car's roadholding and handling characte- be moved from front to rear or vice
Ultra High Performance tire and wheel com- ristics. versa. They should never be rotated left
bination designed to provide maximum dry to right/right to left.
pavement performance with consideration New Tires
for hydroplaning resistance. They may be
• Ideally, tire rotation should be done the
first time after approximately 3,000
more susceptible to road hazard damage
and, depending on driving conditions, may miles (5,000 km) and thereafter at
achieve a tread life of less than 20,000 miles 6,000-mile (10,000-km) intervals. Some
(30,000 km). Even if this vehicle is equipped customers find that tire rotation may
with Volvo’s advanced AWD or DSTC sys- help to get extra mileage from tire life.
tem, these tires are not designed for winter • Tire rotation should only be performed
driving, and should be replaced with winter if front/rear tire wear is fairly even and
tires when weather conditions dictate. tread height is above 1/16" (1.6 mm).

The tires have good road holding characteris-

Tire age
tics and offer good handling on dry and wet
Tires degrade over time, even when they are
surfaces. It should be noted however that the
Remember that tires are perishable goods. As not being used. It is recommended that tires
tires have been developed to give these fea-
of 2000, the manufacturing week and year generally be replaced after 6 years of normal
tures on snow/ice-free surfaces.
(Department of Transportation (DOT) stamp) service. Heat caused by hot climates, frequent
Most models are equipped with "all-season" will be indicated with 4 digits (e.g., 1510 means high loading conditions or Ultra Violet (U.V.)
08 tires, which provide a somewhat higher degree that the tire illustrated was manufactured dur- exposure can accelerate the aging process.
of road holding on slippery surfaces than tires ing week 15 of 2010). The temporary spare1 should also be replaced

1 Option or accessory on some models

274
 08 Wheels and tires

General information

at 6-year intervals, even if it has never been as the one being replaced. Using a tire of the Summer and winter tires
used. same make (manufacturer) will prevent altera-
tion of the driving characteristics of the vehicle.
A tire's age can be determined by the DOT
stamp on the sidewall (see the illustration). Improving tire economy
A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discoloration • Maintain correct tire pressure. See the tire
should be replaced immediately. inflation table on page 279.
• Drive smoothly: avoid fast starts, hard
Tread wear indicator braking and tire screeching.
• Tire wear increases with speed.
• Correct front wheel alignment is very

G021778
important.
• Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy The arrows shows the direction of rotation of the
and driving comfort. tire
• Tires must maintain the same direction of • When switching between summer and
rotation throughout their lifetime.
winter tires, mark the tires to indicate
• When replacing tires, the tires with the where they were mounted on the car, e.g.,
most tread should be mounted on the rear LF = left front, RR = right rear
G021829

wheels to reduce the chance of oversteer

during hard braking.
• Tires with tread designed to roll in only one
direction are marked with an arrow on the
The tires have wear indicator strips running • Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the sidewall.
across or parallel to the tread. The letters TWI tires and/or wheels permanently.
• Incorrectly mounted tires impair the car's
are printed on the side of the tire. When braking properties and ability to force
approximately 1/16" (1.6 mm) is left on the aside rain, snow and slush.
tread, these strips become visible and indicate
that the tire should be replaced. Tires with less • The tires with the most tread should always
be at the rear (to reduce the risk of skid-
than 1/16" (1.6 mm) tread offer very poor trac-
ding).
tion. 08
• Contact a Volvo workshop if you are
When replacing worn tires, it is recommended unsure about the tread depth.
that the tire be identical in type (radial) and size

``

275
 08 Wheels and tires

General information

Storing wheels and tires

When storing complete wheels (tires mounted
on rims), they should be suspended off the
floor or placed on their sides on the floor.
Tires not mounted on rims should be stored on
their sides or standing upright, but should not
be suspended.

CAUTION
Tires should preferably be stored in a cool,
dry, dark place, and should never be stored
in close proximity to solvents, gasoline, oils,
etc.

WARNING
• The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo
are specified to meet stringent stability
and handling requirements. Unap-
proved wheel/tire size combinations
can negatively affect your vehicle's sta-
bility and handling.
• Any damage caused by installation of
unapproved wheel/tire size combina-
tions will not be covered by your new
vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no
responsibility for death, injury, or
expenses that may result from such
08 installations.

276
 08 Wheels and tires

Tire inflation

Inflation placard NOTE WARNING

• The placards shown indicate inflation • Under-inflation is the most common
pressure for the tires installed on the cause of tire failure and may result in
vehicle at the factory only. severe tire cracking, tread separation,
• A certain amount of air seepage from or "blow-out," with unexpected loss of
the tires occurs naturally and tire pres- vehicle control and increased risk of
sure fluctuates with seasonal changes injury.
in temperature. Always check tire pres- • Under-inflated tires reduce the load car-
sure regularly. rying capacity of your vehicle.

G032521
• Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation When weather temperature changes occur, tire
pressure, including the spare1, at least inflation pressures also change. A 10-degree
Tire inflation placard once a month and before long trips. You temperature drop causes a corresponding
are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check
Tire inflation pressure gauge, as automatic service sta- your tire pressures frequently and adjust them
Check tire inflation pressure regularly. tion gauges may be inaccurate. to the proper pressure, which can be found on
See the tire inflation table on page 279. A tire • Use the recommended cold inflation pres- the vehicle's tire information placard or certifi-
inflation pressure placard is also located on the sure for optimum tire performance and cation label.
driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at wear.
Checking tire pressure
the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's • Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
door opening). This placard indicates the des- uneven treadwear patterns. Cold tires
ignation of the factory-mounted tires on your Inflation pressure should be checked when the
vehicle, as well as load limits and inflation pres- tires are cold.
sure. The tires are considered to be cold when
they have the same temperature as the sur-
rounding (ambient) air.
This temperature is normally reached after the 08
vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours.

1 Available as an accessory

277
 08 Wheels and tires

Tire inflation

After driving a distance of approximately 1 mile 5. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are Speed ratings
(1.6 km), the tires are considered to be hot. If no gouges, cuts, bulges or other irregular-
you have to drive farther than this distance to ities. T 118 mph (190 km/h)
pump your tire(s), check and record the tire
6. Repeat this procedure for each tire, includ- H 130 mph (210 km/h)
pressure first and add the appropriate air pres-
ing the spare2.
sure when you get to the pump.
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, NOTE
never "bleed" or reduce air pressure. The tires W 168 mph (270 km/h)
are hot from driving and it is normal for pres- • If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the center Y 186 mph (300 km/h)
sures to increase above recommended cold
pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended of the valve. Then recheck the pressure
with your tire gauge. Load ratings
cold inflation pressure could be significantly
• Some spare tires (available as an acces- See page 280 for an explanation of the load
under-inflated.
sory) require higher inflation pressure rating on the sidewall of the tire.
To check inflation pressure: than the other tires. Consult the tire
1. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, inflation pressure table on page 279 or
then firmly press the tire gauge onto the see the inflation pressure placard.
valve.
2. Add air to reach the recommended air
pressure. Tire ratings
3. Replace the valve cap. Speed ratings
4. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there The speed ratings in the table translate as fol-
are no nails or other objects embedded low:
that could puncture the tire and cause an
air leak. Speed ratings
M 81 mph (130 km/h)
08 Q 100 mph (160 km/h)

2 Available as an accessory

278
 08 Wheels and tires

Inflation pressure

Tire inflation pressure table

The following tire pressures are recommended by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire inflation placard (see page 277 for its location) for information
specific to the tires installed on your vehicle at the factory.
Tire size Cold tire pressure for up to five persons
Front Rear
psi (kPa) psi (kPa)

235/45 R17 Extra load 36 (250) 36 (250)

235/45 R17 SST Extra loadA

215/50 R17 Extra load 38 (260) 38 (260)

235/40 R18 Extra load

Temporary spare tireB 61 (420) 61 (420)

T125/80R17
A Run-flat tire
B Available as an accessory

NOTE
Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts
department for the most up-to-date speci-
fications.

08

279
 08 Wheels and tires

Tire designations

Information on the sidewall 1. 215: the width of the tire (in millimeters) 7. M+S or M/S = Mud and Snow, AT = All
from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. The Terrain, AS = All Season
5 6 7 9 8 larger the number, the wider the tire. 8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
2. 65: The ratio of the tire's height to its width (TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT"
in percent. and indicates that the tire meets all federal
4 3. R: Radial tire (the designation RF and the standards. The next two numbers or letters
10 symbol indicate that the vehicle is are the plant code where it was manufac-
3 tured, the next two are the tire size code
equipped with optional self-supporting run
and the last four numbers represent the
2 flat tires1. See page 300 for more informa-
11 week and year the tire was built. For exam-
tion about these tires).
1 ple, 1510 means that the tire was manu-
G010753
12 4. 15: The diameter of the wheel rim (in factured during week 15 of 2010. The num-
inches). bers in between are marketing codes used
5. 95: The tire's load index. In this example, a at the manufacturer's discretion. This infor-
Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers
load index of 95 equals a maximum load of mation helps a tire manufacturer identify a
place standardized information on the sidewall
1521 lbs (690 kg). tire for safety recall purposes.
of all tires (see the illustration).
6. H: The tire's speed rating, or the maximum 9. Tire Ply Composition and Material
The following information is listed on the tire Used: Indicates the number of plies indi-
speed at which the tire is designed to be
sidewall: cates or the number of layers of rubber-
driven for extended periods of time, carry-
The tire designation: ing a permissible load for the vehicle, and coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall.
with correct inflation pressure. For exam- Tire manufacturers also must indicate the
NOTE ple, H indicates a speed rating of 130 mph ply materials in the tire and the sidewall,
(210 km/h). which include steel, nylon, polyester, and
Please be aware that the following tire des- others.
ignation is an example only and that this
particular tire may not be available on your NOTE
vehicle.
The tire's load index and speed rating may
not appear on the sidewall because they are
08 not required by law.

1 Self-supporting run flat tires may not be available on all models

280
 08 Wheels and tires

Tire designations

10. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum

load in pounds and kilograms that can be
carried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's tire
information placard located on the B-Pillar
for the correct tire pressure for your vehi-
cle.
11. Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature
grades: see page 285 for more informa-
tion.
12. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure: the greatest amount of air pres-
sure that should ever be put in the tire. This
limit is set by the tire manufacturer.

08

281
 08 Wheels and tires

Glossary of tire terminology

Terms • PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard B-pillar and in the tire inflation table in this
The tire suppliers may have additional mark- unit of air pressure. chapter.
ings, notes or warnings such as standard load, • B-pillar: The structural member at the side • Cold tires: The tires are considered to be
radial tubeless, etc. of the vehicle behind the front door. cold when they have the same temperature
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next as the surrounding (ambient) air. This tem-
• Tire information placard: A placard perature is normally reached after the vehi-
showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire to the rim.
cle has been parked for at least 3 hours.
sizes, recommended inflation pressure, • Sidewall of the tire: Area between the
and the maximum weight the vehicle can bead area and the tread.
carry.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perim-
• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A num- eter of the tire that contacts the road when
ber on the sidewall of each tire providing mounted on the vehicle.
information about the tire brand and man-
ufacturing plant, tire size and date of man-
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or
a tire and tube assembly upon which the
ufacturer. tire beads are seated.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the • Maximum load rating: a figure indicating
amount of air in a tire. the maximum load in pounds and kilo-
• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Met- grams that can be carried by the tire. This
ric tires designed to carry a maximum load rating is established by the tire manufac-
at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. turer.
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond
this pressure will not increase the tires load
• Maximum permissible inflation
pressure: the greatest amount of air pres-
carrying capability. sure that should ever be put in the tire. This
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric limit is set by the tire manufacturer.
tires designed to carry a heavier maximum
load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric
• Recommended tire inflation pressure:
inflation pressure, established by Volvo,
tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure which is based on the type of tires that are
beyond this pressure will not increase the mounted on a vehicle at the factory. This
08 tire's load carrying capability. information can be found on the tire infla-
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pres- tion placard(s) located on the driver's side
sure.

282
 08 Wheels and tires

Vehicle loading

Loads Permissible axle weight 2. Determine the combined weight of the

Properly loading your vehicle will provide maxi- The maximum allowable weight that can be driver and passengers that will be riding in
mum return of vehicle design performance. carried by a single axle (front or rear). These your vehicle.
numbers are shown on the Federal/Canadian 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/
with the following terms for determining your and passengers from XXX kilograms or
CMVSS) label. The total load on each axle must XXX pounds.
vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a never exceed its maximum permissible weight.
trailer, from the vehicle's Federal/Canadian 4. The resulting figure equals the available
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/ Gross vehicle weight (GVW) amount of cargo and luggage load
CMVSS) label, and the vehicle's tire informa- The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passen- capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount
tion placard: gers. equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the
Curb weight amount of available cargo and luggage
The weight of the vehicle including a full tank
NOTE
load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 – 750
of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not • The location of the various labels in your (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
include passengers, cargo, or optional equip- vehicle can be found on page 340.
ment. 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
• A table listing important weight limits for
your vehicle can be found on page and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
Capacity weight 344. That weight may not safely exceed the
All weight added to the curb weight, including available cargo and luggage load capacity
cargo and optional equipment. When towing, calculated in Step 4.
trailer hitch tongue load is also part of cargo Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
weight.
from your trailer will be transferred to your
1. Locate the statement "the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should vehicle. Consult this manual1 to determine
NOTE how this reduces the available cargo and
never exceed XXX pounds" on your vehi-
For trailer towing information, please refer to cle's placard. luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
the section "Towing a trailer" on page 265.

08

1 See page 265.

283
 08 Wheels and tires

Vehicle loading

WARNING
• Exceeding the permissible axle weight,
gross vehicle weight, or any other
weight rating limits can cause tire over-
heating resulting in permanent defor-
mation or catastrophic failure.
• Do not use replacement tires with lower
load carrying capacities than the tires
that were original equipment on the
vehicle because this will lower the vehi-
cle's GVW rating. Use only tires with the
correct load carrying capacity. Consult
your Volvo retailer for information.

08

284
 08 Wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Quality grading information may have poor traction performance. The trac- WARNING
ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST tion grade assigned to this tire is based on
braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and is The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE not a measure of cornering (turning) traction.
not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-
GRADES inflation, or excessive loading, either sepa-
WARNING rately or in combination, can cause heat
Quality grades can be found, where appli-
buildup and tire failure.
cable, on the tire sidewall between the tread The traction grade assigned to this tire is
shoulder and maximum section width. For based on braking (straight-ahead) traction
example: tests and is not a measure of cornering
(turning) traction.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

TREADWEAR TEMPERATURE
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
under controlled conditions on a specified gov- generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
ernment test course. For example, a tire gra- heat when tested under controlled conditions
ded 150 would wear one and one half (1 1/2) on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
times as well on the government course as a Sustained high temperature can cause the
tire graded 100. The relative performance of material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tires depends upon the actual conditions of tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
their use, however, and many depart signifi- sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
cantly from the norm due to variation in driving to a minimum level of performance that all pas-
habits, maintenance practices and differences senger vehicle tires must meet under the Fed-
in road characteristics and climate. eral Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of performance
TRACTION on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are required by law.
AA, A, B, and C, as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test sur- 08
faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C

285
 08 Wheels and tires

Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires

Winter driving conditions CAUTION cornering, braking, and accelerating. Fail-

ure to do so could reduce traction to an
Snow chains • Check local regulations regarding the unsafe level or adversely affect handling.
Snow chains can be used on your Volvo with use of snow chains before installing.
• Do not mix tires of different design as this
the following restrictions: • Use single-sided snow chains only. could also negatively affect overall tire road
• Snow chains should be installed on front • Always follow the chain manufacturer's grip.
wheels only. Use only Volvo approved installation instructions carefully. Install • Winter tires wear more quickly on dry roads
snow chains. chains as tightly as possible and in warm weather. They should be removed
• If accessory, aftermarket or "custom" tires retighten periodically. when the winter driving season has ended.
and wheels are installed and are of a size • Never exceed the chain manufacturer's • Studded tires should be run-in
different than the original tires and wheels, specified maximum speed limit. (Under 300 – 600 miles (500 – 1000 km) during
chains in some cases CANNOT be used. no circumstances should you exceed which the vehicle should be driven as
Sufficient clearances between chains and 31 mph (50 km/h). smoothly as possible to give the studs the
brakes, suspension and body components • Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns opportunity to seat properly in the tires.
must be maintained. when driving with snow chains. The tires should have the same rotational
• Some strap-on type chains will interfere direction throughout their entire lifetime.
• The handling of the vehicle can be
with brake components and therefore adversely affected when driving with
CANNOT be used. chains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as well NOTE
• All Wheel Drive models: Snow chains as locked wheel braking. Please consult state or provincial regula-
should only be installed on the front tions restricting the use of studded winter
wheels. tires before installing such tires.
Snow tires, studded tires1
• Certain size tires may not allow the assem-
bly of snow chains/traction devices. Tires for winter use:
Consult your Volvo retailer for additional snow
• Owners who live in or regularly commute
through areas with sustained periods of
chain information. snow or icy driving conditions are strongly
advised to fit suitable winter tires to help
retain the highest degree of traction.
08 • It is important to install winter tires on all
four wheels to help retain traction during

1 Where permitted

286
 08 Wheels and tires

Temporary Spare

Spare tire
A spare tire can be purchased for your vehicle
as an accessory. Follow the instructions
included with the spare tire regarding use and
stowing in the vehicle. See also page 294 for
additional information.

08

287
 08 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

Location The 12-volt sockets are located in the front WARNING

tunnel console and on the rear side of the cen-
ter console in the rear seat, see page 208. • After using the tire sealing system, the
vehicle should not be driven farther than
Accessing the tire sealing system approximately 120 miles (200 km).
The tire sealing system is stowed under the • Have the tire inspected by a trained and
floor of the trunk. To access it: qualified Volvo service technician as
1. Lift the floor hatch in the cargo area. soon as possible to determine if it can
be permanently repaired or must be
2. Lift out the tire sealing system. replaced.

NOTE
• The vehicle should not be driven faster
than 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a tire
• The tire sealing system is only intended that has been temporarily repaired with
to seal holes on the tire’s tread area, not the tire sealing system.
Introduction the sidewall. • After using the tire sealing system, drive
The vehicle is equipped with a tire sealing sys- • Tires with large holes or tears cannot be carefully and avoid abrupt steering
tem that enables you to temporarily seal a hole repaired with the tire sealing system. maneuvers and sudden stops.
in the tread surface and re-inflate a flat tire, or • After use, stow the tire sealing system
to adjust a tire’s inflation pressure. properly to help prevent rattling.
The system consists of an air compressor, a
container for the sealing compound, wiring to
connect the system to the vehicle’s electrical
system via one of the 12-volt sockets, and a
hose used to connect the system to the tire’s
inflation valve.

NOTE
08 The tire sealing system's compressor has
been tested and approved by Volvo.

288
 08 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

Tire sealing system–overview WARNING • Inhalation: Move the exposed person to

fresh air. If irritation persists, get medi-
Please keep the following points in mind cal attention.
when using the tire sealing system:
• Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomiting
• The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 in unless directed to do so by medical per-
the illustration) contains 1) rubber latex, sonnel. Get medical attention.
natural and 2) ethanediol. These sub-
stances are harmful if swallowed. • Disposal: Dispose of this material and
its container to a hazardous or special
• The contents of this bottle may cause waste collection point.
allergic skin reactions or otherwise be
potentially harmful to the respiratory
tract, the skin, the central nervous sys- NOTE
tem, and the eyes. Do not break the seal on the bottle. This
Precautions: occurs automatically when the bottle is
Speed limit sticker
screwed into the holder.
• Keep out of reach of children.
On/Off switch
• Do not ingest the contents.
Electrical wire • Avoid prolonged or repeated contact
with the skin.
Bottle holder (orange cover)
• Wash thoroughly after handling.
Protective hose cover First aid:
Air release knob • Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with
soap and water. Get medical attention
Hose
if symptoms occur.
Bottle with sealing compound • Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for least
15 minutes, occasionally lifting the
Air pressure gauge upper and lower eyelids. Get medical
attention if symptoms occur. 08

289
 08 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

Tire sealing system–temporarily NOTE WARNING

repairing a flat tire
Do not remove any foreign objects (nails, Contact with the sealing compound may
etc.) from the tire before using the sealing cause skin irritation. If contact occurs, wash
system. the affected area immediately with soap and
water.
• Stage 2: The tire’s inflation pressure is
checked and adjusted if necessary. 4. Unscrew the orange cover over the bottle
holder and unscrew the cap on the bottle
WARNING of sealing compound.

• Never leave the tire sealing system

NOTE
unattended when it is operating.
• Keep the tire sealing system away from Do not break the seal on the bottle. This
children. occurs automatically when the bottle is
screwed into the holder.
• Be sure the vehicle is parked safely off
the road and away from moving traffic.
5. Screw the bottle into the bottle holder.
• Apply the parking brake.
WARNING
Stage 1: Sealing the hole
The bottle is equipped with a catch to keep
1. Open the cover on the tire sealing kit. it securely in place and help prevent sealing
G014338

2. Peel off the speed limit sticker and affix it compound leakage. Once in place, the bot-
to the steering wheel hub where it will be tle cannot be unscrewed. This must be done
Temporarily repairing a flat tire is done in two by a trained and qualified Volvo service
clearly visible to the driver.
stages: technician.
3. Ensure that the on/off switch is in posi-
• Stage 1: The hole is sealed by pumping tion 0 (the 0 side of the switch should be 6. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s infla-
sealing compound into the tire. The car is pressed down).
then driven a short distance to distribute tion valve and screw the tire sealing sys-
08
the sealing compound in the tire. tem’s hose connector onto the valve as
tightly as possible by hand.

290
 08 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

7. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest WARNING CAUTION

12-volt socket in the vehicle.
• Never stand next to the tire being inflated The compressor should not be used for
when the compressor is in operation. more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid
NOTE overheating.
• If cracks, bubbles, etc. form on the tire,
Be sure that none of the other 12-volt sock- switch off the compressor immediately.
ets is being used while the compressor is in
operation. • If there is visible damage to the sidewall WARNING
or the rim, the tire cannot be repaired. If the pressure remains below 22 psi
The vehicle should not be driven if this (1.8 bar) after approximately seven minutes,
8. Start the vehicle’s engine. occurs. Contact a towing service or turn off the compressor. In this case, the
Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance if hole is too large to be sealed and the vehicle
WARNING applicable. should not be driven.
The vehicle´s engine should be running
when the tire sealing system is used to avoid 11. Switch off the compressor and disconnect
battery drain. Therefore, be sure the vehicle
NOTE
the electrical wire from the 12-volt socket.
is parked in a well ventilated place, or out- The air pressure gauge will temporarily
doors, before using the system. show an increase in pressure to approxi- 12. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation
mately 88 psi (6 bar) while the sealing com- valve and reinstall the valve cap.
pound is being pumped into the tire. The
9. Start the tire sealing system’s compressor 13. Immediately drive the vehicle for approxi-
pressure should return to a normal level
by pressing the on/off switch to position I. after approximately 30 seconds. mately 2 miles (3 km) at a maximum speed
of 50 mph (80 km/h) to distribute the seal-
ing compound in the tire.
10. Within seven minutes, inflate the tire to
between 22—44 psi (1.8—3.0 bar). Switch
off the compressor briefly to get a clear
reading from the pressure gauge.

08

291
 08 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

CAUTION WARNING Replacing the sealing compound

container
If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire If heavy vibrations, unsteady steering
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), the behavior, or noises should occur while driv- The sealing compound container must be
use of the sealing compound may lead to ing, reduce speed and park the vehicle in a replaced if:
incorrect tire pressure readings or in rare safe place. Recheck the tire for bumps, • the tire sealing system has been used to
cases, damage to the tire pressure sensor. cracks, or other visible damage, and repair a tire
Use the tire sealing system to check and recheck its inflation pressure. If the pressure
adjust the damaged tire's inflation pressure. is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not continue • the container’s expiration date has passed
driving. Have the vehicle towed to a trained (see the date on decal).
and qualified Volvo service technician.
NOTE NOTE
• Safely stow the tire sealing system in a Stage 2: Checking inflation pressure • After use, the sealing compound bottle,
convenient place as it will soon be used 1. Connect the tire sealing system as descri- the hose, and certain other system
again to check the tire’s inflation pres- bed in stage 1. components must be replaced. Please
sure. consult your Volvo retailer for replace-
2. Refer to the inflation pressure table in this
• The empty bottle of sealing compound
chapter for the correct inflation pressure. If
ment parts.
cannot be removed from the bottle • If the sealing compound bottle’s expi-
the tire needs to be inflated, start the tire
holder. Consult a trained and qualified ration date has passed, please take it to
sealing system’s compressor. If neces-
Volvo service technician to have the a Volvo retailer or a recycling station
bottle removed and properly disposed sary, release air from the tire by turning the
air release knob counterclockwise. that can properly dispose of harmful
of. substances.
CAUTION
The compressor should not be used for
more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid
overheating.

WARNING
08
If you interrupt your trip for more than 1
hour, check the inflation pressure in the
damaged tire again before continuing.

292
 08 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

Inflating tires WARNING 9. Turn off the compressor (press the on/off
The tire sealing system can be used to inflate switch to position 0) when the correct infla-
the tires. To do so:
• The vehicle’s engine should be running tion pressure has been reached.
when the tire sealing system is used to
1. Park the car in a safe place. avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure 10. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation
the vehicle is parked in a well ventilated valve and reinstall the valve cap.
2. The compressor should be switched off.
place, or outdoors, before using the sys- 11. Disconnect the electrical wire from the
Ensure that the on/off switch is in position tem. The parking brake should be 12-volt socket.
0 (the 0 side of the switch should be securely applied and the gear selector
pressed down). should be in the P (park) position.
3. Take out the electrical wire and hose. • Children should never be left unattended
in the vehicle when the engine is running.
4. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s infla-
tion valve and screw the hose connector
7. Check the tire’s inflation pressure on the
onto the valve as tightly as possible by
gauge. Switch off the compressor briefly to
hand.
get a clear reading from the pressure
5. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest gauge.
12-volt socket in the vehicle.
8. Refer to the tire inflation table in this chap-
6. Start the vehicle’s engine. ter for the correct inflation pressure. If the
tire needs to be inflated, start the tire seal-
ing system’s compressor (press the on/off
switch to position I). If necessary, release
air from the tire by turning the air release
knob counterclockwise.

CAUTION
The compressor should not be used for
more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid 08
overheating.

293
 08 Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel

Removing a wheel table on page 279 and in the tire inflation plac-
ard on the driver's side door jamb at the rear of
the driver's door opening.

Vehicle with four loading hooks

Location of jack and tools Turn the handle on the spare wheel bag out
toward you. Secure the stitched strap hooks in
Spare wheel the front loading eyelets. Secure the long strap
Vehicle with two loading hooks
The following instructions only apply if you in one of the front loading eyelets, wrap the
have purchased an accessory temporary Turn the handle on the spare wheel bag in
strap diagonally over the spare wheel and
spare wheel for your vehicle. If there is no toward the rear seat. Secure the stitched strap
through the upper handle. Secure the short
temporary spare wheel in your vehicle, please hooks in the loading eyelets. Secure the long
strap on the long strap. Secure in the rear load-
see page 288 for instructions on using the tire strap in one of the loading eyelets, wrap the
ing eyelet and tighten.
sealing system. strap around the spare wheel and through the
lower handle. Secure the short strap on the
The accessory temporary spare wheel is pro- long strap. Secure in the other loading eyelet WARNING
vided in a bag that must be securely strapped and tighten. Current legislation prohibits the use of the
in place in the trunk while the vehicle is being
“Temporary Spare” tire other than as a tem-
driven. porary replacement for a punctured tire. It
The spare wheel is only intended for temporary must be replaced as soon as possible by a
use. Replace it with a normal wheel as soon as standard tire. Road holding and handling
08 may be affected with the “Temporary
possible. The vehicle's handling may be
Spare” in use.
altered by the use of the spare wheel. The cor-
rect tire pressure is stated in the tire pressure

294
 08 Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel

CAUTION WARNING
The vehicle must never be driven with more • If there is a wheel in the bag, the bag must
than one temporary spare wheel. be securely restrained using its straps
and the load anchoring eyelets in the
Taking out the spare wheel trunk. Carefully follow the instructions on
page 294
1. Release the bag's retaining straps.
• If the wheel with the punctured tire is too
2. Lift the bag out of the vehicle and remove big to fit in the bag, it should be securely
the spare wheel from the bag. restrained in the trunk using suitable
3. Fold up the floor hatch in the trunk. straps, a net for anchoring cargo, etc.
4. Remove the jack* and tools* from the foam
block and change the wheels (see the
instructions in the following section Changing a wheel
"Changing a wheel"). 1. Apply the parking brake and put the gear Lug wrench and towing eyelet
selector in P.
5. After changing wheels, return the jack and 5. Screw the towing eyelet into the lug
tools to the foam block and close the floor 2. Take out the jack*, lug wrench*, the towing wrench as shown in the illustration.
hatch. eyelet and the wheel cover removal tool*
stowed under the floor of the trunk.
6. If possible, place the wheel with the punc- CAUTION
tured tire in the bag. 3. Remove the wheel cover (where applica-
The towing eyelet must be screwed into the
ble) using the removal tool or remove the lug wrench as far as possible.
7. If there is a wheel in the bag, strap the bag wheel cover by hand.
securely in place in the trunk.
4. Block the wheels that are on the ground
with wooden blocks or large stones.

08

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 295

 08 Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel

WARNING
• The jack must correctly engage the jack
attachment.
• Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non-
slippery surface.
• Never allow any part of your body to be
extended under a vehicle supported by
a jack.
• Use the jack intended for the vehicle
when changing a tire. For any other job,
use stands to support the vehicle.
Jack attachment points
• Apply the parking brake and put the
7. There are two jack attachment points on gear selector in the Park (P) position.
each side of the vehicle. Position the jack
6. With the vehicle still on the ground, use the • Block the wheels standing on the
correctly in the attachment (see the illus- ground, use rigid wooden blocks or
lug wrench/towing eyelet to loosen the
tration) and crank while simultaneously large stones.
wheel nuts ½ – 1 turn by exerting down-
guiding the base of the jack to the ground.
ward (counterclockwise) pressure.
The base of the jack must be flat on a level, • The jack should be kept well-greased
and clean, and should not be damaged.
firm, non-slippery surface. Before raising
the vehicle, check that the jack is still cor- • No objects should be placed between
rectly positioned in the attachment. the base of jack and the ground, or
between the jack and the attachment
8. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be bar on the vehicle.
changed is lifted off the ground.
9. Unscrew the wheel nuts completely and
remove the wheel.

08

296
 08 Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel

NOTE 3. Install the wheel nuts and tighten hand-

tight. Using the lug wrench, tighten cross-
The jack provided with your vehicle is wise until all nuts are snug.
intended to be used only in temporary sit-
uations such as changing wheels in the 4. Lower the vehicle to the ground and alter-
event of a flat tire. Only the jack that came nately tighten the bolts crosswise to
with your particular model should be used 103 ft. lbs. (140 Nm).
to lift the vehicle. If the vehicle needs to be
lifted more frequently or for a prolonged 5. Install the wheel cover (where applicable).
period, using a garage jack or hoist is rec- The opening in the wheel cover for the tire's
ommended. Always follow this device’s inflation valve must be positioned over the
instructions for use. valve.

Re-installing the wheel

1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel
and hub.
2. Lift the wheel and place it on the hub.

08
Tighten the lug nuts

297
 08 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Introduction NOTE Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute

for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-
If a fault occurs in TPMS, the tire pressure er's responsibility to maintain correct tire pres-
NOTE warning light will flash for approximately sure, even if under-inflation has not reached
USA – FCC ID: KR5S122780002 1 minute and Tire press. syst Service
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
required will be displayed.
This device complies with part 15 of the tire pressure telltale.
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing conditions: (1) This device may not Each tire, including the spare2 (if provided), Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
cause harmful interference, and (2) this should be checked monthly when cold and TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
device must accept any interference inflated to the inflation pressure recommended the system is not operating properly. The
received, including interference that may TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
cause undesired operation. the low tire pressure telltale. When the system
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
The tire pressure monitoring system1 uses sen- indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation approximately one minute and then remain
sors mounted in the tire valves to check infla- pressure label, you should determine the continuously illuminated. This sequence will
tion pressure levels. When the vehicle is mov- proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
ing at a speed of approximately 20 mph long as the malfunction exists. When the mal-
(30 km/h) or faster, these sensors transmit As an added safety feature, your vehicle has function indicator is illuminated, the system
inflation pressure data to a receiver located in been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring may not be able to detect or signal low tire
the vehicle. system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres- pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is occur for a variety of reasons, including the
When low inflation pressure is detected, TPMS significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when installation of replacement or alternate tires or
will light up the tire pressure warning light the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
( ) (also referred to as a telltale) in the should stop and check your tires as soon as from functioning properly. Always check the
instrument panel and will display one of the possible, and inflate them to the proper pres- TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one
following messages in the text window: Tire sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
pressure low or tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
Tire needs air now.
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the function properly.
08 vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

1 Not available in all markets or in all models.

2 Available as an accessory

298
 08 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

NOTE Changing wheels with TPMS CAUTION

Please note the following when changing or
TPMS indicates low tire pressure but does replacing the factory installed TPMS wheels/ When inflating tires with TPMS valves, press
not replace normal tire maintenance. For the pump's mouthpiece straight onto the
information on correct tire pressure, please tires on the vehicle: valve to help avoid bending or otherwise
refer to the tire inflation pressure table in this • Only the factory-mounted wheels are damaging the valve.
chapter or consult your Volvo retailer. equipped with TPMS sensors in the valves.
• If the vehicle is equipped with a temporary NOTE
Erasing warning messages spare tire, this tire does not have a TPMS
When a low tire pressure warning message has sensor. • If you change to tires with a different
been displayed, and the tire pressure warning recommended inflation pressure, the
• If wheels without TPMS sensors are moun- TPMS system must be recalibrated to
light has come on: ted on the vehicle, TIRE PRESS SYST
these tires. On U.S. models, this must
1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the SERVICE REQUIRED will be displayed
be done by a trained and qualified Volvo
inflation pressure of all four tires. each time the vehicle is driven above
service technician. On Canadian mod-
25 mph (40 km/h) for 10 minutes or more.
2. Re-inflate the tire(s) to the correct pressure els, see the following section "Recali-
(consult the tire pressure placard or the
• Once TPMS sensors are properly installed, brating TPMS."
the warning message should not reappear.
inflation pressure table on page 279. If the message is still displayed, drive the
• If a tire is changed, or if the TPMS sen-
sor is moved to another wheel, the sen-
3. In certain cases, it may be necessary to vehicle for several minutes at a speed of
sor's seal, nut, and valve core should be
drive the vehicle for several minutes at a 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster to erase the
replaced.
speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster. This message.
will erase the warning text and the warning • When installing TPMS sensors, the
• Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors be vehicle must be parked for at least
light will go out. fitted on all wheels used on the vehicle.
15 minutes with the ignition off. If the
Volvo does not recommend moving sen-
vehicle is driven within 15 minutes, a
WARNING sors back and forth between sets of
TPMS error message will be displayed.
wheels.
Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to tire
failure, resulting in a loss of control of the Recalibrating TPMS (Canadian models
vehicle.
only)* 08
In certain cases, it may be necessary to reca-
librate TPMS to conform to Volvo's recom-
mended tire inflation pressures (see the infla-

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 299

 08 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

tion pressure table on page 279), for example, 3. Press the MY CAR key in the center con- WARNING
if higher inflation pressure is necessary when sole control panel and select Settings
transporting heavy loads, etc. Car settings Tyre pressure
• SST tires should only be mounted by
service technicians who are familiar
This is done in the vehicle's menu system. See 4. Select Tyre pressure system and press with tires of this type.
page 189 for a description of the menu system.
OK/MENU to turn the system on or off. • SST tires may only be mounted on vehi-
To recalibrate: cles equipped with TPMS.
1. Switch off the engine. Self-supporting run flat tires (SST)* • Do not drive faster than 50 mph
Self-supporting run flat tires are available as (80 km/h) if TPMS indicates that a tire
2. Inflate the tires to the desired pressure and has lost inflation pressure.
put the ignition in mode I or II (see page optional equipment. The vehicle must be
85 for additional information). equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring • Do not drive farther than 50 miles
System (TPMS) if tires of this type are installed. (80 km) before replacing a damaged
3. Press the MY CAR key in the center con- SST tire.
sole control panel and select Settings Tires of this type have specially reinforced
sidewalls that make it possible to continue • Drive carefully and avoid e.g., hard
Car settings Tyre pressure braking or fast turns.
driving to a limited extent even though the tire
4. Press OK/MENU, select Calibrate tyre has lost some or all of its inflation pressure. • SST tires must be replaced if they are
These tires are mounted on special rims (nor- damaged. A tire of this type cannot be
pressure and press OK/MENU again.
mal tires can also be mounted on these rims). repaired.
5. Drive the vehicle at a speed above 25 mph
(40 km/h) continuously for at least If an SST tire loses inflation pressure, the yel-
10 minutes. low TPMS symbol illuminates in the instrument
> When the calibration message is no panel and a text message is also displayed. If
longer displayed, TPMS has been reca- this happens, reduce speed to not more than
librated to the new inflation pressure. 50 mph (80 km/h). The tire should be replaced
as soon as possible.
Activating/deactivating TPMS (Canadian Drive carefully; it may be difficult to determine
models only)* which tire is damaged. To find the damaged
1. Switch off the engine. tire, check the inflation pressure in all four tires.
08
2. Put the ignition in mode I or II (see page
85 for additional information).

300 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

08 Wheels and tires

08

301
 Volvo maintenance................................................................................ 304
Maintaining your car............................................................................. 305
Hood and engine compartment............................................................ 307
Engine oil............................................................................................... 308
Fluids..................................................................................................... 310
Replacing bulbs.................................................................................... 312
Wiper blades and washer fluid.............................................................. 318
Battery................................................................................................... 320
Fuses..................................................................................................... 324
Vehicle care........................................................................................... 332

302
MAINTENANCE AND SPECIFICATIONS
 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Volvo maintenance

Introduction recommended that receipts for vehicle emis- prehensive periodic maintenance schedule up
Volvo advises you to follow the maintenance sion maintenance be retained in case ques- to 150,000 miles (240,000 km) of vehicle main-
program outlined in the Warranty and Service tions arise concerning maintenance. Inspec- tenance. The schedule includes components
Records Information booklet. This mainte- tion and maintenance should also be per- that affect vehicle emissions. This page
nance program contains inspections and serv- formed anytime a malfunction is observed or describes some of the emission-related com-
ices necessary for the proper function of your suspected. ponents.
vehicle. The maintenance services contain
Applicable warranties – U.S./Canada
several checks that require special tools and
In accordance with applicable U.S. and Cana-
training, and therefore must be performed by a
dian regulations, the following list of warranties
qualified technician. To keep your Volvo in top
is provided.
condition, specify time-tested and proven
Genuine Volvo Parts and Accessories. • New Vehicle Limited Warranty

The Federal Clean Air Act – U.S.

• Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty
The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle • Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty
manufacturers to furnish written instructions to • Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint Sys-
the ultimate purchaser to assure the proper tems Limited Warranty
servicing and function of the components that • Emission Design and Defect Warranty
control emissions. These services, which are
listed in the "Warranty and Service Records
• Emission Performance Warranty
Information" booklet, are not covered by the These are the federal warranties; other warran-
warranty. You will be required to pay for labor ties are provided as required by state/provin-
and material used. cial law. Refer to your separate Warranty and
Service Records Information booklet for
Maintenance detailed information concerning each of the
Your Volvo passed several major inspections warranties.
before it was delivered to you, in accordance
with Volvo specifications. The maintenance Periodic maintenance helps minimize
procedures outlined in the Warranty and Serv- emissions
ice Records Information booklet, many of Periodic maintenance will help keep your vehi-
which will positively affect your vehicle's emis- cle running well. Your Warranty and Service
sions, should be performed as indicated. It is Records Information booklet provides a com-

304
 09 Maintenance and specifications

Maintaining your car 09

Owner maintenance As needed: They are specially reinforced to bear the weight
Periodic maintenance requirements and inter- Wash the car, including the undercarriage, to of the vehicle. A garage jack can also be placed
vals are described in your vehicle's Warranty reduce wear that can be caused by a buildup under the front of the engine support frame.
and Service Records Information booklet. of dirt, and corrosion that can be caused by salt Take care not to damage the splash guard
residues. under the engine. Ensure that the jack is posi-
The following points can be carried out tioned so that the vehicle cannot slide off it.
between the normally scheduled maintenance Clean leaves and twigs from air intake vents at
Always use axle stands or similar structures.
services. the base of the windshield, and from other pla-
ces where they may collect. If a two-post hoist is used to lift the vehicle, the
Each time the car is refueled: front and rear lift arm pads should be centered
• Check the engine oil level. NOTE under the reinforced lift plates on the inboard
• Clean the windshield, windshield wipers, edge of the sill rail (see illustration).
Complete service information for qualified
headlights, and taillights. technicians is available online for purchase
or subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com. Emission inspection readiness
Monthly:
• Check cold tire pressure in all tires. Inspect What is an Onboard Diagnostic System
the tires for wear. Hoisting the vehicle (OBD II)?
• Check that engine coolant and other fluid OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerized
levels are between the indicated "min" and engine management system. It stores diagnos-
"max" markings. tic information about your vehicle's emission
• Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass controls. It can light the Check Engine light
cleaner and soft paper towels. (MIL) if it detects an emission control "fault." A
• Wipe driver information displays with a soft "fault" is a component or system that is not
cloth. performing within an expected range. A fault
may be permanent or temporary. OBD II will
• Visually inspect battery terminals for cor-
store a message about any fault.
rosion. Corrosion may indicate a loose ter-
minal connector, or a battery near the end How do states use OBD II for emission
of its useful service life. Consult your Volvo inspections?
retailer for additional information.
Many states connect a computer directly to a
If a garage jack is used to lift the vehicle, the vehicle's OBD II system. The inspector can
two jack attachments points should be used. then read "faults." In some states, this type of

305
 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Maintaining your car

inspection has replaced the tailpipe emission way driving is typically needed to allow
test. OBD II to reach readiness. Your Volvo
retailer can provide you with more infor-
How can my vehicle fail OBD II emission mation on planning a trip.
inspection? • Maintain your vehicle in accordance with
Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspec- your vehicle's maintenance schedule.
tion for any of the following reasons.
• If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, your
vehicle may fail inspection.
• If your vehicle's Check Engine light was lit,
but went out without any action on your
part, OBD II will still have a recorded fault.
Your vehicle may pass or fail, depending
on the inspection practices in your area.
• If you had recent service that required dis-
connecting the battery, OBD II diagnostic
information may be incomplete and "not
ready" for inspection. A vehicle that is not
ready may fail inspection.

How can I prepare for my next OBD II

emission inspection?
• If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit – or
was lit but went out without service, have
your vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary,
serviced by a qualified Volvo technician.
• If you recently had service for a lit Check
Engine light, or if you had service that
required disconnecting the battery, a
period of driving is necessary to bring the
OBD II system to "ready" for inspection. A
half-hour trip of mixed stop-and-go/high-

306
 09 Maintenance and specifications

Hood and engine compartment 09

Opening and closing the hood Engine compartment, overview WARNING

The cooling fan (located at the front of the
engine compartment, behind the radiator)
may start or continue to operate (for up to
6 minutes) after the engine has been
switched off.

WARNING
Before performing any operations in the
engine compartment, the ignition should
always be completely switched off (in mode
0, see page 85) and there should be no
remote keys in the passenger compartment.
Coolant expansion tank The gear selector should be in the P (park)
position. If the engine has been running,
Power steering fluid reservoir wait until it has cooled before touching any
components in the engine compartment.
Dipstick-engine oil
The distributor ignition system operates at
Filler cap-engine oil very high voltages. Special safety precau-
tions must be followed to prevent injury.
Cover over brake fluid reservoir Always turn the ignition off when:
Turn the handle located under the left side
of the dash approximately 20-25 degrees Battery • Replacing distributor ignition compo-
clockwise to release the hood lock. nents e.g. plugs, coil, etc.
Relay/fuse box
Lift the hood slightly. Press the release • Do not touch any part of the distributor
control (located under the right front edge Washer fluid reservoir ignition system while the engine is run-
of the hood) to the left, and lift the hood. ning. This may result in unintended
The appearance of the engine compartment movements and body injury.
may vary depending on engine model.
WARNING
Check that the hood locks properly when
closed.

307
 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Engine oil

Checking the engine oil Checking and adding oil NOTE

The oil level should be checked at regular inter-
Before checking the oil:
vals, particularly during the period up to the
first scheduled maintenance service. • The car should be parked on a level sur-
face.
• See page 346 for oil specifications.
• If the engine is warm, wait for at least
• Refer to the Warranty and Service Records 10 – 15 minutes after the engine has
Information booklet for information on the been switched off.
oil change intervals.

CAUTION

G021734
• Not checking the oil level regularly can
result in serious engine damage if the oil
level becomes too low. Location of the filler cap and dipstick
• Oil that is lower than the specified qual-
ity can damage the engine.
• Volvo does not recommend the use of
oil additives.
• Always add oil of the same type and

G021737
viscosity as already used.
• Never fill oil above the MAX mark. This The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX
could cause an increase in oil consump- marks on the dipstick
tion.
Checking the oil
• Oil changes should be carried out by a
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a lint-
trained and qualified Volvo service tech-
free rag.
nician. Volvo recommends Castrol oil products
2. Reinsert the dipstick, pull it out, and check
the oil level. The level must be between the
MIN and MAX marks.

308
 09 Maintenance and specifications

Engine oil 09

3. Add oil if necessary. If the level is close to

the MIN mark, add approximately
0.5 US quarts (0.5 liters) of oil.
4. Recheck the level and add more oil if nec-
essary until the level is near the MAX mark.

WARNING
Do not allow oil to spill onto or come into
contact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces.

309
 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Fluids

Coolant CAUTION WARNING

• If necessary, top up the cooling system • Never remove the expansion tank cap
with Volvo Genuine Coolant/Antifreeze while the engine is warm. Wait until the
only (a 50/50 mix of water and anti- engine cools.
freeze). • If it is necessary to top off the coolant
• Different types of antifreeze/coolant when the engine is warm, unscrew the
may not be mixed. expansion tank cap slowly so that the
• If the cooling system is drained, it overpressure dissipates.
should be flushed with clean water or
premixed anti-freeze before it is refilled
with the correct mixture of water/anti- Brake fluid
freeze.
Location of the coolant reservoir • The cooling system must always be
kept filled to the correct level, and the
Normally, the coolant does not need to be
level must be between the MIN and
changed. If the system must be drained, con- MAX marks. If it is not kept filled, there
sult a trained and qualified Volvo service tech- can be high local temperatures in the
nician. engine which could result in damage.
See page 347 for information on cooling sys- Check coolant regularly!
tem capacities. • Do not top up with water only. This
reduces the rust-protective and anti-
freeze qualities of the coolant and has a
lower boiling point. It can also cause
damage to the cooling system if it Location of the brake fluid reservoir
should freeze.
Checking the level
• Do not use chlorinated tap water in the The fluid reservoir is concealed under the
vehicle's cooling system.
round cover at the rear of the engine compart-
ment. The round cover must be removed first
before the reservoir cap can be accessed.

310
 09 Maintenance and specifications

Fluids 09

The brake fluid should always be between the 2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid. WARNING
MIN and MAX marks on the inside of the res- The level must be between the MIN and
ervoir. Check, without removing the cap, that MAX marks. If a problem should occur in the power
steering system or if the vehicle has no elec-
there is sufficient fluid in the reservoir.
trical current and must be towed, it is still
Fluid type: DOT 4+ boiling point >536 °F Power steering fluid possible to steer the vehicle. However, keep
(>280 °C), P/N 9437433 in mind that greater effort will be required to
turn the steering wheel.
Replace: The fluid should be replaced accord-
ing to the intervals specified in the Warranty
and Service Records Information booklet. CAUTION
When driving under extremely hard conditions Keep the area around the power steering
(mountain driving, etc), it may be necessary to fluid reservoir clean when checking.
replace the fluid more often. Consult a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician.
Always entrust brake fluid changing to a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

WARNING Check the level frequently. The fluid does not

• If the fluid level is below the MIN mark require changing. The fluid level must be
in the reservoir or if a brake-related between the MIN and MAX marks. For capaci-
message is shown in the information ties and recommended fluid grade, see
display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the car page 347.
towed to a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician and have the brake
system inspected.
• Dot 4+ should never be mixed with any
other type of brake fluid.

Filling
1. Turn and open the cover.

311
 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Replacing bulbs

Introduction WARNING
All bulb specifications are listed on page 317.
The following bulbs should only be replaced by
• Active Bending Lights* – due to the high
voltage used by these headlights, these
a trained and qualified Volvo service techni- bulbs should only be replaced by a
cian: trained and qualified Volvo service tech-
• Dome lighting nician.
• Reading lights • Turn off the lights and remove the
remote key from the ignition before
• Glove compartment lighting
changing any bulbs.
• Footwell lighting
• Turn signals in the door mirrors
• Approach lighting in the door mirrors Headlight housing
The entire headlight housing must be lifted out
• Active Bending Lights and LED bulbs when replacing all front bulbs.

NOTE CAUTION
For information regarding any other bulbs Never touch the glass of bulbs with your fin-
not mentioned in this section, please con- gers. Grease and oils from your fingers
tact your Volvo retailer or a trained and vaporize in the heat and will leave a deposit
authorized Volvo service technician. on the reflector, which will damage it.

WARNING NOTE
• The engine should not be running when
• Always switch off the ignition before
changing bulbs. starting to replace a bulb.
• If the engine has been running just prior
• The optional Active Bending Light bulbs
to replacing bulbs in the headlight hous- contain trace amounts of mercury.
ing, please keep in mind that compo- These bulbs should always be disposed
nents in the engine compartment will be of by a trained and qualified Volvo serv-
hot. ice technician.

312 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 09 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs 09

Removing the headlight housing 6. Replace the defective bulb(s). Removing the cover to access the
1. Switch off the ignition by briefly pressing bulbs
the START/STOP ENGINE button. Reinserting the headlight housing

2. Remove the remote key from the ignition

slot1.
3. (Upper illustration under "Headlight hous-
ing")
Withdraw the headlight housing's lock-
ing pins.
Remove the headlight housing by alter-
natively pulling the front and rear edges
until it can be lifted out.

CAUTION 1. Plug in the connector until it clicks into NOTE

place.
When disconnecting the connector, pull on Before starting to replace a bulb, see
the connector itself and not on the wiring. 2. Reinstall the headlight housing and locking page 312.
pins. The short locking pin should be clos-
4. (Lower illustration under "Headlight hous- est to the grille. Check that they are cor-
1. Loosen the cover's four retaining screws
ing") rectly inserted. The headlight housing must
with the tool (1) provided in the vehicle's
be properly inserted and secured in place
Unplug the wiring connector by holding tool kit (see page 294). The screws should
before the lighting is switched on or the
not be removed completely.
down the clip with your thumb. remote key is inserted into the ignition slot.
Pull out the connector with the other 3. Check that the lights function properly.
hand.
5. Lift out the housing and place it on a soft
surface to avoid scratching the lens.

1 Does not apply to vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

313
 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Replacing bulbs

CAUTION 4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out. 4. Remove the connector from the bulb.

Use the tool from the vehicle's tool kit to 5. The guide lug on the new bulb should be 5. Press the new bulb into the socket and turn
loosen the screws. A screwdriver or other straight up when the bulb is inserted into it clockwise to put it in place. It can only be
sharp object could scratch the headlight. the holder and the bulb should snap into secured in one position.
place.
6. Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight
2. Push the cover to the side. 6. Put the cover back into position and rein- housing.
Reinstall the cover in the reverse order. stall the headlight housing.
7. Put the cover back into position and rein-
stall the headlight housing.
Low beam, Halogen High beam, Halogen
Extra high beam2

1. Remove the headlight housing from the 1. Remove the headlight housing from the
vehicle (see page 312). vehicle (see page 312).
1. Remove the headlight housing from the
2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see 2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see vehicle (see page 312).
page 313). page 313).
2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see
3. Unplug the connector from the bulb. 3. Remove the bulb by turning it counter- page 313).
clockwise and pulling it straight out.

2 Models with optional Active Bending Lights only.

314
 09 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs 09

3. Remove the bulb by turning it counter- 5. Press and turn the new bulb into place. 2. Press the catches together and pull out the
clockwise and pulling it straight out. bulb holder.
6. Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight
4. Remove the connector from the bulb. housing. 3. Remove the defective bulb by pressing it in
slightly and it turning counterclockwise
5. Press the new bulb into the socket and turn 7. Put the cover back into position and rein-
before pulling it out.
it clockwise to put it in place. It can only be stall the headlight housing.
secured in one position. 4. Insert a new bulb, press it in slightly and
turn it clockwise.
6. Put the cover back into position and rein- Taillight housing
stall the headlight housing. 5. Press the bulb holder until it clicks into
place and reinstall the cover.
Turn signals
Location of taillight bulbs

The bulbs in the taillight cluster are replaced

from inside the trunk (not the LED functions).

1. Remove the headlight housing from the NOTE

Taillight lens, right side
vehicle (see page 312). Before starting to replace a bulb, see
page 312. Brake lights (LEDs)
2. Remove the cover by pulling it straight out.
Brake light
3. Pull the holder to access the bulb.
1. Remove the covers in the left/right panel to
4. Press in the bulb and turn it to remove it Backup light
access the bulb holder.
from the holder.

315
 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Replacing bulbs

Turn signals 4. Insert a new bulb, press it in slightly and Trunk lighting
turn it clockwise.
Rear fog light (driver’s side only)
5. Put the bulb holder in place and turn it
clockwise.
NOTE
If an error message remains in the display License plate lighting
after a faulty bulb has been replaced, con-
tact an authorized Volvo workshop.

Backup lights

G021758
NOTE
Before starting to replace a bulb, see
page 312.

The trunk lighting is located on opposite sides

1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.
of the trunk.
2. Carefully detach the entire bulb housing
and pull it out. 1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that
1. Open the panel on the inside of the trunk the bulb housing comes loose.
3. Replace the bulb.
lid. 2. Replace the bulb.
4. Reinsert the entire bulb housing and
2. Remove the bulb holder by turning it coun- tighten the screws. 3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press
terclockwise. it back into the bulb housing.
3. Remove the defective bulb by pressing it in
slightly and turning it counterclockwise
before pulling it out.

316
 09 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs 09

Vanity mirror lighting Bulb specifications Lighting func- Wat- Bulb

Removing the lens Lighting func- Wat- Bulb tion tage
tion tage Brake light 21 P21W LL
Extra high beam 55 H7 LL
Trunk lighting 10 SV8.5
(models with Active
(length
Bending Lights*)
38mm)
Low beam (halo- 55 H11 LL
gen) NOTE
High beam (halo- 65 H9 Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts
gen) department for the most up-to-date speci-
fications.
Front turn signals 21 HY21W

1. Insert a screwdriver underneath the side of License plate light- 5 C5W LL

the lens and carefully pry up the lug on the ing
edge. Vanity mirror light- 1.2 W2x4.6d
2. Carefully detach and lift out the lens. ing type T5
3. Use needle nose pliers to pull the bulb Glove compart- 5 SV8.5
straight to the side. Replace the bulb. Do ment lighting (length
not exert too much pressure on the bulb 43mm)
with the pliers to help avoid damaging it.
Rear turn signals 21 PY21W SV
Reinstalling the lens
1. Put the lens back into position. Rear fog light 21 H21W LL
2. Press it into place. Backup light 21 H21W LL

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 317

 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Wiper blades and washer fluid

Wiper blades CAUTION button briefly to put the ignition in mode I (or
The windshield wiper blades are different by starting the engine).
Be sure the wiper blades are not frozen in
lengths. The blade on the driver’s side is longer position before attempting to move them to
than the one on the passenger side. the service position. CAUTION
Service position If the wiper arms have been folded out from
1. Insert the remote key into the ignition the windshield while in the service position,
fold them back against the windshield
slot1 and press the START/STOP before returning the wipers to the normal
ENGINE button briefly to put the ignition in position to help avoid scratching the paint
mode I (see page 85 for detailed informa- on the hood.
tion about the ignition modes).
2. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button Replacing the windshield wiper blades
again briefly to switch the ignition off.
3. Within 3 seconds, move the right steering
wheel lever up and hold it for at least 1 sec-
ond.
> The wipers will then move to the vertical
Wiper blades in service position (service) position on the windshield.
The wiper blades must be in the vertical (serv-
ice) position for replacement, washing or to lift NOTE
them away from the windshield when e.g., After the wiper arms have been in the serv-
removing ice or snow. To put them in this posi- ice position, the wipers must be switched on
tion: and off at least once before the service posi-
tion can be used again.

The wipers can be returned to the normal posi-

tion by pressing the START/STOP ENGINE

1 Not necessary on vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

318
 09 Maintenance and specifications

Wiper blades and washer fluid 09

To return the wipers from the service position ing cold weather, the reservoir should be filled
to the normal position, fold the wipers back with windshield washer solvent containing
against the windshield and press the START/ antifreeze. For capacities, see page 347.
STOP ENGINE button briefly to put the ignition
in mode I (or start the engine).

Cleaning
Keeping the windshield and wiper blades clean
helps improve visibility and prolongs the serv-
ice life of the wiper blades. Clean the wiper
blades with a stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm
soap solution or car washing detergent.

Filling washer fluid

With the wipers in the service position, fold

out the wiper arm from the windshield.
Press the button on the wiper blade attach-
ment and pull the wiper blade straight out,
parallel with the wiper arm.
Slide in the new wiper blade until it clicks
into place.
Location of the washer fluid reservoir
Check that the blade is securely in place.
The windshield and headlight washers share a
4. Press the wipers back against the wind- common reservoir.
shield. The washer fluid reservoir is located on the
driver's side of the engine compartment. Dur-

319
 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Battery

Warning symbols on the battery Risk of explosion may also further decrease the battery’s
starting capacity.
Wear protective goggles.
• Because the battery’s starting capacity
decreases with time, it may be necessary
to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven for
Recycle properly an extended period of time or if the vehicle
Keep away from children. is usually only driven short distances.
• Never use a quick charger to charge the
battery.

CAUTION
Avoid smoking, open flames,
and/or sparks. The infotainment system's energy-saving
NOTE feature may not function correctly or at all,
A used battery should be disposed of in an and/or a message may be displayed if a
environmentally responsible manner. Con- battery charger or jumper cables are not
See the owner's manual. sult your Volvo retailer or take the battery to connected properly.
a recycling station. • The negative terminal on the battery
must never be used to connect a
jumper cable or a battery charger. Only
Handling the ground point on the chassis may be
Contains corrosive acid. • Check that the battery cables are correctly used.
connected and tightened. See page 116 for an illustration and addi-
• Never disconnect the battery when the tional information.
engine is running (for example, when
replacing the battery).
• If the battery is fully discharged a number
of times, this may shorten its service life.
• The service life of a battery is affected by
factors such as the number of starts, driv-
ing conditions and climate. Extreme cold

320
 09 Maintenance and specifications

Battery 09

WARNING • Never disconnect the battery when the Changing

engine is running, or when the key is in the
• Never expose the battery to open flame ignition. This could damage the vehicle's
or electric spark. electrical system.
• Do not smoke near the battery. • The battery should be disconnected from
• Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do the vehicle when a battery charger is used
not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, directly on the battery.
skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If con- • To help keep the battery in good condition,
tact occurs, flush the affected area the vehicle should be driven for at least 15
immediately with water. Obtain medical minutes a week or connected to a charger
help immediately if eyes are affected. with an automatic charging function.
• If the battery is fully discharged a number
NOTE of times, this may shorten its service life.
Keeping the battery fully charged helps
The life of the battery is shortened if it prolong its service life.
becomes discharged repeatedly.
• The service life of a battery is affected by
factors such as driving conditions and cli-
Maintenance mate. Extreme cold may also further
decrease the battery’s starting capacity.
• Use a screw driver to open the caps or
cover and a flashlight to inspect the level. • Because the battery’s starting capacity
decreases with time, it may be necessary
• If necessary, add distilled water. The level to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven for
should never be above the indicator. an extended period of time or if the vehicle
• The fluid level should be checked if the is usually only driven short distances.
battery has been recharged.
• After inspection, be sure the cap over each CAUTION
battery cell or the cover is securely in
place. • Always use distilled or deionized water
(battery water).
• Check that the battery cables are correctly
connected and properly tightened. • Never fill above the level mark in the cell.

321
 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Battery

information in the vehicle's electrical system Rally bar R-Design models*

can be stored in the control modules.
Open the clips on the front cover and
remove the cover.
Release the rubber molding so that the rear
cover is free.
Remove the rear cover by pulling it away.

Detach the black negative cable.

Detach the red positive cable
Detach the ventilation hose from the
battery Rally bar and bulkhead hatch
Vehicles with the optional R-Design package
Loosen the screw holding the battery
are equipped with a rally bar in the engine com-
clamp. partment that must be removed before the bat-
Move the battery to the side and lift it up. tery can be replaced.
1. Remove the hatch in the bulkhead on both
WARNING WARNING sides of the engine compartment (pry them
up carefully with a plastic knife or similar
Connect and disconnect the positive and PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!
negative cables in the correct sequence. object).
Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds, 2. Remove the screw on each side of the
Removal chemicals known to the state of California engine compartment holding the rally bar
Switch off the ignition, remove the remote key to cause cancer and reproductive harm. in place.
from the ignition slot and wait at least 5 minutes Wash hands after handling.
3. Lift out the rally bar.
before disconnecting the battery so that all > The battery can now be removed (see
the instructions in the previous section).

322 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 09 Maintenance and specifications

Battery 09

• After a new battery has been installed (see 7. Press in the rear cover. (See Removal).
the following section), reinstall the rally bar
8. Reinstall the molding. (See Removal).
in the reverse order.
9. Reinstall the front cover and secure it with
NOTE the clips. (See Removal).
When reinstalling the rally bar, tighten the
screws to 22 ft lbs (30 Nm).

Installation
1. Lower the battery into the battery box.

2. Move the battery inward and to the side

until it reaches the rear edge of the box.
3. Tighten the clamp that secures the battery.
4. Connect the ventilation hose.
> Be sure that it is correctly connected to
the battery and the vent in the vehicle's
body.
5. Connect the red positive cable.
6. Connect the black negative cable.

323
 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Fuses

Replacing fuses Location of the fuse boxes

There are relay/fuse boxes located in the
engine compartment, the passenger compart-
ment, and the trunk.
If an electrical component fails to function, this
may be due to a blown fuse. The easiest way
to see if a fuse is blown is to remove it.
To do so:
1. Pull the fuse straight out. If a fuse is difficult
to remove, a special fuse removal tool is
located on the inside of the engine com-
partment fuse box cover.
2. From the side, examine the curved metal Engine compartment
wire in the fuse to see if it is intact. Under the glove compartment
If the wire is broken, insert a new fuse of the
Under the glove compartment
same color and amperage (written on the fuse).
If fuses burn out repeatedly, have the electrical Trunk
system inspected by a trained and qualified Not in use
Volvo service technician.

WARNING
Never use metal objects or fuses with higher
amperage than those stated on the follow-
ing pages. Doing so could seriously damage
or overload the vehicle's electrical system.

324
 09 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses 09

Engine compartment

``

325
 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Fuses

Engine compartment, upper Pos Function A Pos Function A

Engine compartment, front
Circuit breaker 60 Engine Control Module 10
Engine compartment, lower (ECM), transmission, SRS
–
Heated washer nozzles* 10
Positions
–
These fuses are all located in the engine com- Vacuum pump (5-cylinder 5
partment box. Fuses in are located under Headlight washers* 20 engine)
.
Windshield wipers 30 Lighting panel 5
NOTE -
–
• Fuses 16 – 33 and 35 – 41 may be
changed at any time when necessary. Climate system blower 40 -
• Fuses 1 – 15, 34 and 42 – 44 are relays/
-
circuit breakers and should only be –
removed or replaced by a trained and
ABS pump 40 Relay - engine compart- 5
qualified Volvo service technician.
ment box
• There is a special fuse removal tool on
ABS valves 20
the underside of the cover. Auxiliary lights* 20
–
Horn 15
Pos Function A Active Bending Lights- 10
Engine Control Module 10
Circuit breaker 50 headlight leveling*
(ECM)
Circuit breaker 50 Central electrical module 20
Control module - automatic 15
ABS 5 transmission
Circuit breaker 60
A/C compressor 15
Circuit breaker 60 Speed-dependent steering 5
force* Relay-coils 5

326 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 09 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses 09

Pos Function A Pos Function A

Starter motor relay 30 Cooling fan 60
(5-
Ignition coils 20 cyl.
engi
Engine Control Module 10 ne)

Injection system, mass air 15 80

meter, engine control mod- (6-
ule cyl.
engi
A/C compressor, engine 10 ne)
valves, engine control mod-
ule (6-cyl.), solenoids (6- Electro-hydraulic power 100
cyl. non-turbo only), mass steering
air meter (5-cyl. only)

EVAP valve, heated oxygen 15

sensor

Vacuum pump/crankcase 10
ventilation heater (5-cylin-
der engine)

Fuel leakage detection 5

``

327
 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Fuses

Under the glove compartment

Fold aside the upholstery covering the fuse Pos Function A Pos Function A
boxes.
1. Press the cover's lock and fold it up. - Controls in right rear pas- 20
senger's door
2. The fuses are accessible. -
Controls in left rear pas- 20
Positions-fuse box A Keyless drive* (door han- 5 senger's door
Pos Function A dles)
Keyless drive* 7.5
Circuit breaker - infotain- 40 -
ment system Power driver's seat* 20
Controls in driver's door 20
- Power front passenger's 20
Controls in front passeng- 20 seat*
- er's door

328 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 09 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses 09

Pos Function A Pos Function A Pos Function A

Folding rear seat head 15 Heated driver's seat* 15 Adaptive cruise control/ 10
restraints collision warning*
Park assist*, trailer hitch 5
Infotainment control mod- 5 control module*, park Courtesy lighting, rain sen- 7.5
ule assist camera* sor*

Infotainment system, Sir- 10 Blind Spot Information Sys- Steering wheel module 7.5
iusXM൅ satellite radio* tem (BLIS)*
Cental locking: fuel filler 10
Infotainment system 15 All Wheel Drive* control 5 door
module
Bluetooth hands-free sys- 5 -
tem Active chassis system* 10
Windshield washer 15
- Positions-fuse box B
Trunk open 10
Power moonroof* 5 Pos Function A
Courtesy lighting, climate Electrical folding rear seat 10
-
system sensor outboard head restraints*
- Fuel pump 20
12-volt sockets 15
Front courtesy lighting, 7.5 Climate system control 5
Heated rear seat* (pas- 15 driver's door power win-
senger's side) panel
dow controls, power
seat(s)*, HomeLInk® Wire- Alarm movement sensor*
Heated rear seat* (driver's 15
side) less Control System* -
- Instrument panel informa- 5
tion display Alarm, On-board diagnos- 5
tic system
Heated front passenger's 15
seat*

``

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 329

 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Fuses

Pos Function A
-

Airbag system, occupant 10

weight sensor

Collision warning system* 5

Throttle pedal, auto-dim 7.5

mirror function, heated rear
seats*

Brake lights 5

Power moonroof* 20

Immobilizer 5

330 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 09 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses 09

Cargo area

Positions Pos Rear fuse box A Pos Rear fuse box A

Pos Rear fuse box A
12-volt socket in trunk 15 Trailer socket 1* 40
Electric parking brake (left 30
side) - -

Electric parking brake (right 30 -

side) NOTE
- Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts
Heated rear window 30
department for the most up-to-date speci-
- fications.
Trailer socket 2* 15

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 331

 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Vehicle care

Washing the car considerably and also helps prolong the Exterior components
The following points should be kept in mind service life of the wiper blades. Volvo recommends the use of special cleaning
when washing and cleaning the car: • Wash off the dirt from the underside (wheel products, available at your Volvo retailer, for
housings, fenders, etc). cleaning colored plastic, rubber, or ornamental
• The car should be washed at regular inter- components such as chromed strips on the
vals since dirt, dust, insects and tar spots • In areas of high industrial fallout, more fre-
quent washing is recommended. exterior of your vehicle. The instructions for
adhere to the paint and may cause dam-
using these products should be followed care-
age. To help prevent corrosion, it is partic-
fully. Solvents or stain removers should not be
ularly important to wash the car frequently NOTE
in the wintertime. used.
When washing the car, remember to remove
• Avoid washing your car in direct sunlight. dirt from the drain holes in the doors and
CAUTION
Doing so may cause detergents and wax sills.
to dry out and become abrasive. To avoid • Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or rub-
scratching, use lukewarm water to soften ber components
the dirt before you wash with a soft CAUTION
sponge, and plenty of sudsy water.
• Polishing chromed strips can wear
• During high pressure washing, the away or damage the surface
• Bird droppings: Remove from paintwork spray mouthpiece must never be closer
• Polishes containing abrasive sub-
as soon as possible. Otherwise the finish to the vehicle than 13" (30 cm). Do not stances should not be used
may be permanently damaged. spray into the locks.
• A detergent can be used to facilitate the • Dirt, snow, etc., on the headlights can
softening of dirt and oil. reduce lighting capacity considerably. Automatic car wash
Clean the headlights regularly, for • We do NOT recommend washing your car
• Dry the car with a clean chamois and in an automatic wash during the first few
remember to clean the drain holes in the example when refueling.
months (because the paint will not have
doors and rocker panels. Special moonroof cautions: hardened sufficiently).
• Tar spots can be removed with tar remover • Always close the moonroof and sun • An automatic wash is a simple and quick
after the car has been washed. shade before washing your vehicle. way to clean your car, but it is worth
• A stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soapy • Never use abrasive cleaning agents on remembering that it may not be as thor-
water can be used to clean the wiper the moonroof. ough as when you yourself go over the car
blades. Frequent cleaning of the wind- with sponge and water. Keeping the under-
• Never use wax on the rubber seals
shield and wiper blades improves visibility around the moonroof. body clean is most important, especially in
the winter. Some automatic washers do

332
 09 Maintenance and specifications

Vehicle care 09

not have facilities for washing the under- Exterior lighting • Do not polish or wax your vehicle in direct
body. Condensation may form temporarily on the sunlight (the surface of the vehicle should
inside of the lenses of exterior lights such as not be warmer than 113 °F (45 °C).
CAUTION headlights, fog lights, or taillights. This is nor-
mal and the lights are designed to withstand CAUTION
• Before driving into an automatic car
moisture. Normally, condensation will dissi-
wash, turn off the optional rain sensor to Volvo does not recommend the use of long-
avoid damaging the windshield wipers. pate after the lights have been on for a short life or durable paint protection coatings,
time. some of which may claim to prevent pitting,
• Make sure that side view mirrors, auxil- fading, oxidation, etc. These coatings have
iary lamps, etc, are secure, and that any not been tested by Volvo for compatibility
antenna(s) are retracted or removed. Polishing and waxing with your vehicle's clear coat. Some of them
Otherwise there is risk of the machine • Normally, polishing is not required during may cause the clear coat to soften, crack,
dislodging them. the first year after delivery, however, wax- or cloud. Damage caused by application of
• Chromed wheels: Clean chrome- ing may be beneficial. paint protection coatings may not be cov-
ered under your vehicle's paint warranty.
plated wheels using the same deter- • Before applying polish or wax the vehicle
gents used for the body of the vehicle. must be washed and dried. Tar spots can
Aggressive wheel-cleaning agents can be removed with kerosene or tar remover.
permanently stain chrome-plated Difficult spots may require a fine rubbing
Cleaning the interior
wheels. compound. Only use cleaning agents and car care prod-
ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly
• After polishing use liquid or paste wax. and follow the instructions included with the
WARNING • Several commercially available products car care product.
contain both polish and wax.
• When the vehicle is driven immediately
Upholstery care
after being washed, apply the brakes, • Waxing alone does not substitute for pol-
including the parking brake, several ishing a dull surface. Fabric
times in order to remove any moisture • A wide range of polymer-based waxes can Clean with soapy water or a detergent. For
from the brake linings. be purchased today. These waxes are easy more difficult spots caused by oil, ice cream,
• Engine cleaning agents should not be to use and produce a long-lasting, high- shoe polish, grease, etc., use a clothing/fabric
used when the engine is warm. This gloss finish that protects the bodywork stain remover. Consult your Volvo retailer.
constitutes a fire risk. against oxidation, road dirt and fading.
AlcanteraTM suede-like material
Suede-like upholstery can be cleaned with a
soft cloth and mild soap solution.

333
 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Vehicle care

Leather care 3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with the CAUTION

Volvo's leather upholstery is manufactured sponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain,
with a protectant to repel soiling. Over time, do not rub. • Under no circumstances should gaso-
sunlight, grease and dirt can break down the line, naphtha or similar cleaning agents
4. Dry the stain with soft paper towels or a be used on the plastic or the leather
protection. Staining, cracking, scuffing, and towel, and allow the leather to dry com- since these can cause damage.
fading can result. pletely.
• Take extra care when removing stains
Volvo offers an easy-to-use, non-greasy Protecting leather upholstery such as ink or lipstick since the coloring
leather care kit formulated to clean and beau- 1. Put a small amount of protectant cream on can spread.
tify your vehicle's leather, and to renew the a cloth and apply a thin coating of cream
protective qualities of its finish. The cleaner • Use solvents sparingly. Too much sol-
to the upholstery with light circular move- vent can damage the seat padding.
removes dirt and oil buildup. The light cream ments.
protectant restores a barrier against soil and • Start from the outside of the stain and
sunlight. 2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes. work toward the center.

Volvo also offers a special leather softener that This will help the leather resist staining and • Sharp objects (e.g. pencils or pens in a
protect against sunlight's harmful UV rays. pocket) or Velcro fasteners on clothing
should be applied after the cleaner and pro-
may damage the textile upholstery.
tectant. It leaves leather soft and smooth, and
reduces friction between leather and other fin- • Clothing that is not colorfast, such as
ishes in the vehicle. new jeans or suede garments, may stain
the upholstery.
Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and
conditioning your vehicle's leather two to four
times a year. Ask your Volvo retailer about Cleaning a leather-covered steering
Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Soft- wheel
ener 943 7429. • Remove soil, dust, etc., with a damp
sponge and a neutral soap solution.
Cleaning leather upholstery
1. Pour leather cleaner on a damp sponge • Leather should be allowed to breath. Never
cover the steering wheel with a plastic pro-
and squeeze it until the cleaner foams.
tector.
2. Apply the foam to the stain by moving the • Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting
sponge with circular movements. and conditioning the steering wheel with
Volvo's Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and
Leather Softener 943 7429.

334
 09 Maintenance and specifications

Vehicle care 09

If there are stains on the steering wheel: they should be taken out for drying. Spots on regularly, for instance washing the vehicle.
textile mats can be removed with a mild deter- Touch-up if necessary.
Type 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat or blood)
gent. For best protection in winter, Volvo rec-
Paint repairs require special equipment and
– Use a soft cloth or sponge. Wipe the wheel ommends the use of Volvo rubber floor mats.
skill. Contact your Volvo retailer for any exten-
with a solution with 5% ammonia. For Consult your Volvo retailer.
sive damage.
blood stains, mix approx. 1 cup (2 dl) of
water and one ounce (25g) of salt and wipe Spots on interior plastic, metal, or wood Minor scratches can be repaired by using
the stain. surfaces Volvo touch-up paint.
Cleaning interior plastic components should
Type 2 (fat, oil, sauces, or chocolate) Color code
be done with a cleaning agent specially
1. Same procedure as for type I stains. designed for this purpose. Consult your Volvo Make sure you have the right color. The color
retailer. code number is stated on the model plate.
2. Finish by rubbing the wheel with absorbent
paper or a towel. Minor stone chips and scratches
Type 3 (dry soil or dust) Touching up paintwork Material:

1. Remove the soil/dust with a soft brush. • Primer – can

2. Same procedure as for type I stains. • Paint – touch-up pen

• Brush
CAUTION • Masking tape
Sharp objects, such as rings, could damage If the stone chip has not gone down to the bare
the leather on the steering wheel. metal and an undamaged color coat remains,
you can add paint immediately after removing
dirt.
Cleaning the seat belts
Clean only with lukewarm water and a mild
soap solution. NOTE
Paint code on the model plate1 When touching up the vehicle, it should be
Cleaning floor mats clean and dry. The surface temperature
The floor mats should be vacuumed or brushed Paint damage requires immediate attention to should be above 60 °F (15 °C).
clean regularly, especially during winter when avoid rusting. Make it a habit to check the finish

1 see page 340 for the location of the model plate.

335
 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Vehicle care

Minor scratches on the surface 4. If there is a longer scratch, you may want
If the stone chip has not penetrated down to to protect surrounding paint by masking it
the metal and an undamaged layer of paint off
remains, the touch-up paint can be applied as 5. After a few days, polish the touched-up
soon as the spot has been cleaned. areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount
of polish.
Repairing stone chips

G021832

1. Place a strip of masking tape over the dam-

aged surface. Pull the tape off so that any
loose flakes of paint adhere to it.
2. Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it with
a small brush.
3. When the primer surface is dry, the paint
can be applied using a brush. Mix the paint
thoroughly; apply several thin paint coats
and let dry after each application.

336
09 Maintenance and specifications

09

337
 Label information.................................................................................. 340
Specifications........................................................................................ 342
Overview of information and warning symbols..................................... 349
Volvo programs..................................................................................... 352

338
SPECIFICATIONS
 10 Specifications

Label information

Location of labels
10

340
 10 Specifications

Label information

List of labels Vehicle Identification Number

Model (VIN). The VIN plate is located on the top
left surface of the dashboard. The Vehicle 10
plate. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Codes for color and upholstery, etc. The Identification Number (VIN) should always
model plate is located on the rear side of be quoted in all correspondence concern-
the B-pillar (the pillar between the front and ing your vehicle with the retailer and when
rear passenger doors) and the rear pas- ordering parts.
senger's door must be open in order to see Vehicle Emission Control Information.
it. Your Volvo is designed to meet all appli-
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards cable emission standards, as evidenced by
(FMVSS) specifications (USA) and Min- the certification label on the underside of
istry of Transport (CMVSS) standards the hood. For further information regarding
(Canada). Your Volvo is designed to meet these regulations, please consult your
all applicable safety standards, as evi- Volvo retailer.
denced by the certification label on the
driver's side B-pillar (the structural mem-
ber at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of
the driver's door opening). For further infor-
mation regarding these regulations, please
consult your Volvo retailer.
Tire inflation
pressures. This label indicates the correct
inflation pressures for the tires that were on
the vehicle when it left the factory. Cana-
dian models have the upper decal; U.S.
models have the lower one.

341
 10 Specifications

Specifications

Dimensions–S60
10

Position Dimension in (mm)

A Wheelbase 109.3 (2776)

B Length 182.2 (4628)

C Load length, floor, seatback down 68.9 (1749)

D Load length, floor 38.0 (965)

E Height 58.4 (1484)

F Load height 18.3 (465)

342
 10 Specifications

Specifications

Position Dimension in (mm)

10
G Track, front 62.5 (1588)A/
62.1 (1578)B

H Track, rear 62.4 (1585)A/

62.0 (1575)B

I Load width, floor 36.2 (919)

J Width 73.4 (1865)

K Width incl. door mirrors (folded out) 82.6 (2097)

L Width incl. door mirrors (folded in) 74.8 (1899)

A with 16" wheels
B with 17" wheels

``

343
 10 Specifications

Specifications

Weights
10 Category USA Canada
Gross vehicle weight
4610 lbs 2090 kg
5-cyl. FWDA 4770 lbs 2165 kg
5-cyl. AWDB 5050 lbs 2290 kg
6-cyl. AWD

Capacity weight
1025 lbs 465 kg
5-cyl. FWD
1025 lbs 465 kg
5-cyl. AWD
1200 lbs 545 kg
6-cyl. AWD

Permissible axle weights, front

2580 lbs 1170 kg
5-cyl. FWD
2635 lbs 1195 kg
5-cyl. AWD
2755 lbs 1250 kg
6-cyl. AWD

Permissible axle weights, rear

2160 lbs 980 kg
5-cyl. FWD
2270 lbs 1030 kg
5-cyl. AWD
2490 lbs 1130 kg
6-cyl. AWD

Curb weight 3480 - 3810 lbs 1580 - 1730 kg

Max. roof load 165 lbs 75 kg

344
 10 Specifications

Specifications

Category USA Canada

Max. trailer weights Without brakes: 1650 lbs Without brakes: 750 kg 10

With brakes, 1 7/8” ball: 2,000 lbs With brakes, 1 7/8” ball: 900 kg
With brakes, 2” ball: 3,300 lbs With brakes, 2” ball: 1500 kg

Max. tongue weight 165 lbs 75 kg

A Front Wheel Drive
B All Wheel Drive

Engine specifications
Specification/Model 5-cyl. 3.0T
Engine designation B5254T12 B6304T4

Output (kW/rps) 187/90 224/93

Output (hp/rpm) 254/5400 rpm 300/5600

Torque (Nm/rps) 360/30-70 440/35 – 70

Torque (ft. lbs./rpm) 266/1800-4200 325/2100 – 4200

No. of cylinders 5 6

Bore (in/mm) 3.27/83 3.23/82

Stroke (in/mm) 3.63/92.3 3.67/93.2

``

345
 10 Specifications

Specifications

Specification/Model 5-cyl. 3.0T

10 Displacement 2.497 liters / (152.4 cu. in.) 2.95 liters (175 cu. in.)

Compression ratio 9.5:1 9.3:1

Oil specifications good fuel economy and engine protection. See Extreme engine operation
Engine oil must meet the minimum the viscosity chart. SAE 0W-30 oil meeting ACEA A5/B5 require-
ACEA A5/B5. Lower quality oils may not offer ments is recommended for driving in areas with
the same fuel economy, engine performance, sustained low temperatures.
or engine protection.
Oil additives must not be used.

Oil viscosity
Incorrect viscosity oil can shorten engine life
under normal use. SAE 5W-30 will provide

Viscosity chart

Oil volume
Engine model Volume (incl. filter)
3.0T (6 cyl.) B6304T4 7.18 US qts (6.8 liters)

T12 (5 cyl.) B5254T12 7.6 US qts (7.2 liters)

346
 10 Specifications

Specifications

Other fluids and lubricants

Fluid System Volume Specification 10

Transmission oilA Automatic (TF-80SC) 7.4 US qts (7 liters) Transmission fluid AW-1

Coolant 3.0T 9.4 US qts. (8.9 liters) Coolant with corrosion inhibitor
mixed with water (50/50 mix), see
T5
packaging.

Air conditioning All models 1.7 lbs (770 g) Refrigerant: R134a (HFC134a),
PAG oil

Brake fluid 0.63 US qts (0.6 liters) DOT 4+

Power steering 1.26 US qts (1.2 liters) Power steering fluid WSS
M2C204-A2 or equivalent product.

Washer fluid 6.8 US qts (6.5 liters) Use a washer antifreeze recom-
mended by Volvo, mixed with
4.7 US qts (4.5 litersB)
water.

Fuel tank volume 18.5 US gallons (70 liters)

A Under normal driving conditions the transmission oil does not need changing during its service life. However, it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions.
B Models without headlight washers

``

347
 10 Specifications

Specifications

Electrical system CAUTION

10 General information If the battery is replaced, replace it with a
12 volt system with a voltage-regulated alter- battery of the same cold start capacity and
nator. Single pole system in which the chassis reserve capacity as the original (see the
decal on the battery).
and engine block are used as conductors. The
negative terminal is connected to the chassis.

Performance, battery
Engine 3.0T/T5

Voltage (V) 12

Cold start capacity (A) 520 – 700

Reserve capacity (min) 100 – 135

WARNING
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!
Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the state of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash hands after handling.

348
 10 Specifications

Overview of information and warning symbols

Introduction Symbols in the main instrument panel Indicator symbols

The symbols in the vehicle's various displays Symbol Description P.
Warning symbols 10
are divided into three main categories:
Symbol Description P. no.
• Warning symbols
• Indicator symbols no. Fault in the Active 79
Bending Light
• Information symbols Low oil pressure 80 (ABL)*system
The following tables list the most common
symbols, their meaning and the pages in this Parking brake 80 Malfunction indicator 79
manual that provide more detailed information. light
A
Warning symbol A

The red warning symbol lights up to Anti-lock brake sys- 79

SRS airbags 80
indicate a problem related to safety and/or tem (ABS)
drivability. A message will also appear in the
A
main instruments panel's display. Seat belt reminder 80

Information symbol Rear fog light on 79

Generator not charg- 81
The information symbol lights up and a ing
text message is displayed to provide the driver Stability system 79
with necessary information about one of the Fault in the brake sys- 81 (DSTC), Trailer Stabil-
vehicle's systems. tem ity Assist*
A
Tire pressure monitor- 79
ing sensor (TPMS)
Warning symbol 81
Low fuel level 79
A Canadian models
Information symbol, 79
see text in information
display

``

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 349

 10 Specifications

Overview of information and warning symbols

Symbol Description P. Symbol Description P. Symbol Description P.

10 no. no. no.
High beam indicator 78 Adaptive Cruise Con- 139, Driver Alert System* 165
trol * 146
Left turn signal indica- 78
tor
Adaptive Cruise Con- 139, Active Bending Lights 96
Right turn signal indi- 78 trol *, Distance Alert* 146, (ABL)*
cator 148
A Canadian models Adaptive Cruise Con- 139, Fuel filler door (arrow 78
trol *, Distance Alert* 146, indicates it is on right
Other information symbols 148 side of vehicle)
Symbol Description P.
Adaptive Cruise Con- 139, Rain sensor* 101
no. trol* 146
Adaptive Cruise Con- 139, Driver Alert System* 166
trol * 146
Radar sensor* 143
Adaptive Cruise Con- 139,
trol * 146 Driver Alert System*, 168
Lane Departure Warn-
Adaptive Cruise Con- 139, Camera* 161 ing*
trol *, Distance Alert* 146,
148 Laser sensor* Driver Alert System*, 168
Lane Departure Warn-
Adaptive Cruise Con- 139, Collision Warning with 163 ing*
trol *, Distance Alert* 146, Full Auto-brake and
148 Pedestrian Detection* Adaptive Cruise Con- 139,
trol * 146

350 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

 10 Specifications

Overview of information and warning symbols

Information symbols in the center

console display
10
Symbol Description P.
no.
Audio files 232

CD folder 232

Video files 232

Bluetooth-connected 241
cell phone

BluetoothTM hands- 241

free

HD radio 224

Park Assist* 171

Information symbols in the ceiling

console
Symbol Description P.
no.
Seat belt reminder 20

Occupant Weight 27
Sensor

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 351

 10 Specifications

Volvo programs

Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance

Your new Volvo comes with a four year ON
10
CALL roadside assistance. Additional informa-
tion, features, and benefits are described in a
separate information package in your glove
compartment.
If you require assistance, dial:
In the U.S. 1-800-638-6586 (1-800-63-
VOLVO)
In Canada 1-800-263-0475

Technician certification
In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo sup-
ports certification by the National Institute for
Automotive Service Excellence (A.S.E.). Certi-
fied technicians have demonstrated a high
degree of competence in specific areas.
Besides passing exams, each technician must
also have worked in the field for two or more
years before a certificate is issued. These pro-
fessional technicians are best able to analyze
vehicle problems and perform the necessary
maintenance procedures to keep your Volvo at
peak operating condition.

352
10 Specifications

10

353
 11 Index

1, 2, 3 ... Anti-freeze....................................... 256, 310 oil........................................................ 347

Anti-lock brake system shiftlock override................................ 120
12-volt sockets........................................ 208 warning light......................................... 78 Axle weight.............................................. 283
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)................. 122

11 A Approach lighting.............................. 55, 100

B
Audio system
ABS (anti-lock brake system).................. 122 AUX/USB sockets............................... 235 Battery
Accessory installation warning.................. 13 BluetoothŸ devices............................. 238 changing..................................... 321, 322
BluetoothŸ hands-free system........... 240 maintenance....................................... 321
Active chassis system............................. 205
Bluetooth streaming audio................. 238 remote key, replacing........................... 58
Active high beams..................................... 95 getting started.................................... 213 specifications...................................... 348
Active yaw control................................... 130 HD digital radio................................... 224 warning symbols................................. 320
Adaptive brake lights............................... 121 introduction......................................... 212
Blind Spot Information System
media player....................................... 231
Adaptive cruise control.................... 137, 139 (BLIS)....................................... 179, 180, 181
overview.............................................. 212
Airbags radio functions.................................... 222 Bluetooth cell phone connection............. 240
disconnecting the front passenger’s SiriusXM൅ satellite radio.................... 226 Booster cushions....................................... 46
side................................................. 27, 28 sound settings.................................... 217 Brake lights.............................................. 121
front...................................................... 23 steering wheel keypad........................ 214
inflatable curtain................................... 33 Brake system
voice control....................................... 248
side impact........................................... 31 ABS..................................................... 122
Auto-dim rearview mirror......................... 106 Brake pad inspection.......................... 121
Air conditioning........................................ 200
Automatic locking retractor....................... 38 checking fluid level............................. 310
Air distribution.......................................... 196 emergency brake assistance.............. 122
Automatic transmission
Air distribution table................................. 202 Geartronic........................................... 119 fluid..................................................... 347
Air vents................................................... 197 general description..................... 118, 119 general information............................. 121
warning light......................................... 80
All Wheel Drive......................................... 120

354
 11 Index

Bulbs ISOFIX/LATCH anchors........................ 47 Corner Traction Control........................... 130

headlights........................... 312, 313, 314 top tether anchors................................ 48 Courtesy lighting........................................ 99
introduction......................................... 312 Child safety................................................ 37 Crash event data......................................... 9
license plate lights.............................. 316 booster cushions.................................. 46
specifications...................................... 317 Crash mode............................................... 36
child restraint systems.......................... 40
trunk lighting....................................... 316 convertible seats.................................. 44 Cruise control.................................. 135, 136
11
infant seats........................................... 42 adaptive.............................................. 137

Child safety locks...................................... 49 Curb weight............................................. 283

C City Safety™............................................ 151 Current, conserving................................. 255

Camera, Park Assist................................ 175 Climate system........................................ 200

air distribution............................. 196, 202
Capacity weight....................................... 283
air vents.............................................. 197 D
Catalytic converter................................... 260
Interior Air Quality System.................. 196
Cell phone, hands-free connection......... 240 Defroster.................................................. 200
introduction......................................... 195
Cell phone voice control.......................... 248 passenger compartment filter............ 196 Detachable key blade.......................... 57, 60

Central locking system, introduction......... 52 refrigerant........................................... 195 Disconnecting the front passenger’s air-
Clock, setting............................................. 82 bag....................................................... 27, 28
Chains...................................................... 286
Cold weather driving................................ 256 Dome lighting............................................. 99
Check engine light..................................... 78
Collision warning system................. 157, 158 Door mirrors............................................. 105
Check Engine warning light....................... 79
Compass in rearview mirror..................... 107 Driver alert............................................... 165
Child restraints
recalls and registration......................... 39 Conserving electrical current................... 255 Driver distraction warning.......................... 13

Child restraint systems.............................. 40 Controls, center console.......................... 213 Driving economically................................ 254
booster cushions.................................. 46 Convertible seats....................................... 44 Driving in cold weather............................ 256
convertible seats.................................. 44 Driving through water.............................. 255
Coolant............................................ 310, 347
infant seats........................................... 42
Cooling system, general information....... 255

355
 11 Index

E Eyelets for anchoring loads..................... 262 Fuses............................... 324, 325, 328, 331

ECC................................................. 200, 201

Economical driving.................................. 254 F G
Electric parking brake.............................. 124
11 Federal Clean Air Act............................... 304 Garage door opener
Electronic Climate Control....... 198, 200, 201 HomeLink® Wireless Control System. 110
Flat tires
air distribution table............................ 202
repairing with tire sealing system....... 288 Gasoline requirements............................. 258
Interior Air Quality System.................. 201
Floor mats Gas tank volume...................................... 347
Emergency locking retractor...................... 38
cleaning.............................................. 335 Gauges...................................................... 77
Emergency starting.................................. 116 placing correctly................................. 113
Geartronic................................................ 119
Emergency towing................................... 268 Fluid specifications.................................. 347
Geartronic automatic transmission.......... 119
Emission inspection readiness................ 305 Fog lights
Generator warning light............................. 80
Engine front/rear............................................... 97
overheating........................................... 81 Glossary of tire terminology..................... 282
Four C (active chassis system)................ 205
specifications...................................... 345 Grocery bag holder.................................. 263
Front airbags.............................................. 23
starting................................................ 113
disconnecting passenger’s side air- Gross vehicle weight............................... 283
switching off....................................... 116
bag.................................................. 27, 28
Engine compartment overview................ 307
Front park assist.............................. 171, 173
Engine Drag Control (EDC)...................... 130
Front seats........................................... 86, 88 H
Engine oil................................................. 346
Fuel filler cap........................................... 260 Hazard warning flashers............................ 98
checking............................................. 308
low pressure warning light.............. 79, 80 Fuel filler door, opening........................... 259 HD digital radio........................................ 224
volumes.............................................. 346 Fuel level warning light.............................. 79 Headlights
Engine remote start (ERS)........................ 115 Fuel requirements............................ 257, 258 Active Bending Lights........................... 96
Environment............................................... 12 active high beams................................. 95
Fuel tank volume..................................... 347

356
 11 Index

changing bulbs........................... 313, 314 Infant seats................................................ 42 Interior lighting........................................... 99

high/low beams.................................... 93 Inflatable Curtain........................................ 33 iPodŸ connector (audio system)............. 235
high beam flash.................................... 94
Inflation pressure..................................... 277 ISOFIX/LATCH anchors............................. 47
tunnel detection.................................... 96
Inflation pressure table............................ 279
Headlight washers................................... 102
Information and warning symbols, table
Head restraints, rear seat.......................... 89
of.............................................................. 349 J 11
Heated oxygen sensors........................... 261
Information lights..................... 77, 78, 79, 80 Jack
Heated rear seats.................................... 199
Information symbol.................................... 79 attaching............................................. 295
High beams................................................ 93 location of........................................... 294
Infotainment
active.................................................... 95
Menu navigation................................. 216 Jump starting........................................... 116
indicator light........................................ 79
Infotainment system................................ 212
Hoisting the vehicle................................. 305
AUX/USB sockets............................... 235
HomeLink® Wireless Control System...... 110 BluetoothŸ devices............................. 238 K
Home safe lighting............................. 99, 100 Bluetooth® hands-free system........... 240
getting started.................................... 213 Key blade................................. 52, 57, 60, 61
Hood, opening/closing............................ 307
media player....................................... 231 private locking...................................... 60
Horn........................................................... 92 valet locking.......................................... 60
menus......................................... 213, 216
radio functions.................................... 222 Keyless drive
sound settings.................................... 217 general description............................... 61
I voice control....................................... 248 starting the vehicle............................. 113

Ignition modes........................................... 84 Inspection readiness................................ 305

Immobilizer................................................ 54 Instrument lighting..................................... 93

Important information.................................. 6 Instrument overview............................ 76, 77

Indicator lights......................... 77, 78, 79, 80 Instrument panel...................................... 187

Interior Air Quality System....................... 196

357
 11 Index

L Malfunction indicator light......................... 79 Oil

Media player (infotainment system)......... 231 checking............................................. 308
Labels volumes.............................................. 346
Menu........................................................ 189
list of................................................... 341 Oil quality................................................. 346
location of........................................... 340 Messages in the instrument panel........... 187
OK button................................................ 187
LATCH anchors......................................... 47 Mirrors
11
defroster............................................. 106 On Call Roadside Assistance.................. 352
Leather care............................................. 334
power door......................................... 105 Overhead courtesy lighting........................ 99
Lighting panel............................................ 93 rearview, auto-dim function................ 106 Overheating, engine................................... 81
Load anchoring eyelets........................... 262 retractable........................................... 105
Oxygen sensors, heated.......................... 261
Loading the vehicle.......................... 262, 283 vanity.................................................. 208
roof loads............................................ 264 Moonroof................................................. 108
Locking...................................................... 65 Motor oil
checking............................................. 308
P
Locking the vehicle.................................... 55
volumes.............................................. 346 Paint, touching up.................................... 335
Locks, child safety..................................... 49
MY CAR................................................... 189 Park assist....................................... 171, 173
Low beams................................................ 93
Park Assist Camera................................. 175
Low fuel level warning light........................ 79
Parking brake
Low oil pressure warning light................... 80 O electric, applying/releasing................. 124
warning light......................................... 80
Occupant safety........................................ 16
M Occupant weight sensor...................... 27, 28
Parking lights............................................. 97
Personal Car Communicator, unique func-
Octane recommendations....................... 258
Main instrument panel............................. 187 tions........................................................... 56
Odometer, trip........................................... 82
Maintenance............................................ 304 Polishing.................................................. 333
hoisting the vehicle............................. 305
performed by the owner..................... 305

358
 11 Index

Power front seat Rear seats Remote key/PCC

memory function................................... 87 center head restraint............................. 89 common functions................................ 55
with keyless drive................................. 88 folding................................................... 89 Reporting safety defects............................ 17
Power mirrors.......................................... 105 heated................................................. 199
Roadside Assistance............................... 352
defroster............................................. 106 Rearview mirror
Road sign information (RSI)..................... 133
Power moonroof...................................... 108 auto-dim function............................... 106 11
compass............................................. 107 Roof loads............................................... 264
Power steering
fluid..................................................... 311 Rear window defroster............................ 106

S
speed-dependent............................... 205 Recalls, child restraints.............................. 39
Power steering fluid................................. 347 Refrigerant............................................... 347
Power windows....................................... 103 Refueling.......................................... 257, 258 Safety, occupant........................................ 16
Pregnancy, using seat belts during........... 20 fuel filler cap....................................... 260 Safety defects, reporting........................... 17
fuel filler door...................................... 259 Seat belt
Private locking........................................... 60
fuel tank volume................................. 347 reminder................................................ 20
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING.. 116, 323, 348
Registering child restraints........................ 39 Seat belts
Remote control Automatic locking retractor/Emergency

R
private locking...................................... 60 locking retractor.................................... 38
Remote key................................................ 52 buckling................................................ 18
Radio approach lighting.................................. 55 maintenance......................................... 19
SiriusXM൅ satellite radio.................... 226 immobilizer........................................... 54 pretensioners........................................ 18
key blade.................................. 52, 57, 60 reminder................................................ 19
Radio functions........................................ 222
locking the vehicle................................ 55 reminder warning light.......................... 80
HD digital radio................................... 224
Personal Car Communicator.......... 55, 56 securing child restraint systems 42, 44, 46
Rain sensor.............................................. 101 replacing the battery............................. 58 unbuckling............................................ 19
Rear fog light............................................. 97 unlocking the vehicle............................ 55 use during pregnancy........................... 20
Rear park assist............................... 171, 173 using..................................................... 18

359
 11 Index

Seats, front.......................................... 86, 87 Steering wheel glossary of terms................................ 282

Sensus..................................................... 186 adjusting............................................... 92 improving economy............................ 275
horn....................................................... 92 inflation pressure................................ 277
Shiftlock....................................................... 9
keypad.................................. 92, 189, 214 inflation pressure table....................... 279
override............................................... 120
Stone chips, touching up......................... 335 load ratings......................................... 278
Side door mirrors..................................... 105 rotation............................................... 274
11 Storage spaces........................................ 206
Side impact airbags................................... 31 Self-supporting run flat tires (SST)..... 300
Studded tires........................................... 286 snow................................................... 286
Sign information (RSI).............................. 133
Sunroof (moonroof).................................. 108 spare................................................... 287
SiriusXM൅ satellite radio......................... 226
Sun shade................................................ 104 specifications...................................... 278
Snow chains............................................ 286 speed ratings...................................... 278
Supplemental restraint system.................. 22
Snow tires................................................ 286 storing................................................. 276
warning light......................................... 80
studded............................................... 286
Spare tire................................................. 287
Symbols, overview................................... 349 tire pressure monitoring system......... 298
Speed-dependent steering...................... 205 tire sealing system.............................. 288
Spin control............................................. 130 tread wear indicator............................ 275
SRS............................................................ 22 T uniform tire quality grading................. 285
Stability system............................... 130, 131 Tire sealing system.................................. 288
Temporary spare tire............................... 287
Corner Traction Control (CTC)............ 130 Top tether anchors (child restraint sys-
Engine Drag Control (EDC)................. 130 Three-way catalytic converter................. 260 tems).......................................................... 48
indicator light........................................ 79 Tire designations..................................... 280 Touching up paint.................................... 335
Starting the engine.................................. 113 Tire inflation pressure.............................. 279 Towing a trailer................................ 265, 266
remote start........................................ 115 Tire Pressure Monitoring System.... 298, 299 trailer hitch.......................................... 266
with keyless drive............................... 113 indicator light........................................ 79 Towing the vehicle................................... 268
Starting the vehicle Tires......................................................... 274 Traction control........................................ 130
after a crash (crash mode).................... 36 age...................................................... 274
Start inhibitor (immobilizer)........................ 54 changing from summer to winter........ 275

360
 11 Index

Trailer towing................................... 265, 266 V Warning system, collision................ 157, 158

trailer hitch.......................................... 266 Warranties................................................ 304
Transmission Valet locking.............................................. 60
Washer fluid..................................... 319, 347
general description..................... 118, 119 Vanity mirror............................................ 208
Washers
oil........................................................ 347 changing bulbs................................... 317
headlight............................................. 102
shiftlock override................................ 120 Vehicle Event Data....................................... 9 11
windshield........................................... 101
Tread wear indicator................................ 275 Vehicle loading................................ 262, 283 Water, driving through............................. 255
Trip computer.......................................... 203 roof loads............................................ 264
Waxing..................................................... 333
Trip odometers.......................................... 82 Vehicle maintenance................................ 304
Weights.................................................... 344
Trips, long distance................................. 255 performed by the owner..................... 305
Wheels..................................................... 274
Trunk Vehicle weights........................................ 344
changing..................................... 294, 295
changing bulbs................................... 316 Voice control storing................................................. 276
driving with it open............................. 254 cell phones......................................... 248
Whiplash Protection System..................... 34
opening manually................................. 67 Volvo and the environment........................ 12
Windows
Tunnel detection........................................ 96 Volvo maintenance.................................. 304 power.................................................. 103
Turn signals............................................... 98 Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance........ 352 Windshield
indicator lights...................................... 79
Volvo programs....................................... 352 rain sensor.......................................... 101
Volvo Sensus........................................... 186 washers.............................................. 102
wipers/washers................................... 101
U Windshield washer fluid................... 319, 347
Uniform Tire Quality Grading................... 285 W Windshield wipers.................................... 318
Unlocking the vehicle.......................... 55, 65 service position................................... 318
Warning flashers, hazard........................... 98
Upholstery care....................................... 333 Wiper blades
Warning lights.......................... 77, 78, 79, 80 replacing............................................. 318
Warning symbol......................................... 81

361
 11 Index

11

362
Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dc
51

64"

$BOBEB

"5

1SJOUFE
JO
4XFEFO
(zUFCPSH

$PQZSJHIU
©

7PMWP
$BS
$PSQPSBUJPO